Pastries Like a Pro

  • Home
  • Recipes
  • About Helen
  • Mother's Day
  • Subscribe
  • Contact
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Home
  • Recipes
  • About Helen
  • Mother's Day
  • Subscribe
  • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
    • Twitter
  • subscribe
    search icon
    Homepage link
    • Home
    • Recipes
    • About Helen
    • Mother's Day
    • Subscribe
    • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
    • Twitter
  • ×
    Home

    Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe

    Modified: Mar 22, 2025 · Published: Mar 18, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 14 Comments

    An open Cinnamon Roll sits on a flowral plate with a plate of rolls behind it and a blue dotted cup and saucer are off to the side.

    These really are the Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe. Why? Because I've added a Cinnamon Crunch topping (think Cinnamon Crunch Bagels) which takes this way over the top! Combining these two makes a completely new and different roll that's easy to make. These are perfect for an Easter Brunch.

    This amazing dough is a marvel. It is more of a batter and, as such, has to be refrigerated to roll it. Here is the really good news. If you've ever worked with yeast doughs that spring back constantly when rolling them out, you know what a pain it is to wait 10 minutes while they relax. Well there is no waiting and no springing back with this recipe. It stays where you roll it.

    An open Cinnamon Roll sits on a flowral plate with a plate of rolls behind it and a blue dotted cup and saucer are off to the side.

    While any yeasted product is best the day it is made, these last with great results for several days. More good news! I have included a traditional vanilla glaze as well as the cinnamon crunch topping. Both freeze beautifully. The rolls with the cinnamon crunch topping thaw with the topping still crunchy. The rolls with the vanilla glaze should be frozen without the glaze for the best results.

    Everyone loves a sweet roll - here are a few other to try: Orange Macadamia Rolls, Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones, Lemon Sugar Rolls, and German Chocolate Sweet Rolls.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What Makes This Recipe Doable

    • It has a couple of steps but they are all very easy.
    • The dough goes together effortlessly as well as quickly.
    • The dough is a dream to roll out. With no spring back filling goes on quickly.
    • Baking these in jumbo paper liners ensures the cinnamon crunch topping doesn't get stuck to the pan.
    • It is super easy to remove the rolls from the paper with the topping intact.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Dough

    The ingredients for the Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recip include, all-purpose flour, sour cream, water, unsalted butter, eggs, granulated sugar, salt,  yeast, and vanilla.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, yeast, vanilla

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, eggs, granulated sugar

    BACK ROW: Sour cream, all-purpose flour, water

    Cinnamon Crunch Topping

    The ingredients for the cinnamon sugar filling are brown sugar, granulated sugar, vanilla, unsalted butter and cinnamon.

    FRONT ROW: Vanilla, unsalted butter and cinnamon

    BACK ROW: Brown sugar, granulated sugar

    Vanilla Glaze

    Ingredients for the vanilla glaze  are powdered sugar, butter, vanilla and milk

    FRONT ROW: Milk, unsalted butter, vanilla

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar

    Important Ingredients

    • All-purpose flour is the flour of choice for this particular recipe.
    • While the recipe uses instant yeast, it is still added to the liquid ingredients.
    • Korinje cinnamon is my choice for its bold, intense flavor.
    • The Sour Cream adds softness to the final, baked dough and enhances its shelf life.
    • Dark Brown Sugar is preferred over light for its more intense flavor.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Cinnamon Crunch Rolls

    The first collage shows the paper liners for the pans, the sour cream added to the melted butter, and the flour in the mixing bowl.

    Step 1. Line jumbo muffin tins with one of the paper liners. This will make removing the rolls easier and keep the crunch in tact. Spray them with a non-stick baking release and set aside. Step 2. Melt the butter, sugar and salt in a small sauce pan. Heat it until the butter melts. Alternatively, it can be done in a microwave. Cool to lukewarm. When it comes to temperature, whisk in the sour cream and vanilla. Step 3. Whisk in the eggs, yeast and water. Step 4. Place the flour in the bowl of a mixer.

    The liquid ingredients are added to the flour, the finished dough, the dough in a container and the time marked on top.

    Step 5. Add the liquid to the flour in the mixing bowl. Step 6. Fit the mixer with a dough hook if possible. Beat until it comes together then knead in the mixer for 3 minutes, turning in the bowl after about 1 ½ minutes as the dough will adhere to the top of the dough hook and not get kneaded. The dough will be very soft and more of a batter. Step 7. Spray a container at lest 3 times as big as the dough with a non-sick baking release. Place the dough in it and cover with film. Step 8. Place the cover on the container (or cover with a tea towel) and mark the time on it. It should take about 2 to 2 ½ hours to nearly triple. Deflate the dough and refrigerate overnight or up to 3 days. It may or may not rise again in the fridge. It doesn't matter either way,

    Assembling the rolls

    This collage shows the dough in a rectangle ready to be rolled, rolled and buttered, filled with the cinnamon filling and the far edge wet.

    Step 9. Prior to rolling out the dough combine the ingredients for the cinnamon filling, cover with plastic wrap and set aside. Remove the dough from the fridge and shape into a thick rectangle. Step 10. Roll the dough into an 22" x 13" rectangle, keeping the long side horizontal on the table. Brush with the melted butter. Step 11. Spread the filling evenly over the dough to within ½ inch of the far edge. Step 12. Wet the far end of the dough lightly with water.

    The dough rolled up, the seam sealed, thread under the roll at 1 ½" and the thread brought to the top and crossed.

    Step 13. Roll the dough up completely making sure the seam is on top. Step 14 . Using your finger, seal the seam by smearing the dough down. Step 15. Mark the dough into 1 12" pieces. The cleanest cuts can be made by putting a long piece of thread under the marked piece of dough. Step 16. Bring the thread up to the top, cross it over and pull to make a clean cut. The filling will be loose so pick the roll up carefully keeping the filling intact and place it in a paper round. Repeat with the rest of the rolls.

    Cinnamon Crunch Topping

    This collages shows the dry ingredients for the crunch topping in a bowl, mixed, the butter and vanilla mixed and added to the dry ingredients.

    Step 17. Place the dry ingredients in a bowl. Step 18. Mix them thoroughly. Step 19. Combine the melted butter and the vanilla. Step 20. Add the liquid to the dry ingredients and mix with a fork. They will not form crumbs and be slightly wet.

    In the last collage of the  Cinnamon Crunch Rolls, the rolls are brushed with egg white, the crunch is placed on top, then after baking, the paper liner, is carefully removed from the roll.

    Step 21. Brush the risen rolls with beaten egg white to hold the crunch in place. Step 22. Cover the top of the rolls with about a slightly heaping tablespoon of topping each. Press lightly into the egg white. Step 23. A few minutes after pulling them from the oven, carefully lift the papers, with the rolls, out of the pans. Step 24. Carefully, pull the paper down to release the rolls and topping. Place on a cooling rack to cool completely.

    Recipe FAQS

    What is the best way to cut cinnamon rolls?

    By using thread or thin dental floss placed under the roll and brought to the top then crossed and pulled quickly the rolls will be perfectly cut without altering the roundness of the roll.

    Why not cut cinnamon rolls with a knife?

    Because the dough is soft, a knife will squash the rolls and get them out of shape.

    What makes a soft yeast dough?

    Milk, sour cream or buttermilk will all help soften the dough as well as add flavor. Having a batter, which is looser, instead of a more firm dough also contributes to a softer roll with a longer shelf life.

    Storage and Freezing

    The rolls, fully baked, can be well wrapped and frozen. The rolls with the cinnamon crunch can be baked as is. If the rolls are to be finished with the Vanilla Glaze, they should be frozen without the glaze. Thaw at room temperature. To freshen preheat the oven to 350°F, place them in a sheet pan and cover with foil. Heat for about 15 minutes.

    Make the vanilla glaze and glaze the rolls after they have cooled. They can also be served without the cinnamon crunch or glaze.

    Expert Tips

    • The dough can refrigerated up to 3 days.
    • I often bake individual rolls in Jumbo muffin pans lined with large muffin papers. Doing it this way avoids the rolls sticking as they sometimes can and they bake up with softer sides.
    • Be sure to spray the paper lines for easier releasing.
    • Do not be tempted to add additional flour. The dough should remain a batter. Chilling it overnight will firm it up and make it easy to handle.
    • Be sure to make the filling ahead of rolling out the dough so it won't warm up and become soft.
    The open cinnamon crunch roll is on a white plate with flowers on the edge. A plate of rolls is in the background and a blue dotted cup and saucer are on the right.

    Here are some other amazing sweet breads

    • Sweet Kolache with pineapple, cream cheese, fig, raspberry fillings
      The Marvelous Variable Kolache
    • Five Mexican sweet rolls, Conchas with different toppings.
      Conchas - A Mexican Sweet Bread

    Love this Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

    An open Cinnamon Roll sits on a flowral plate with a plate of rolls behind it and a blue dotted cup and saucer are off to the side.

    Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These really are the Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe. Why? Because I've added a Cinnamon Crunch topping (think Cinnamon Crunch Bagels) which takes this way over the top!
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 2 hours hrs
    Chilling Time 1 day d
    Total Time 1 day d 2 hours hrs
    Course Breakfast/brunch
    Cuisine American
    Servings 14 rolls
    Calories 504 kcal

    Equipment

    • Jumbo Muffin Pans
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Cinnamon Roll Dough

    • ½ cup unsalted butter (114 grams or 1 stick)
    • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 1 cup sour cream (225 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 2 ¼ teaspoons instant yeast (1 packet)
    • ½ cup water, lukewarm
    • 2 large eggs
    • 4 cups all-purpose flour (560 grams)

    Cinnamon Filling

    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (45 grams)
    • 1 cup dark brown sugar (200 grams)
    • 2 +1 tablespoon + teaspoon cinnamon

    Cinnamon Crunch Topping - If making all 14 of the rolls with the crunch topping DOUBLE THIS RECIPE

    • ½ cup dark brown sugar (100 grams)
    • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
    • 1 tablespoon cinnamon
    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter (58 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 1 egg white to brush on rolls

    Vanilla Glaze - If making all 14 rolls with the vanilla glaze - DOUBLE THIS RECIOPE

    • 1 ½ cups powdered sugar (200 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter (45 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 2 to 3 tablespoons milk

    Instructions
     

    Cinnamon Roll Dough

    • Cut the butter into pieces and place in a small saucepan along with the sugar and salt.  Heat until the butter is melted.  Remove from the heat and let it sit until it is lukewarm. 
    • Whisk in the sour cream and vanilla followed by the eggs, yeast, and water.
    • Add the flour to the bowl of a mixer. Fit the mixer with a dough hook if available.
    • Pour the liquid over the flour and beat on low to bring together. Knead in the machine for 3 minutes, turning after about 1 ½ minutes as the dough will adhere to the top of the dough hook and not get beaten.  The dough will be very soft and more of a batter.
    • Spray a container at least 3 times the size of the dough with a non-stick baking release. Add the dough and cover with plastic wrap. Mark the time on it. Allow it to rise until doubled, about 2 to 2 ½ hours. 
    • After it has risen, deflate it, re-cover it and refrigerate overnight so the butter can firm up. It may or may not rise again in the fridge. That's fine. It can be refrigerated up to 3 days.

    Cinnamon Filling

    • Melt the butter. Reserve. Combine the brown sugar and cinnamon, mixing completely. Cover with plastic wrap to prevent the brown sugar from drying out.

    Assembly

    • Line 14 jumbo muffin cups with jumbo paper liners. Spray with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • Remove from the refrigerator. Roll the dough into a 13" x 22" rectangle, keeping the 22" side horizontal on the table.
    • Brush it with the melted butter from the Cinnamon Filling to within ½" of the far edge. Spread the filling over the butter keeping the far edge without anything on it.
    • Starting from the long side (22") roll the dough up tightly to within the ½'. Brush the edge with water. Bring it up to cover the dough and seal the edge by, pressing it down and smearing the edge.
    • Mark the roll 1 ½". Place a long piece of thread or fine floss under the dough on the marking extending to the front and back. Bring the thread up to the top, cross it and pull sharply on both ends. It will cut the rolls cleanly. Repeat with the remaining rolls.
    • The filling will be loose, so pick it up quickly and carefully place it into the sprayed paper cups, filling side down. Press the rolls flat in the cups.
    • When all of the rolls are in the cups, cover with tea towels and allow them to rise until doubled but reaching only to about ½" of the top, about 1 ½ hours.

    Cinnamon Crunch Topping

    • While the rolls are rising, combine the brown and granulated sugar with the cinnamon, mixing well. Cover with plastic wrap to keep the brown sugar from drying out.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • Add the melted butter (rewarm if it has solidified) and vanilla to the cinnamon-sugar mixture and blend together. This will not be crumbs. It is more of a thick paste.
    • When the rolls are ready, beat the egg white till foamy. Brush the tops of the rolls with the egg white.
    • Gently, so as not to deflate the rolls, spread about 1 slightly rounded tablespoon of the Cinnamon Crunch on each roll covering it well. Press it gently into the egg whites to make sure it adheres.
    • If using the vanilla glaze, do nothing to the top of the rolls.
    • Bake for 20 to 23 minutes until browned and baked through. Do not overbake.
    • Let the baked rolls cool for about 5 minutes then carefully lift them by the paper liners out of the pans. Gently, pull down the papers, remove the rolls, and set the on cooling rack to cool completely.
    • If using the vanilla glaze, combine all of the ingredients for the glaze, adjusting the powder sugar if too thin or adding more milk if too thick, Spoon over the rolls, letting it drip down the sides. Leave them out to dry.
    • While all yeast dough is best the day it is baked, these have an amazing shelf life if covered for several days.
    • Either of these can be frozen. The Cinnamon Crunch Rolls can be frozen as is, then well wrapped individually and frozen for a couple of months. The vanilla glazed rolls can be frozen WITHOUT the glaze wrapped as above.
    • Thaw either at room temperature. To freshen, preheat the oven to 350°F. Place the rolls on a sheet pan and cover the pan tightly with foil. Heat for 10 to 15 minutes. Cool.
    • Apply the vanilla glaze after the rolls have cooled.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    ________________________________________________
    All-purpose flour is the flour of choice for this particular recipe.
    While the recipe uses instant yeast, it is still added to the liquid ingredients. 
    Korinje cinnamon is my choice for its bold, intense flavor.
    The Sour Cream adds softness to the final, baked dough and enhances its shelf life. 
    Dark Brown Sugar is preferred over light for its more intense flavor.
    The dough can refrigerated up to 3 days.
    I often bake individual rolls in Jumbo muffin pans lined with large muffin papers. Doing it this way avoids the rolls sticking as they sometimes can and they bake up with softer sides.
    Be sure to spray the paper liners for easier releasing.
    Do not be tempted to add additional flour. The dough should remain a batter. Chilling it overnight will firm it up and make it easy to handle. 
    Be sure to make the filling ahead of rolling out the dough so it won't warm up and become soft.
     
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 14rollsCalories: 504kcalCarbohydrates: 79gProtein: 6gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 75mgSodium: 197mgPotassium: 147mgFiber: 3gSugar: 47gVitamin A: 608IUVitamin C: 0.3mgCalcium: 91mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Bailey's Pi Day Pie

    Modified: Apr 23, 2026 · Published: Mar 13, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    A slice of Bailey's Pie for Pi Day with its dark bottom layer, light mousse layer and whipped cream edging sits on a white plate with the ie in the background and a cup next to the plate.

    Bailey's Pi Day Pie is actually a dual day dessert. It also serves as a great treat for St. Patrick's Day. This no bake pie consists of a deeply chocolate crust, a creamy chocolate layer, topped with a Bailey's Coffee Mousse and wreathed in billows of whipped cream. How irresistible is that?

    A slice of Bailey's Pie for Pi Day with its dark bottom layer, light mousse layer and whipped cream edging  sits on a white plate with the ie in the background and a cup next to the plate.

    To make things even easier, the entire pie can be made and frozen. The Bailey's mousse is lifted up by the addition of white chocolate and coffee. If you're a fan of Bailey's this dessert is calling to you.

    Other great pies and tarts to consider include: Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart, the no bake Sky High Salted Caramel Chocolate Pie, another no bake tart, How to make a S'mores Tart, the Butter Rum Pecan Tart and lemon lovers favorite, Lemon Meringue Pie.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Pi Day?

    Pi day is celebrated around the world on March 14 or 3.14 - the first three digits of an infinite number. It is also, fittingly, the birthday of Albert Einstein. It is often marked worldwide by people eating pie, either sweet or savory.

    What does Pi stand for?

    Simply put, Pi is a mathematical constant that expresses the ratio of a circle's circumference to its diameter. It is part of many formulas used in physics, astronomy, engineering and other fields, dating back thousands of years to ancient Egypt, Babylon and China.

    Pi can calculate the circumference of a circle by measuring the diameter — the distance straight across the circle's middle — and multiplying that by the 3.14 number.

    When was it first made a holiday?

    Pi Day itself dates to 1988, when physicist Larry Shaw began celebrations at the Exploratorium science museum in San Francisco. The holiday didn’t really gain national recognition though until two decades later. In 2009, Congress designated every March 14 to be the big day — to hopefully spur more interest in math and science.

    Why you will love this recipe!

    • It requires no baking! That makes it easy already.
    • Despite three component parts, they are all quickly done where you are combining things and dumping them into the pie shell.
    • Bailey's is pronounced in this recipe so you can't miss it. What's the point of calling it Bailey's if you have search your tastebuds.
    • It looks impressive so be sure to share it - or maybe not!

    Recipe Ingredients

    9" Chocolate Graham Crust

    The ingredients for the 9" chocolate graham crust are unsalted butter, cocoa, graham crackers and powdered sugar.

    FRONT ROW: unsalted butter, cocoa

    BACK ROW: Graham crackers, powdered sugar

    Milk Chocolate Layer

    The ingredients for the  milk chocolate layer for the Bailey's Pi Day Pie include instant coffee, milk chocolate, and heavy cream.

    FRONT ROW: Instant coffee

    BACK ROW: Milk chocolate, heavy cream

    Bailey's Coffee Mousse

    The Bailey's mousse contains instant coffee, ater, gelatin, Baliey's liqueur, white chocolate and heavy cream.

    FRONT ROW: Instant coffee, water, gelatin

    MIDDLE ROW: Bailey's liqueur

    BACK ROW: White Chocolate, heavy cream

    Whipped Cream for the wreath

    The whipped cream wreath on top of the pie uses heavy cream and powdered sugar.

    Powdered sugar, heavy cream

    Key Ingredients

    • Dutch Cocoa is my choice for this recipe. It is darker and more mild. Natural cocoa may also be used but the crust will not be as deeply colored or flavored.
    • Graham Crackers vary from different manufacturers. Some absorb more or less butter so it is good withhold several tablespoons when mixing at first.
    • I use Instant Coffee as opposed to expresso because I am a tea drinker and use coffee for flavoring. Espresso may be used but I would use ⅔ of what is called for.
    • Milk chocolate is used so it doesn't take away from the mousse which is more delicately flavored. Dark can be substituted if desired.
    • Heavy Cream contains 36% butter fat. However, on rare occasions or if you're lucky, 40% cream can be found. Trader Joe's has it in pints. It is much thicker and whips up higher and thicker. Whatever you use, do not cream marked whipping cream as it won't whip up thick enough.
    • Ghirardelli White Chocolate is my go to white chocolate.
    • Two small airline or individual serving bottles of Bailey's will be needed if not pouring from a larger bottle.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    9" Chocolate Graham Crust

    The first collage shows the dry ingredients for the chocolate crust in the processor, processed, the butter added, and the crumbs mixed with the butter.

    Step 1. Melt the butter and set aside to cool. Place everything but the melted butter in the bowl of a food processor. Step 2. Process to form fine crumbs. Step 3. Because different brands of graham crackers absorb more or less butter, start with about ¾ of the butter, toss with a fork. Step 4. Using a fork keeps the crumbs lighter, a spoon has a tendency to pack them down more. Add more butter if need until the crumbs hold together when a small amount is pressed between your fingers without exuding butter and being wet.

    The chocolate crumbs are poured into the pie plate, pressed into the sides and bottom and the finished crust is shown.

    Step 5. Lightly spray the pie plate. Pour the crumbs into the plate and distribute them evenly over the bottom of the plate. Spread about ⅔ of the crumbs evenly around the edge of the pie plate. Step 6. Press them very firmly against the side of the plate. Step 7. Press the remaining crumbs firmly into the bottom. Step 8. Refrigerate the finished crust while preparing the next step.

    This collages shows the bar of milk chocolate, the coffee in the saucepan with the cream,the chocolate submerged in the hot cream and the finished chocolate layer in the pie plate.

    Step 9. I know I sound ike I have stock in Trader Joe's but trully, I don't and I'm not even an affiliate but I really like their Pound Plus Chocolates. This is the chocolate I used for the chocolate layer. Cut the amount called for in pieces so it dissolves completely. Step 10. Place the heavy cream in a smallish saucepan along with the coffee. Heat it until it is steaming but not boiling. Step 11. Submerge the chocolate under the hot cream. Wait for 4 to 4 minutes then gently whisk together until completely smooth. Step 12. Pour it into the prepared crust. Let it set but not don't let it get hard or the mousse won't stick.

    This collage shows a double boiler, the cream and coffee in the top, the white chocolate added and everything melted and smooth.

    Step 13. There isn't a lot of ingredients to go into the top of the double boiler. Mine was too big. So just place a bowl over water in a saucepan. Step 14. Add the cream and coffee to the bowl. Heat to dissolve the coffee. Bring the water underneath just to a simmer. Do not let the bowl touch the water or let the water come to a boil. Step 15. Cut up the white chocolate and add it to the double boiler bowl. Step 16. Submerge the chocolate under the cream and let it sit for 3 or 4 minutes.

    The chocolate for the Bailey's mousse is smooth, the gelatin and water are shown, then mixed together and the cream and powdered sugar are in a mixing bowl.

    Step 17. Whisk gently to combine the base for the mousse completely. Cool before adding the gelatin. Step 18. The water and gelatin are in bowls. Be sure to use very small bowls or the water will be too spread out to completely soak the gelatin. Step 19.The gelatin has bloomed which simply means it has absorbed the water and is now a gelatinous blob. Set aside. Step 20. Place the cream in a mixing bowl along with the powdered sugar.

    This collages shows the whipped cream on he whip and in the bowl, being folded into the chocolate and the mousse finioshed.

    Step 21. The cream being whipped. Beat it to medium peaks. Step 22. Do not whip it until it is stiff or it won't fold in well. Fold it into the white chocolate base. Step 23. Add the whipped cream cream to the room temperature Bailey's mousse base. Step 24. Fold together gently until completely conbined.

    The last collage picures the liquified gelatin being added to the mousse, the mousse in the pie plate and wreathed in whipped cream.

    Step 25. Microwave the gelatin for about 5 seconds to liquify it. Step 26. Add it to the mousse mixture immediately and fold together. Step 27. Pour it over the chocolate layer in the pie pan. Step 28. Beat the whipped cream and powdered sugar for the wreath until stiff this time. Using a #7 or #8 open star tip, pipe a wreath around the top of the tart covering the edge where the mousse meets the crust. Refrigerate.

    Recipe FAQS

    What is Bailey's Liqueur made from?

    The basic ingredients are cream, triple-distilled Irish Whiskey, chocolate and vanilla as well as a few other ingredients not noted. There is a short, interesting article titled Bailey's History that is worth a read.

    How did Bailey's get its name?

    Invented in 1973 by Tom Jago, it was named after a restaurant named "Bailey Bistro" which was located below the office the creators were moving into in Soho London. It was chosen to sound Anglo-Irish.

    Because Bailey's has cream, how long does it last?

    The total shelf life, opened or unopened is 2 years if kept in the recommended storage temperatures of 32°F to 77°F.

    Expert Tips

    • While the use of milk chocolate is specified, dark chocolate can be used but be aware dark chocolate has a tendency to overtake the rest of the ingredients.
    • Press the crust in really firmly so it doesn't crumble when cut.
    • Expresso coffee can be used, but at about ¾ strength.
    • Make sure to use heavy cream and not whipping cream. The heavy cream whips up more firmly and higher.
    • Different brands of graham crackers absorb more or less butter. Start with about ¾ and add more if some crumbs pressed between your fingers don't stick together well.
    The photo shows a slice of the Bailey's pi day pie sits on a white plate with a whole pie in the back ground and two mugs and a fork.

    Marvelous pies for any day

    • A slice of No Bake Strawberry Pie finished with whipped cream, sits on a white plate with a yellow gingham background.
      (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie
    • A meringue topped coconut cream pie in a glass pie pan with plates and forks beside it.
      Coconut Cream Pie with a Difference
    • Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie slice on a plate with the pie plate in the background.
      Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie
    • Double Banana Cream Pie with plates and cups and saucers.
      Double Banana Caramel Cream Pie

    Love this Bailey's Pi day Pie It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you

    A slice of Bailey's Pie for Pi Day with its dark bottom layer, light mousse layer and whipped cream edging sits on a white plate with the ie in the background and a cup next to the plate.

    Bailey's Pi Day Pie

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Bailey's Pi Day Pie is actually a dual day dessert. It also serves as a great treat for St. Patrick's Day. This no bake pie consists of a deeply chocolate crust, a creamy chocolate layer, topped by a Bailey's Coffee Mousse and wreathed in billows of whipped cream. How irresistible is that?
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Chilling Time 5 hours hrs
    Total Time 6 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
    Course Dessert, No Bake, Pie
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 529 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9" pie pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    9" Chocolate Graham Cracker Crust

    • 10 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (145 grams)
    • 1 ⅓ cups graham cracker crumbs (170 grams)
    • ¼ cup cocoa, Dutch preferred (25 grams)
    • ½ cup powdered sugar (65 grams)

    Milk Chocolate Layer

    • ⅔ cup heavy cream
    • 1 tablespoon instant coffee
    • 6 ounces milk chocolate (170 grams)

    Bailey's Coffee Mousse

    • ⅓ cup Bailey's Liqueur
    • 1 ½ tablespoons instant coffee
    • 6 ounces white chocolate (170 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon gelatin
    • 1 tablespoon water
    • 1 ¼ cups heavy cream

    Whipped Cream to Finish

    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • ¼ cup powdered sugar (30 grams)

    Instructions
     

    9" Chocolate Graham Crust

    • Spray a 9" pie pan lightly with a non-stick baking spray. Set aside.
    • Melt the butter and set aside to cool but it needs to say liquid. Cut the white chocolate in smaller pieces. Set both aside.
    • Break up the graham crackers and add them to a processor bowl. Add the cocoa and powdered sugar.
    • Process until fine crumbs form.
    • Pour them into a bowl and add ¾ of the melted butter. Using a fork, toss the crumbs and butter together. Take a small amount and press it between your fingers. If it doesn't stick together well, add more butter.
    • Pour the crumbs into the pie pan and level out. Press about ⅔ of the crumbs very firmly up the sides of the pie pan. Press the remainder of the crumbs on the bottom of the pie plate. Refrigerate while preparing the next part.

    Milk Chocolate Layer

    • Heat the cream and coffee until steaming but not boiling. Submerge the chocolate under the cream. Wait 3 to 5 minutes and gently whisk to combine fully. Pour into the prepared pie crust.
    • Let the layer set up at room temperature. It should be room temperature and soft set so the mousse will adhere to it. It's not advisable to refrigerate it. Set aside.

    Bailey's Coffee Mousse

    • The base for the mousse is best made in a small double boiler. One can be fashioned out of a small sauce pan with a bowl placed on top. Add water to the pan but is should not touch the bowl above.
    • Combine the Bailey's and coffee in the top of the double boiler. Bring the water beneath to a simmer. Do no let it boil. Heat until the coffee dissolves, stirring occasionally. Turn the heat off and submerge the white chocolate under the hot liquid. Let it sit for 3 to 5 minutes then whisk gently to combine. Remove from over the water and cool.
    • In a very small bowl, combine the 1 tablespoon water and the gelatin, stirring to make sure all of the gelatin contacts the water. Set aside.
    • When everything is cool, beat the cream just until medium peaks. Do not beat until stiff or it will be difficult to fold completely into the white chocolate base.
    • Stir ¼ of the whipped cream into the base to lighten it. Fold the remainder of the cream into the mousse, gently but thoroughly. Liquify the gelatin in the microwave for about 5 seconds. Fold it in immediately quickly and gently.
    • Pour it over the chocolate layer.

    Whipped Cream Finish

    • To finish, beat the 1 cup cream and ¼ cup powdered sugar together until stiff. Fit a piping bag with a number #7 or #8 open star piping tip and pipe a wreath around the edges of the pie covering the seam between the crust and the mousse. If not into piping, cover the top of the mousse with the cream.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    _________________________________________________
    Dutch Cocoa is my choice for this recipe. It is darker and more mild. Natural cocoa may also be used but the crust will not be as deeply colored or flavored.
    Graham Crackers vary from different manufacturers. Some absorb more or less butter so it is good withhold several tablespoons when mixing at first. 
    I use Instant Coffee as opposed to expresso because I am a tea drinker and use coffee for flavoring. Espresso may be used but I would use ⅔ of what is called for. 
    Milk chocolate is used so it doesn't take away from the mousse which is more delicately flavored. Dark can be substituted if desired.
    Heavy Cream contains 36% butter fat. However, on rare occasions or if you're lucky, 40% cream can be found. Trader Joe's has it in pints. It is much thicker and whips up higher and thicker. Whatever you use, do not cream marked whipping cream as it won't whip up thick enough.
    Ghirardelli White Chocolate is my go to white chocolate.
    Two small airline or individual serving bottles of Bailey's will be needed if not pouring from a larger bottle. While the use of milk chocolate is specified, dark chocolate can be used but be aware dark chocolate has a tendency to overtake the rest of the ingredients.
    Press the crust in really firmly so it doesn't crumble when cut.
    Expresso coffee can be used, but at about ¾ strength.
    If a lighter coffee flavor is desired, reduce the amount of instant coffee by ½ where every it is called for.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 529kcalCarbohydrates: 38gProtein: 5gFat: 41gSaturated Fat: 25gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 93mgSodium: 96mgPotassium: 220mgFiber: 2gSugar: 30gVitamin A: 1146IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 84mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Triple Lemon Cake - Revised

    Modified: Apr 29, 2026 · Published: Mar 10, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

    The Triple Lemon Cake consisting of a yellow crumb coated single layer cake finished with white meringue in the middle

    This truly special European Style Triple Lemon Cake will have everyone asking where you got it. While elegant and stunning in appearance, it is actually easy to make. This show stopper consists of a lemon cake, lemon soaking syrup and lemon topping - easy component parts that can be made ahead and assembled when needed. 

    While this is a longer than usual post, it is actually very simple and I suggest that you read the post through and look at the step by step photos.

    The Triple Lemon Cake consisting of a yellow crumb coated single layer cake finished with white meringue in the middle

    This cake contradicts the normal assembly of a cake.  The topping is on the outside of the French sponge cake, genoise.  The crumbs on the outside are cake crumbled in the processor.  To protect the topping from crusting over, meringue is piped on top.  

    Special Note: This was originally posted when I switched formats. All of the how to pictures were lost in the process. I have added more information about the ingredients and additional photos.

    For more great lemon recipes please go to: Split Lemon Layer Cake,Lemon Strawberry Cake, and the Lemon Meringue Cake. You must also check out My All Time Favorite Lemon Recipes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is a Genoise Cake

    While originating around 1500 in Genoa, Italy, the French named it genoise when they took it over.  French baking borrowed recipes liberally from other nations, renaming them as they went along.  Genoise has a reputation for being two things - difficult to make and dry.  Neither of which is true if you follow the directions.

    Used as a foil for many fillings and finishes in French Cakes, the cake is a type of butter sponge in which whole eggs are beaten with sugar to incorporate air.  Air is the only leavening in the cake.  Processing granulated sugar will turn it into bakers sugar which is very fine, allowing it to become incorporated with the eggs much easier, better, and faster.  The eggs should be room temperature.  If you forget to take them out ahead of time, just put them in hot water while you get everything else ready.

    When I wrote my first book, The New Pastry Cook, I struggled mightily with getting the melted butter folded into the batter.  Despite having a wonderful French pastry chef instruct me, my butter always ended up on the bottom of the baked cake, making a rubbery, dense,  unattractive and unwanted layer. 

    What I ended up doing was to take some of the completed batter and add it to the butter.  By whisking the two vigorously, they became emulsified.  That was added back to the majority of the batter and quickly folded in.  That solved the main reason this cake was thought to be difficult.

    This cake can be dry and dense if the flour is folded in too forcefully or too long.  Fold the first half of the flour in about ¾ of the way, then add the remainder.  A very light touch is needed here.  Emulsify the butter and fold it in.  

    Genoise can be made months ahead, frozen, wrapped really well, and held in the freezer awaiting the final assembly.

    Lemon Soaking Syrup

    There are several reasons for using a soaking syrup.  The most important is to add flavor, either to intensify the main flavor or to add another dimension.  The second reason is to add moisture. 

    It is added to this Triple Lemon Cake to maximize the lemon flavor.  

    The Lemon Topping

    If you love lemon meringue pie, you'll love this “filling”.  The lemon is intense but not biting. It is added as the top layer of the cake and on the sides as the glue to keep the crumbs in place.

    The filling needs to be refrigerated, preferably overnight to firm up.

    Cake Crumbs for the Finish

    Using cake crumbs to finish the outside of a cake is a very “bakery” thing to do, especially since there are often cake trims or leftover cake around.  Simply tear the cake into pieces and add them to the processor.  Pulse to make crumbs.  

    This works for any plain cake.  If not needed immediately, store in the freezer for later.

    Swiss Meringue

    While there are three basic types of meringues, I chose the Swiss meringue for this cake because I wanted a denser meringue – sort of marshmallowy.  

    The egg whites and sugar are heated together in the mixing bowl and then whipped to hold peaks.  Piping or spooning them over the exposed lemon topping will prevent it from crusting over.

    Alternatively, in place of the meringue, use fresh fruit as one of my readers suggested.

    Why This Recipe Works

    • Three of the four component parts of this cake can be made ahead so it is ready when you are.
    • The genoise can be made ahead and frozen for months. The top can be sliced off and the genoise can be soaked.
    • The lemon topping can be made a week ahead and refrigerated.
    • The cake can be assembled the day before and held in the fridge.
    • It is not only a show stopper - it's one of the best lemon cakes you'll ever make.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Lemon Topping

    The Lemon Topping consists of water, granulated sugar, eggs, cornstarch, lemon juice, lemon zest, salt and butter.

    FRONT ROW: Lemon juice, unsalted butter

    MIDDLE ROW: Lemon zest, cornstarch, egg yolks

    BACK ROW: granulated sugar, water

    Genoise

    Ingredients for the Genoise Cake are eggs, granulated sugar, lemon zest, cake flour and unsalted butter.

    FRONT ROW: Granulated Sugar, unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Lemon zest, eggs, cake flour

    Lemon Soaking Syrup

    Lemon juice and granulated sugar for the Lemon Soaking Syrup

    Lemon juice, granulated sugar

    Swiss Meringue

    Ingredients for the Swiss Meringue are granulated sugar and egg whites.

    Granulated Sugar, egg whites

    Important Ingredient

    • Baker's Sugar is very fine granulated sugar. To make is go to my post Three Easy Sugar Fixes. This is important anytime you are dissolving sugar such as cream, meringues, or anything in general.
    • Cake Flour is used for its low protein count which adds to the softness of the cake. Since there is no sour cream, buttermilk or anything else in this cake to help soften it, I highly recommend using the cake flour.
    • Two lemons are needed as both the juice and zest are used.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Lemon Topping

    The collage showing the lemon topping for the Triple Lemon cake consists of the sugar and cornstarch in a bowl, all of the ingredients except the butter in a pan, the butter added, and the finished topping.

    Step 1. Whisk together the sugar and cornstarch. Step 2. Place the water, sugar/cornstarch mixture, egg yolks, lemon juice, lemon zest and salt in a saucepan. Place over medium heat and, whisking constantly, bring the mixture to a boil. Boil for 1 minute. It will be very, very thick. Remove from the heat. Step 3. Add the butter and allow it to melt. Whisk it into the lemon topping. Remove it to a bowl, cover the top with film and let it come to room temperature. Refrigerate overnight.

    Genoise Cake

    This collage shows the genoise cake being made with the eggs and sugar whipped, the flour on top of the batter, the butter emulsified and the baked genoise.

    Step 5. Combine the the eggs, sugar and lemon zest to the mixing bowl.  Beat until very, very thick , almost white and the mixture falls in ribbons from the beater.  Step 6. Fold in half of the flour about ¾ of the way.  Add the remainder of the flour and fold in. Step 7. Add about 1 cup of the batter to the melted butter.  Whisk vigorously to form an emulsion. Pour the emulsion back into the main batter and fold in. Pour the batter into the prepared pan, smoothing as necessary. Step 8. Bake the cake as called for. Cool it in the pan.

    This collage shows the cake being released, out of the mold, turned upside down and the top sliced off.

    Step 9. To release the cake, go around the inside edge with a small, flexible metal spatula.  Make sure the spatula stays to the side of the pan and not the side of the cake. Remove the side.  Step 10. After the cake is released.....Step 11. turn it upside down and place it on a cake board. Step 12. Slice about a scant ½" off the top of the cake. Set aside.

    This collages shows the cake slice in the processor, processed to crumbs, the cake soaked and the lemon topping on.

    Step 13 Tear the slice of cake into pieces and place it in the food processor. Step 14. Pulse until crumbs form. Step 15. Wash the cake with the lemon soak. Step 16. Remove the topping from the refrigerator and break it up with a spatula. Aggressively whisk it until it is smooth. Spread about ⅔ of the lemon topping is spread on top of the cake.

    This collage shows the side of the cake coated with the lemon topping and the edge being cleaned, the crumbs being applied to the side of the cake, the top and sides coated with crumbs and a new thermometer used in the next step.

    Step 17. Spread a thin layer of the reserved lemon topping on the side of the cake. Remove any that falls on the cake board or serving plate. Step 18. Edge the top of the cake within and inch or so towards the center of the cake with the cake crumbs. Apply the remainder to the side of the cake. It is easiest to make them stick by pressing them into the sides with a flat spatula. Step 19. Coat the sides evenly all around the cake. Step 20. This is a new thermometer that has a silicone stirring attachment so that you can stir the product while it is being temped. I use it for the sugar syrup in the next step. It made my life so much easier. It is an Efeng Digital Candy Thermometer Spatula and can be found in multiple places online. I am not an affiliate for this product.

    Swiss Meringue

    The last collage shows the swiss meringue being made with the sugar and egg whits in the mixing bowl being whisked, being stirred while heating to the correct temperature, beaten in the mixer and piped onto the cake covering the topping.

    Step 21. Whisk the sugar and egg whites in the bowl of a mixer or in the top of a double boiler. Step 22. Place the whisked egg whites over simmering water and stirring constantly, heat to 130°F. Step 23. Beat the meringue until very, very stiff. Step 24. Fit a pastry bag with a #8B or #9B tip and starting at the inside edge of the crumbs on top of the cake, cover the seam with the meringue. Continue on into the center. Make sure the entire top is covered so it doesn't crust over. Another option is to fill the center top with fruit. Red raspberries and blueberries would be perfect for their smaller size.

    Recipe FAQS

    What can be done to make a Genoise moist?

    Two things. Fold the flour in quickly and gently so the beaten eggs don't fall. Secondly, make an emulsion when adding the butter by taking a small amount of the batter and add it to the cooled, melted butter. Whisk vigorusly to make an emulsion and then fold it back into the main amount of batter.

    How to bake a cake with a flat top?

    See my post on How to Bake a Flat Cake or Cake Pan Prep. The important thing is to prepare the pan correctly. At the bakery we sprayed the center of the pan only with a non-stick baking release, then placed a parchment round the size of the pan on top and sprayed the center of the paper only. DO NOT PREPARE THE REST OF THE PAN IN ANY WAY. No butter, no butter and flour. As the cake bakes, the sides will set first. If there is no grease on the sides of the pan, it will stick and not fall as the center of the cake gets baked. There is a deeper explanation in post. It also helps to have a balanced recipe.

    Do sponge cakes use baking powder?

    Technically, they do not. Sponge cakes achieve their height by beating eggs, either whole eggs, egg yolks and/or egg whites with sugar until very, very light in color and look almost cloud like. It is the air beaten in that causes the cake to rise. The tricky part is folding in the flour without knocking out the air. Some recipes include baking powder as an insurance that the cake will rise, especially for novice bakers.

    Expert Tips

    • Folding the ingredients is extremely important when a recipe is leavened only by air. If the air is knocked out, the cake will be dense and dry. To fold, add the required amount of flour to the beaten egg mixture and gently plunge a rubber spatula to the bottom of the bowl. Scoop up some of the egg mixture and bring it to the top of the bowl turning it over the flour. Turn the bowl about an ⅛ of a turn and repeat until about ¾ of the flour is incorporated. Add the remainder of the flour and repeat very gently but quickly folding all of the flour in. Continue as in the directions.
    • I've noticed lately with the egg shortage, that some of the cartons have more smaller eggs than usual. If you ever have to use a different size egg, they can be easily weighed when separating. The yolk weighs 17 grams in a large egg and the white 32 grams which equals 49 grams for the egg. The remainder is the shell. We weighed all of our eggs at the bakery to ensure the correct amount.
    • Baker's sugar is key to dissolving quickly and thoroughly when beating either creaming or beating with egg whites. It can be used cup for cup (200 grams in a cup) anywhere you need granulated sugar. I have seen it in the grocery store but it is much less expensive to make it yourself by processing granulated sugar it in small batches.
    This picture shows a slice of the Triple Lemon Cake with the cake on the bottom, the lemon topping and the Swiss meringue finish sitting on a gray, gold rimmed plate.

    More Cakes to Enjoy

    • Orange Chiffon Cake
    • Viennese Punchtorte
      Viennese Chocolate Punchtorte - Worth the Wait!
    • Lemon Meringue Cake
      Lemon Meringue Cake
    • Raspberry Rhapsody
      Raspberry Rhapsody Cake

    Love this Triple Lemon Cake? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

    Triple Lemon Cake

    Triple Lemon Cake

    Helen S. Fletcher
    A show stopper of a dessert, this easy Triple Lemon Cake has make ahead component parts to be assembled when needed.  
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 28 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 58 minutes mins
    Course Cakes
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 346 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9x3 cheesecake or springform pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Genoise Cake

    • 6 eggs, room temperature
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar (150 grams or 5 ⅓ ounces)
    • Zest from 1 large lemon
    • 1 ¼ cups cake flour (155 grams)
    • ¼ cup unsalted butter (60 grams, or ½ stick)

    Lemon Filling

    • ⅔ cup water
    • ⅔ cup granulated sugar (130 grams)
    • 3 large eggs, separated
    • 3 tablespoons cornstarch (25 grams)
    • ¼ cup lemon juice
    • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 2 tablespoons butter (30 grams)

    Lemon Soaking Syrup

    • ½ cup lemon juice
    • 1 cup sugar (200 grams)

    Swiss Meringue

    • 2 egg whites from above
    • ½ cup sugar (100 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Genoise

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.  Line the bottom of a 9x3” cheesecake or springform pan with parchment.
    • Spray the middle of the paper only.  Do not spray the sides.  Set aside.
    • Melt the butter and set aside to cool.
    • Add the eggs, sugar and lemon zest to the mixing bowl.  Beat until very, very thick , almost white and the mixture falls in ribbons from the beater.
    • Sift half the flour over the egg mixture and fold in about ¾ of the way.  Repeat with the remainder of the flour.
    • Add about 1 cup of the batter to the melted butter.  Whisk vigorously to form an emulsion.
    • Pour the emulsion back into the main batter and fold in.
    • Pour the batter into the prepared pan, smoothing as necessary.
    • Bake for about 23 to 28 minutes until a tester comes out cleanly and the cake bounces back when lightly touched in the middle.
    • Cool completely in the pan.
    • To release, go around the inside edge with a small, flexible metal spatula.  Make sure the spatula stays to the side of the pan and not the side of the cake.
    • Remove the side.  Turn the cake upside down, remove the bottom and the parchment paper.  
    • Turn right side up.  If not using immediately, freeze the cake, wrap it well and then freeze for several months. Partially thaw at room temperature to use.

    Lemon Topping

    • In a medium saucepan, whisk together the water, sugar, egg yolks, cornstarch, lemon juice, lemon zest and salt.
    • Place over medium heat and, whisking constantly, bring the mixture to a boil.  Boil for one minute.  It will be very, very thick.  Remove from the heat.
    • Add the butter and allow to melt.  Whisk into the mixture.  Remove to a bowl
    • Cover the topping with plastic wrap and chill, preferably overnight.

     Lemon Soaking Syrup

    • Combine the ingredients in a small pan and bring to a boil.  Set aside. 

    Triple Lemon Cake Assembly

    • If the genoise layer has been frozen, thaw it at room temperature until it is partially thawed but still firm.  This will make it easier to cut.
    • Slice about ⅛” off the top of the cake.
    • Place in the processor.  Pulse to make crumbs.  Set aside.
    • Put the cake back on the metal round from the cheesecake or springform pan.
    • Brush the soaking syrup on the cake, allowing each pass to soak in before adding more.  Use all the syrup.
    • Break up the topping with a spatula. Aggressively whisk it until smooth.
    • Apply a thin layer to the sides of the cake, making sure all of it is covered.  Spread the remainder on top of the cake.
    • Place the cake crumbs in a sheet pan. Pick the cake up in your left or right hand whichever is your preference.  Scoop up some of the crumbs and press them lightly into the lemon. Secure the crumbs by pressing them into the topping on the side of the cake gently.
    • Drop the remainder of the crumbs about an inch in from the edge of the cake.

    Meringue

    • Place the whites and sugar in a mixing bowl.  Put the bowl over a pan of simmering water.
    • Heat to about 130°F.
    • Remove from over the water and place on the mixer fitted with a whisk attachment.
    • Beat until very stiff and glossy.
    • Place in a piping bag fitted with a large open star (#8 or 9 B tip) and pipe the meringue onto the lemon filling starting at the edge of the crumbs and topping and work towards the center. I simply piped straight down and immediately piped again.
    • Alternatively, the meringue can be spooned on. 
    • Fill in completely to cover the topping so it can’t crust over.
    • Refrigerate. Serve at room temperature.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    ____________________________________________
    This Triple Lemon Cake is definitely best served at room temperature.  The meringue top will cut better if it has been refrigerated overnight.  Heat a knife under really hot water, dry it quickly and make a cut, letting the knife sink through the meringue, then cutting down through the cake.  Repeat for each cut.
    Folding the ingredients is extremely important when a recipe is leavened only by air. If the air is knocked out, the cake will be dense and dry. To fold, add the required amount of flour to the beaten egg mixture and gently plunge a rubber spatula to the bottom of the bowl. Scoop up some of the egg mixture and bring it to the top of the bowl turning it over the flour. Turn the bowl about an ⅛ of a turn and repeat until about ¾ of the flour is incorporated. Add the remainder of the flour and repeat very gently but quickly folding all of the flour in. Continue as in the directions.
    I've noticed lately with the egg shortage, that some of the cartons have more smaller eggs than usual. If you ever have to use a different size egg, they can be easily weighed when separating. The yolk weighs 17 grams in a large egg and the white 32 grams which equals 49 grams for the egg. The remainder is the shell. We weighed all of our eggs at the bakery to ensure the correct amount. 
    Baker's sugar is key to dissolving quickly and thoroughly when beating either creaming or beating with egg whites. It can be used cup for cup (200 grams in a cup) anywhere you need granulated sugar. I have seen it in the grocery store but it is much less expensive to make it yourself by processing granulated sugar it in small batches. 
    The cake will keep 3 days or so in the refrigerator but will cut best the next day.  
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 346kcalCarbohydrates: 61gProtein: 6gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 138mgSodium: 121mgPotassium: 85mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 49gVitamin A: 356IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 25mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Hot Cross Buns Revisited

    Modified: Aug 25, 2025 · Published: Mar 3, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

    Four Hot Cross Buns sit on an Irish plate with a white background and decorated with little bees and flies.

    Hot Cross Buns are a treat associated with Lent and Easter although I make them all year long because they are so good. These buns are packed with flavor from the cinnamon, cloves and nutmeg as well as currants and a bit of molasses that deepens the flavor of the already spectacular buns.

    By double egg-washing the buns before they go into the oven they get high gloss finish that makes them appear as though they have been shellacked. Although the normal finish is a white cross, they are equally good without it.

    Four Hot Cross Buns sit on an Irish plate with a white background and decorated with little bees and flies.

    There is a marvelous article regarding the history of Hot Cross Buns on wikipedia that you might enjoy. These are soft but dense and while the cross can be made of a flour and water paste which is baked onto the top of the bun, these are finished with a flavored white icing.

    Some other sweet breads include: Conchas - A Mexican Sweet Bread, Swedish Cardamom Yeast Rolls, My Easter Bread and Brandied Chocolate Cherry Almond Garmisch.

    NOTE: This recipe is completely updated with a new recipe and new photos, new step-by-step photos ans instructions in this new format. I think you will enjoy this new version.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What Makes These Hot Cross Buns Special

    • These are so easy to make. The liquid ingredients are combined, the flour and spices are combined in a mixing bowl and the two are blended together.
    • The buns have a deeper flavor than most that are made with a simple sweet dough due to the molasses that have been incorporated
    • Potatoes, in the form of mashed potatoes or flaked instant mashed potatoes make a soft dough that has a longer shelf life.
    • This recipe uses the instant mashed potatoes to cut out making mashed potatoes and speed things along.
    • I used currants but raisins can be substituted. Whole Foods has small containers of currants.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Hot Cross Bun Dough

    Ingredients for the Hot Cross Buns include currants, milk, unsalted butter, molasses, granulated sugar, instant mashed potatoes, eggs, vanilla, bread flour, instant yeast, salt, cinnamon, cloves, nutmeg.

    FRONT ROW: Cinnamon, nutmeg, table salt

    SECOND ROW: Unsalted butter, vanilla, instant yeast, cloves

    THIRD ROW: Granulated sugar, eggs,molasses, instant mashed potato flake

    BACK ROW: Currants, bread flour, milk

    Vanilla Icing

    Ingredients for the icing are powdered sugar, butter, vanilla and milk

    FRONT ROW: Milk, unsalted butter, vanilla

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar

    Key Ingredients

    • Bread flour is important as it allows the buns to rise higher. All-purpose can be substituted if necessary. See my posts on Flour as Used In Baking, The Frustrating Facts about Measuring Flour and Measuring for Baking.
    • I love adding currants because they are smaller than raisins and more of them can dot the dough. It is important that both currants and raisins soak in really hot water to soften them before adding them to the dough.
    • Molasses adds a depth of flavor to the buns that brown sugar doesn't.
    • Instant mashed potato flakes are important to the texture of the dough.
    • Instant yeast is recommended but active dry yeast can be used. It will take a bit longer to rise.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage for the Hot Cross Buns shows the currants soaking, the butter and milk hating, the rest of the liquid ingredients added to the milk, and the flour and spices.

    Step 1. Cover the currants in really hot water. Let them soak while the rest of the recipe is prepared. Step 2. Heat the milk and butter to melt the butter. Cool in the bowl of a mixer. Step 3. Add the molasses, sugar, potato flakes, eggs, yeast, and vanilla. Mix all together. Step 4. Add the salt, cinnamon, cloves, and nutmeg to the flour. Whisk to combine.

    This collages shows the flour added to the liquid ingredients, the dough mixed, the currants added and the finished dough in  a storage container.

    Step 5. Add the flour mixture to the liquid in the mixing bowl. Step 6. Beat on medium until it comes together and then for 4 minutes. Step 7. Drain the currants and squeeze all of the water from them. It is important to get the water out so the dough is not too wet when completed. Mix to incorporate the currants throughout the dough, Step 8. Spray a storage container at least twice, preferably 3 times as big as the dough.

    The dough in the storage container is covered with film, the lid is put on and the time marked, the dough divided into 12 pieces and 3 balls at the first stage for shaping.

    Step 9. Cover the top of the dough with film. Step 10. Place the lid on the container and mark the time on it. Let it rise until doubled. At this point I refrigerate it overnight or up to 3 days to develop more flavor. It also makes it easier to shape the rolls. It may or may not rise again. That's inconsequential. Step 11. After the dough has risen, divide it into 12 pieces, about 90 grams each. Step 12. Shape each piece into a rough round. Pull the sides up from the round and squeeze them together.

    Here the rolls are roughly rounded, a hand is cupped over them and they are rolled into perfect rounds.

    Step 13. Roll into rough between your hands. Step 14. To make perfect rounds like they do professionally, place the roll on the work surface and cup your hand around it. Step 15. Cover the roll loosely with your complete hand and, applying a bit of downward pressure on the roll, rotate it clockwise or counter clockwise 5 or 6 times until a perfect ball is shaped.

    The last collage shows the rolls risen, baked, the vanilla glaze made and the traditional white cross made with the glaze on the rolls.

    Step 17. After shaping the rolls allow them to rise for about 2 hours (3 hours if the dough has been refrigerated. Step 18. Whisk an egg until the yolk and white are completely combined. Brush the rolls with the egg wash while the oven is preheating. For deepest shine, brush it again just before going into the oven. Bake as directed. Cool completely. Step 19. Mix all the ingredients for the Vanilla Glaze gently with a spoon. Using a whisk incorporates a lot of air bubbles. There are a few in the glaze above but stirring gently will remove them. The glaze should be fairly thick so it doesn't spread too much when applied. Step 20. Using a small spoon, apply the glaze in one direction and then the other, making a cross.

    Recipe FAQS

    Why are these called Hot Cross Buns?

    These buns, typically served during Easter, commemorate the crucification of Christ. The white cross represents the crucifixion of Jesus, the spices represent the spices used to embalm him with the sweetness and risen yeast representing the resurrection. They are often served warm.

    Why are currants and raisins soaked before using?

    Currants and raisins are often really dry and need to be plumped up by soaking them in hot water, liqueurs, fruit juices, etc. to release their full flavor and sweetness and add moisture to them so they don't bake up hard.

    Why does it take sweet doughs longer to rise?

    Enriched doughs using eggs and/or sugar, molasses, honey, any type of sweetener slows the yeast down which is why it is best to used instant yeast which works faster.

    Storage and Freezing

    While yeast products are best eaten the day they are made, these rolls are good for a couple of days stored covered at room temperature. For longer storage, freeze the baked rolls well wrapped for up to 3 months without the vanilla glaze. Thaw them at room temperature. To freshen, place the buns on a baking sheet close together. Cover the sheet with foil tightly. Make a hole in the center of the foil. Heat the buns in a 350°F oven for about 10 to 15 minutes. Cool completely, make the glaze and finish the buns.

    Expert Tips

    • Bread flour is used with yeast because its high protein content allows for greater gluten development. The higher the protein in the flour, the greater the gluten development and the higher the product rises.
    • While all-purpose flour can be used, the buns will be more compact.
    • I add instant yeast to the liquid used because I have had some unincorporated yeast into the dough. It also gives it a head start to working immediately.
    • I found currants at Whole Foods in their bulk department.
    • Instant mashed potatoes can be found in boxes or also in individual packages that are smaller. Just make sure they aren't seasoned or are flavored with garlic or anything else. Potatoes have an affinity with yeast, increasing the softness and rise.
    • If you don't have a scale, roll the dough into a 12" log and cut 1" pieces to get close to the scaled measurement.
    This last photograph of the Hot Cross Buns is on a white plate decorated with bees and flowers with more buns in the background on a cooling rack.

    More Luscious Yeast Rolls for Your Enjoyment

    • Rum Raisin Rolls on a plate with a cup of tea and an iced roll in the background
      Rum Raisin Rolls - A Long Ago Memory
    • A dark chocolate German Chocolate roll intertwined with a coconut pecan fillig sits on a white, green and yellow plate.
      German Chocolate Sweet Rolls
    • Gibassier - A French Breakfast Treat
    • Sweet Kolache with pineapple, cream cheese, fig, raspberry fillings
      The Marvelous Variable Kolache

    Love these Hot Cross Buns?  It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

    Four Hot Cross Buns sit on an Irish plate with a white background and decorated with little bees and flies.

    Hot Cross Buns

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These Hot Cross Buns are packed with flavor from the cinnamon, cloves and nutmeg as well as currants and a bit of molasses that deepens the flavor of the already spectacular buns.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 40 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Rising Time 5 hours hrs
    Total Time 6 hours hrs
    Course Breakfast/brunch
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 buns
    Calories 311 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Hot Cross Buns

    • 1 cup currants (or raisins) 120 grams
    • 1 cup milk
    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter (60 grams)
    • ¼ cup molasses
    • ¼ cup granulated sugar
    • ¼ cup instant mashed potatoes
    • 2 ¼ teaspoons instant yeast
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 3 cups bread flour (420 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 1 ½ teaspoons cinnamon
    • ¾ teaspoon cloves
    • ½ teaspoon nutmeg

    Vanilla Glaze

    • ¾ cup powdered sugar (100 grams)
    • 1 ½ tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 1 to 2 tablespoons milk

    Shaping the Buns and Egg Washing

    • 1 large egg

    Instructions
     

    Hot Cross Buns

    • Submerge the currants under very, very hot or boiling water. Let them plump while prepping the rest of the recipe.
    • Heat the milk and butter until the butter is melted. Cool.  Add the molasses, sugar, potato flakes, eggs, yeast, and vanilla to a mixing bowl.  Beat to combine.  
    • Whisk together the flour, salt and spices.
    • Fit the mixer with a dough hook if available. Add the flour mixture to the liquids in the mixing bowl. Beat on the suggested speed of your mixer. Periodically, scrap the dough that is attached to the top of the dough hook into the bowl and continue mixing.
    • The dough will be more of a batter and that is how it should be.
    • While the dough is mixing, squeeze all the water from the currants.  When the dough is done, add the currants and mix to distribute.
    • Spray a container at least twice to three times as big as the dough with a non-stick baking release.  Place the dough in the container, cover the dough directly with plastic wrap, mark the time on it and let rise until double in bulk. It will take about 2 hours to rise at 73°F.
    • Use immediately or refrigerate overnight or up to 3 days. Refrigerating the dough increases the flavor and makes it easier to shape.

    Shaping the Buns and Egg Washing

    • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
    • Divide the dough into 12 equal pieces (about 80 grams or 3 ounces each).  Shape into round balls by pulling all edges of dough underneath and squeezing them together.  Place ball on a work table, cup your hand over and around it; shape by rolling the dough counter clockwise in your cupped hand.  Place on baking sheet.  See Steps 11 through 16 in the Step by Step photos.
    • Cover with a tea towel and let rise until doubled, about 2 hours.
    • Shortly before the buns are finished rising, preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • While waiting for the oven, whisk the egg for the egg wash until completely combined. Brush the rolls with the wash.
    • Just before going into the oven, brush again with the egg wash. Bake for 18 to 20 minutes until a tester comes out clean. Do not over bake. Cool completely.
    • At this point the buns can be frozen without the glaze. Freeze them, wrap well in foil and freeze up to 3 months. Thaw at room temperature. To freshen, place the buns on a baking sheet close together. Cover the sheet with foil tightly. Make a hole in the center of the foil. Heat the buns in a 350°F oven for about 10 to 15 minutes. Cool completely, make the glaze and finish the buns.

    Finishing with the Vanilla Glaze

    • Blend all the ingredients for the glaze together with a spoon. Stir gently so air bubbles don't occur. If they do, just stir again very gently until they are gone.
    • Using a small spoon, apply the glaze in one direction and then the other, making a cross.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    __________________________________________________
    Bread flour is used with yeast because its high protein content allows for greater gluten development. The higher the protein in the flour, the greater the gluten development and the higher the product rises.
    While all-purpose flour can be used, the buns will be more compact.
    I add instant yeast to the liquid used because I have had some unincorporated yeast into the dough. It also gives it a head start to working immediately. 
    I found currants at Whole Foods in their bulk department. 
    Instant mashed potatoes can be found in boxes or also in individual packages that are smaller. Just make sure they aren't seasoned or are flavored with garlic or anything else. Potatoes have an affinity with yeast, increasing the softness and rise.
    If you don't have a scale, roll the dough into a 12" log and cut 1" pieces to get close to the scaled measurement.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12bunsCalories: 311kcalCarbohydrates: 52gProtein: 8gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 78mgSodium: 238mgPotassium: 322mgFiber: 2gSugar: 26gVitamin A: 296IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 71mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Banana Bread Bread Pudding

    Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Feb 24, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 1 Comment

    The Banana Bread Bread Pudding sits in a white bowl covered with the bourbon pecan sauce on a yellow and white background.

    This Banana Bread Pudding with its sweet taste of bananas is my tribute to New Orleans and Mardi Gras. It starts with a really easy two step banana bread soaked in a spiced custard and baked. The Bourbon Pecan Sauce that accompanies the bread pudding is a marvel in itself. What could be more NOLA than bananas and bourbon?

    The Banana Bread Bread Pudding sits in a white bowl covered with the bourbon pecan sauce on a yellow and white background.

    This is homey comfort food at its best and is great for brunch, dessert, or anytime really. Serve warm (pop it in the microwave) with the rich sauce studded with toasted pecans for a delicious treat.

    Other wonderful bread puddings include: Easy Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding, Orange Bread Pudding, Orange Date Bread Pudding

    If you enjoy indulgent individual desserts, you'll also love these Tiramisu Parfaits.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What Makes This Bread Pudding Special

    • The homemade banana bread is super easy. It doesn't even require a mixer - just a bowl, a whisk, a few measuring utensils and it's ready to go in a matter of minutes.
    • Because the bread is wonderfully moist when freshly made, it need to by dried out either by cubing it and leaving it out all night or putting it in the oven for a few minutes.
    • Here again, no mixer. The custard gets whisked together, poured over the cubed bread and after a brief soak into the oven it goes.
    • The sauce is equally as easy with everything but the pecans combined in a saucepan and after a quick 1 minute boil it's done.
    • That's it! Warm, luscious, homey bread pudding with a wonderful difference.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Banana Bread

    Ingredients for the banana bread include banana puree, buttermilk, eggs,  baking powder, vanilla, sugar, cake flour vegetable oil, baking soda, and, salt. (The nuts in the photo are omitted for this recipe).

    FRONT ROW: Baking soda, salt, vanilla, baking powder

    MIDDLE ROW: The nuts are omitted for this recipe. Granulated sugar, eggs, bananas

    BACK ROW: Buttermilk, cake flour, vegetable oil

    Banana Bread Bread Pudding

    The ingredients for the bread pudding include cubed banana bread, half and half, eggs, brown sugar, cinnamon, vanilla, and nutmeg.

    FRONT ROW: Cinnamon, vanilla, nutmeg

    MIDDLE ROW: Eggs, brown sugar

    BACK ROW: Cubed banana bread, half and half

    Bourbon Pecan Sauce

    The Bourbon Pecan Sauce ingredients are brown sugar, bourbon, toasted pecans, unsalted butter, cream, and corn syrup.

    FRONT ROW: Half and Half, corn syrup

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted Butter

    BACK ROW: Dark Brown sugar, bourbon, toasted pecans

    Key Ingredients

    • Cake flour makes the best banana flavor yielding a firm but tender loaf. All purpose flour can be used if necessary but will change the texture somewhat. For more information on the different flours, see my post Flour as used in Baking.
    • Dark brown sugar is preferred for it's stronger flavor. Light may be substituted if necessary.
    • Half and half or half heavy cream and half milk can be used in both the bread pudding and the Bourbon Pecan Sauce.
    • Make sure to toast the pecans for the sauce. It makes a difference.
    • A small bottle of bourbon is all that is needed for this recipe. It holds 4 tablespoons which is the most that will be needed.
    • If you are adverse to corn syrup the brown sugar can be increased. The corn syrup is an inverse sugar that will keep the sauce from granulating. Using it ensures a smooth sauce that stays that way.
    • The bananas for the bread should be heavily spotted and really ripe for the most flavor in the bread.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Banana Bread

    This collage shows the bananas for the bread pureed in the food processor, the eggs, buttermilk and vanilla added and processed and the flour, baking powder, baking soda and salt whisked together.

    Step 1. Puree the bananas in a food processor. Step 2. Add the buttermmilk, eggs, oil, and vanilla. Step 3. Process to mix everything. Step 4. Whisk together the cake flour, sugar, baking soda, baking powder and salt.

    This collage shows the flour being whisked into the liquid ingredients, poured into a 9x5 loaf pan, the banana bread baked and then cubed for the pudding.

    Step 5. Pour the liquid ingredients into a large bowl and whisk in the dry ingredients. Step 6. Pour the batter into the prepared loaf pan. Step 7. Bake as directed and cool. Step 8. Slice the bread and then cube it in about 1" pieces.

    Banana Bread Bread Pudding

    This collages shows the cubed bread on a try to dry out, the eggs beaten for the custard, the brown sugar, vanilla and spices added tot he eggs,and the mixture whisked.

    Step 9. Place the cubed bread on a tray and either allow it to dry overnight, turning it once or twice or place it in a 200°F oven for 20 minutes or so turning it once. Cool if using the oven. The bread should be dry on the outside but still somewhat soft inside. Step 10. Whisk the eggs in a bowl. Step 11. Add the brown sugar, vanilla and spices. Step 12. Whisk everything to mix completely.

    The cream is added to the egg/sugar mixture, the poured over the bread cubes, the pudding is poured into and 8x8 dish, and baked.

    Step 13 Add the half and half, stirring well. Step 14. Pour over the bread cubes in a large bowl. Let it sit until the bread absorbs most of the custard mixrure. The time will depend upon how dry the bread was. Step 15. Pour into the prepared pan. Step 16. Bake as directed.

    Bourbon Pecan Sauce

    The last collages shows the bourbon pecan sauce with the butter, brown sugar, cream and corn syrup in a saucepan, boiling, the finished sauce and last the sauce with the pecans.

    Step 17. Place the brown sugar, butter, cream and bourbon in a medium saucepan. Step 18. Bring to a rolling boil and boil for 1 minute. Step 19. Pour the hot sauce into a boil to cool. Step 20. Add the toasted pecans. Cool and store at room temperature for a couple of days or refrigerate for longer storage.

    Recipe FAQS

    Why are the bananas darkly spotted?

    When the skin is darkly spotted as in the photo above, they will be the sweetest, softest and the most banana flavored. When they are firm and all yellow or tinged with green they are not fully ripened yet.

    How can bananas be ripened quickly?

    Keep the bananas attached together in a bunch to ripen them quickly. Bananas produce ethylene gas and the more bananas the more gas which is what ripens them. Close the top of the bag securely and place it on a sunny window sill or somewhere warm.

    Why is bread dried out for bread puddings?

    Fresh bread of any kind is usually rather soft. Stale bread can still be soft. If the bread is too soft it will turn to mush when soaked in the custard. So the bread needs to be dried to some extent, not like croutons but dried on the outside and still a bit soft on the inside of the cubes. It will then absorb the custard and not fall apart.

    Storage and Serving

    The bread pudding can sit at room temperature for several hours but should be refrigerated after that. The bourbon pecan sauce can sit at room temperature for several days.

    Serve the bread pudding warm and warm the sauce also if it is too stiff. The easiest way is to warm the sauce first and then put each piece in the microwave briefly, add a bit of sauce and enjoy!

    Expert Tips

    • Make sure to cube the banana bread and dry it so it can soak up most of the custard.
    • However, don't let it turn to mush in the custard.
    • Use really ripe (not black) bananas for the most intense taste
    • When making the bourbon sauce, if not using the corn syrup, replace it with ¼ cup or 50 grams of brown sugar.
    • Either half heavy cream and half milk or all half and half work for the custard. Half and half can also be substituted for the cream in the bourbon pecan sauce.
    • If the alcohol in the bourbon is a problem, it will burn off when the sauce is boiled. The taste remains but not the alcohol.
    • Do not let the sauce boil more than a minute - two at the most or it will become very hard and reduce too much
    A portion of the Banana Bread Bread Pudding is in a white bowl with a spoon on a yellow and white background.

    Looking For a Few More Ideas?

    • Orange Date Bread Pudding with Hard Sauce drizzled on
      Orange Date Bread Pudding
    • Banana Pudding
      Banana Pudding with Maple Pecans
    • Orange Bread Pudding
      Orange Bread Pudding
    • Finished 2
      Crème Anglaise - A Classic Dessert Sauce

    Love this Banana Bread Bread Pudding It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

    The Banana Bread Bread Pudding sits in a white bowl covered with the bourbon pecan sauce on a yellow and white background.

    Banana Bread Bread Pudding

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Banana Bread Bread Pudding with its sweet taste of bananas is a really easy two step banana bread soaked in a spiced custard and baked. It's served with a Bourbon Pecan Sauce.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Cook Time 2 hours hrs
    Soaking time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 3 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
    Course Bread Pudding
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12
    Calories 591 kcal

    Equipment

    • 8"x8" square pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Banana Bread

    • 1 cup banana puree
    • ½ cup buttermilk
    • 2 large eggs
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • ⅔ cup vegetable oil
    • 2 cups cake flour (250 grams)
    • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • ¾ teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt

    Banana Bread Bread Pudding

    • 6 cups cubed banana bread
    • 4 large eggs
    • ⅓ cup brown sugar (65 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla
    • 1 ½ teaspoon cinnamon
    • ¾ teaspoon nutmeg
    • 3 cups half and half

    Bourbon Pecan Sauce

    • ½ cup pecan pieces (60 grams)
    • ¾ cup brown sugar (150 grams)
    • ½ cup butter (114 grams or 1 stick)
    • ¼ cup corn syrup
    • 2 tablespoons cream or half and half
    • 3 to 4 tablespoons bourbon

    Instructions
     

    Banana Bread

    • Line the bottom of a 9x5 inch loaf pan with parchment paper.  Spray the bottom and sides well with cooking spray.  Set aside.  Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.
    • Puree the bananas in a food processor or blender.  Measure 1 cup puree. If you are short add water to make 1 cup (this should be no more than a couple of tablespoons at most).  
    • Return to the processor or blender and add the buttermilk, eggs, vanilla and oil.  Process to blend the liquids. In a medium size bowl, place the remaining ingredients. Add the liquid ingredients and whisk until combined.
    • Pour into the prepared loaf pan and bake for 45 to 55 minutes or until a tester comes out clean. Cool for about 10 minutes and turn the bread out onto a cooling rack to finish cooling.
    • At this point the bread can be cubed into 1" pieces and dried overnight on a baking pan or it can be frozen for use later. If you want to hurry the process, heat the oven to 200°F and dry the bread for 20 to 30 minutes turning it from time to time until it is very dry on the outside but still a bit soft on the inside. Cool the bread before continuing.

    Banana Bread Bread Pudding

    • Spray an 8x8" baking dish with a non-stick baking release and set aside. Preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • Whisk the eggs until they are completely combined. Whisk in the brown sugar, vanilla, cinnamon and nutmeg. Add the half and half.
    • Pour the liquid over the cooled banana bread cubes and let soak for 20 to 30 minutes until most of the liquid has been absorbed. The time will depend upon how dry the bread was.
    • Pour the mixture into the prepared dish and bake for 1 hour 15 minutes or until the pudding is set and a knife inserted into the center comes out clean. Cool to warm if serving immediately. If not cool, cover with foil and refrigerate.

    Bourbon Pecan Sauce

    • Toast the pecans in a 350°F oven until slightly browner and fragarant, about 7 minutes. Cool. Set aside.
    • Combine all of the ingredients except the pecans in a 1 quart saucepan and bring to a rolling boil. Boil for 1 minute - 2 at the most. Do not boil any longer or the sauce will become too thick.
    • Stir in the pecans and If using immediately, cool until warm. If using within the next 3 or 4 days, store the sauce in a covered container. Add some sauce the last 20 or so seconds when heating to liquify it.
    • The sauce yields about 1 ½ cups.

    To Serve

    • Cut the bread pudding, place it in a bowl and warm it in the microwave for about 30 seconds, 45 to 55 seconds if the pudding is cold from the fridge. Times may vary according to how high the microwave goes. Store any leftover pudding in the refrigerator.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    _______________________________________________
    Cake flour makes the best banana flavor yielding a firm but tender loaf. All purpose flour can be used if necessary but will change the texture somewhat. For more information on the different flours, see my post Flour as used in Baking. 
    Dark brown sugar is preferred for it's stronger flavor. Light may be substituted if necessary.
    Make sure to toast the pecans for the sauce. It makes a difference.
    A small bottle of bourbon is all that is needed for this recipe. It holds 4 tablespoons which is the most that will be needed. (see the photo above)
    If you are adverse to corn syrup the brown sugar can be increased. The corn syrup is an inverse sugar that will keep the sauce from granulating. Using it ensures a smooth sauce that stays that way.  If you don’t use it be sure to wash down the sides of the pan when it comes to a boil.
    The bananas for the bread should be heavily spotted and really ripe for the most flavor in the bread.
    Make sure to cube the banana bread and dry it so it can soak up most of the custard.
    However, don't let the cubes get mush in the custard.
    When making the bourbon sauce, if not using the corn syrup, replace it with ¼ cup or 50 grams of brown sugar.
    Either half heavy cream and half milk or all half and half work for the custard. Half and half can also be substituted for the cream in the bourbon pecan sauce.
    If the alcohol in the bourbon is a problem, it will burn off when the sauce is boiled. The taste remains but not the alcohol. 
    Do not let the sauce boil more than a minute - two at the most or it will become very hard and reduce too much.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 591kcalCarbohydrates: 64gProtein: 9gFat: 34gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 9gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 136mgSodium: 371mgPotassium: 248mgFiber: 1gSugar: 47gVitamin A: 623IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 137mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Love this Banana Bread Bread Pudding It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

    Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Feb 19, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 26 Comments

    Slices of the Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake sit on a white tray with a blue napkin behind it and abcup of tea to the right.

    Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake is one of those easy recipes you'll make over and over. This cake is absolutely bursting with flavor having been soaked in a shiny orange honey syrup embedded with pistachios. The cake itself is moist and has a velvety texture close to a pound cake but not as dense. There is so much flavor in this loaf cake there is no need for icing.

    Slices of the Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake sit on a white tray with a blue napkin behind it and abcup of tea to the right.

    The oranges, pistachio and honey are redolent of Greek and Middle Eastern flavors. The cake itself is perfect for a novice baker as each step is timed out making this near foolproof.

    This truly is a cake not to be missed.

    If you love orange flavored recipes, here are a few more: Crumb Topped Orange Date Muffins, Orange Bread Pudding, Orange Chiffon Cake, and the Orange Almond Teacake.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why this cake works

    • It's super easy to make
    • There is a lot of orange zest to bring out the flavor.
    • The cake is soaked from the top and bottom to ensure the flavor of the soaking syrup goes all the way through.
    • Anyone can make this since each step is timed out and it is near impossible to fail with this.
    • It's gorgeous as well as really good.

    Let's Talk Baking Pans

    All baking pans are not created equal. Different materials absorb and retain heat differently. See my Post on Baking Pans.

    I have used a heavy aluminum loaf pan which takes a bit longer to bake than thinner pans of aluminum. Glass on the other hand, requires the temperature of the oven to be lowered by 25°F since it retains more heat making a hotter pan.

    It is important to test the cake about 10 minutes before the stated time to make sure the cake will not over bake.

    Recipe Ingredients

    For the Loaf Cake

    The ingredients for the loaf cake include cake flour, baking powder, baking soda, salt, unsalted butter, granulate sugar, orange zest, eggs, sour cream and pistachio nuts.

    FRONT ROW: Pistacho Nuts, baking powder, salt, baking soda

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, eggs, sour cream

    BACK ROW: Cake flour, granulated sugar, oranges for their zest

    For the Honey Orange Syrup

    The ingredients for the Honey Orange Soaking Syrup include orange juice, lemon juice, unsalted butter, granulated sugar and honey.

    FRONT ROW: Granulated sugar, honey

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Lemons, same oranges from above for their juice

    Important Ingredients

    • Cake flour is used because it is a low gluten flour that adds tenderness to the cake. All purpose flour can be substituted but the results may not be the same.
    • Baking powder and baking soda are both used as leavening agents but the soda also neutralizes the acidity of the sour cream. Even though it is a small amount it is important to the final outcome.
    • Sour cream adds moisture to the cake as well as tenderizes it.
    • The large amount of orange zest from the 2 large oranges ensures the flavor comes through.
    • The same two oranges provide the juice for the honey orange syrup.
    • Lemons add a bit of acidity to the syrup and compliment the orange juice.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake

    The first collages shows the pan with a sling made of foil, the butter and sugar in a mixing bowl, mixed and the first egg added ot the mixture.

    Step 1. Make a sling for the baked caked by lining a 9x5" loaf pan with a double thickness of aluminum foil on the longer side. Make sure it extends over the edge of the pan. Spray the pan and foil with a non-stick baking release. Set aside. Step 2. Place the butter and sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Step 3. Beat for 1 minutes on medium speed. Step 4. Add the first egg.

    This collage shows the egg beaten in to the butter mixture, the last egg and orange zest added to the bowl and mixed and the flour, baking powder, baking soda and salt in the bowl.

    Step 5. Beat for 30 seconds on medium speed. Repeat with the second egg. Step 6. Add the last egg and the orange zest. Step 7. Beat as before. Step 8. Sift the cake flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt together.

    The first of the flour is beaten in, the first of the sour cream is added, beaten in and the second batch of flour is added.

    Step 9. Add the first of 3 additions of flour and beat on low speed for 30 seconds. Step 10. Add half the sour cream. Step 11. Beat on low for 30 seconds. Step 12. Add the second addition of the flour and beat as before. Beat in the last of the sour cream.

    The last additon of flour and the pistachios are beaten in, poured into the prepared pan and baked.

    Step 13. Add the last of the flour along with the coarsely chopped pistachios (see my post on Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way). Step 14. Beat on medium for 30 seconds. Step 15. Pour into the prepared loaf pan. Step 15. Bake as directed, tenting with a piece of foil to prevent excessive browning on the top. Use a cake tester to make sure the middle of the cake is baked through.

    This collage shows a skewer making a hole in the cake, the cake with lots of holes, the first half of the syrup poured on and the finished cake in the pan.

    Step 17. After the cake cools for 5 or 10 minutes poke holes almost to the bottom of the cake all over. A wood skewer is perfect for this. A toothpick is not long enough. Step 18. Make sure there are a lot of holes so the soak can go through. Step 19. Immediately pour half of the hot honey orange syrup over the cake and allow it to soak in completely. This should take about 10 minutes or so. Step 20. Pour the remaining syrup over the cake and immediately sprinkle with the remaining pistachios. To ensure they stick to the syrup, press them lightly into the syrup with the back of a spoon. Cool completely in the pan. Remove the cake using the sling. Lay the foil flat and lift the cake onto a serving platter.

    Honey Orange Syrup

    The last collage shows the ingredients for the Honey Orange soaking syrup less he honey in a saucepan, brought to a boil, removed from the heat and the honey added.

    Step 21. Combine all of the syrup ingredients except the honey in a small saucepan. Step 22. Bring it to a boil and boil hard for 3 to 5 minutes to reduce it slightly. Step 23. Remove it from the heat. Step 24. Stir in the honey. This can be made towards the end of the baking but should remain hot to pour over the cake.

    Recipe FAQS

    Why is it called a loaf cake?

    Loaf cakes are baked in the same rectangular pan as a loaf of bread - hence the name.

    What are loaf cakes usually made of?

    Loaf cakes can be regular cakes made in the retangular pan or they can be more like quick breads that are not as sweet as quick breads.

    Are loaf cakes hard to make

    No, they are among the easiest cakes to make. Many of them have simple frostings or glazes and some have none.

    Expert Tips

    • You will need 2 large oranges or 3 medium size ones. Navel oranges are the best for zesting and navel orange juice is sweeter. Juice oranges don't usually produce much zest.
    • Using a microplaner instead of a box grater produces more zest and it is usually much more fluffier and not compact and wet.
    • This cake is a bit heavier due to the size and the amount of syrup in the cake. The doubled aluminum foil makes it easy to remove from the pan when it is cool without damaging it.
    • A thin wooden skewer is perfect to make the holes in the cake. It is long enough to reach almost to the bottom of the cake.
    • Do not go all the way to the bottom. You want the syrup to stay in the cake.
    • No matter what cake you are baking, check about 10 minutes before the time mentioned in case the pan makes a difference or the oven is running hot.
    This photo of the Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake features 3 slices of cake on a white dish with the rest of the cake, blue printed napkins in the background with a cup of tea.

    Other Yummy Easy Cakes

    • Finished photo
      Creamy Pound Cake with Strawberry Lemon Sauce
    • This Ultimate Chocolate Fudge cake is gluten free and easy to make. It is finished with a chocolate glaze and served with a Vanilla Creme Anglaise
      Updated GF Ultimate Chocolate Fudge Cake
    • The Pina Colada Cake for A Tale of One Cake Layer
      Pina Colada Cake
    • Lemonade Cake with blueberry sauce on a green plate wiht a yellow napkin.
      Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce

    Love this Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake?  It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

    Slices of the Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake sit on a white tray with a blue napkin behind it and abcup of tea to the right.

    Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake is absolutely bursting with flavor having been soaked in a shiny orange honey syrup embedded with pistachios. There is so much flavor in this loaf cake there is no need for icing.
    5 from 8 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 35 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
    Course Cake
    Cuisine American
    Servings 15 servings
    Calories 507 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9x5 loaf pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake

    • 2 cups cake flour (250 grams)
    • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ¾ cup unsalted butter (170 grams or 1 ½ sticks), softened
    • 1 ⅓ cups granulated sugar (265 grams)
    • Zest of 2 large navel oranges
    • 3 large eggs
    • ¾ cup sour cream (170 grams)
    • ¾ cup pistachio nuts, coarsley chopped (90 grams)

    Honey Orange Syrup

    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • ½ cup orange juice, strained
    • ¼ cup lemon juice, strained
    • ¼ cup granulated sugar
    • ¼ cup honey

    Instructions
     

    Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • Coarsely chop the pistachios. See Chopping Nuts-A Quicker Way. Set aside.
    • Make a sling of doubled foil to go inside the 9" side of the pan with foil extending over the edges. Do not use parchment paper. Spray the inside of the pan including the foil. Set aside.
    • Whisk the flour, baking powder, baking powder and salt. Set aside.
    • In the mixer bowl add the sugar and softened butter. The butter should be about 74°F which is pretty soft, but not melty, to blend well with the sugar. Beat on medium for 1 minute.
    • Add the eggs, one at a time and beat on medium or 30 second each time. Add the orange zest with the last egg. Scrape down as necessary.
    • On the lowest setting of the mixer, add the flour in 3 additions and the sour cream in two, starting and ending with the flour. Beat for 30 seconds after each addition. Reserve about 2 to 3 tablespoons of the pistachos. Add the remaining pistachios with the last addition of flour.
    • Turn the batter into the prepared pan and smooth the top. The pan will be about ¾ full.
    • Bake for 60 to 70 minutes until deep golden brown and a tester comes out clean. Do not over bake.
    • Allow the cake to cool for 5 to 10 minutes and then poke holes almost to the bottom of the cake with a narrow wooden skewer.
    • Pour half the hot honey orange syrup over the cake and let it sink in completely - about 10 minutes.
    • Pour the remainder of the syrup over the cake and sprinkle with the reserved pistachios. To ensure they stick to the syrup, press them in gently with the back of a spoon. Allow the cake to cool completely.
    • To remove the cake, make sure the cake on the uncovered sides of the pan are free using a metal spatula. Lift the cake out of the pan using the sling. Lay the foil flat on the table. Remove the cake to a serving dish.

    Honey Orange Syrup

    • Towards the end of the baking, combine all of the ingredients except the honey in a small saucepan.
    • Bring it to a hard boil and boil it for 3 to five minutes to reduce slightly. Remove from the heat, and stir in the honey. Use the sauce hot.
    • Store the cake, covered for several days at room temperature. It can also be frozen, well wrapped for several months. Thaw it, unwrapped, at room temperature. The glaze may be a bit sticky but it will be fine.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    ________________________________________________
    You will need 2 large oranges or 3 medium size ones. Navel oranges are the best for zesting. Juice oranges don't usually produce much zest.
    Using a microplaner instead of a box grater produces more zest and it is usually much more fluffier and not compact and wet.
    This cake is a bit heavier due to the size and the amount of syrup in the cake. The doubled aluminum foil makes it easy to remove from the pan when it is cool without damaging it.
    A thin wooden skewer is perfect to make the holes in the cake. It is long enough to reach almost to the bottom of the cake.
    Do not go all the way to the bottom. You want the syrup to stay in the cake.
    No matter what cake you are baking, check about 10 minutes before the time mentioned in case the pan makes a difference or the oven is running hot.
    It is important the butter is softened to about 74°F to ensure that it mixes well with the sugar. It will be soft to the touch but not melty. See my post on Softened Butter for more information. I am not a fan of microwaved butter as it often melts in spots. 
    Cake flour is used because it is a low gluten flour that adds tenderness to the cake. All purpose flour can be substituted but the results may not be the same.
    Baking powder and baking soda are both used as leavening agents but the soda also neutralizes the acidity of the sour cream. Even though it is a small amount it is important to the final outcome.
    Sour cream adds moisture to the cake as well as tenderizes it.
    The large amount of orange zest from the 2 large oranges ensures the flavor comes through.
    The same two oranges provide the juice for the honey orange syrup.
    Lemons add a bit of acidity to the syrup and compliment the orange juice.
    It is also important to pay attention to the times listed so you are mxing the batter but not incorporating a lot of air. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 15servingsCalories: 507kcalCarbohydrates: 71gProtein: 7gFat: 26gSaturated Fat: 13gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 101mgSodium: 153mgPotassium: 458mgFiber: 2gSugar: 41gVitamin A: 757IUVitamin C: 116mgCalcium: 86mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies

    Modified: Sep 19, 2025 · Published: Feb 10, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

    Red and White glazed heart shaped Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies on a white plate with blue edges.

    These Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies are a European cookie that are a cinch to make using the food processor. They are a delightfully chewy cookie equally fantastic plain or glazed. A few ingredients, a quick turn in the processor and the dough is ready to be rolled and cut into shapes. These are a natural for Valentines Day, although they could be cut into any shape. Naturally gluten free, the cookies use almond flour.

    In keeping with the holiday, they are a perfect vehicle for using the Painted Cookie technique which I have used below. The cookies can be finished with an elegant, sleek white glaze or fancied up with sanding sugar (below).

    Red and White glazed heart shaped Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies on a white plate with blue edges.

    Let's face it – all cookies are good but there are definite differences between European and American Cookies.

    Some other cut European cookies you're sure to enjoy include: Serbian Walnut Cookies, Sable Breton, Baci di Dama, and the fabulous Murbteig Pastry.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    How do American and European Cookie Differ?

    While American cookies can have an ingredient list that is daunting, European cookies generally have fewer ingredients but they are manipulated a hundred different ways.  The cookies usually contain butter, flour, egg yolk as opposed to whole eggs, and flavoring.  Leavening such as baking powder and baking soda are rarely used favoring baker's ammonium instead if using anything at all.  Almonds, pistachios, walnuts and hazelnuts are used but peanuts and pecans will be found in American cookies as they are indigenous to the Americas.  

    Almond paste is a popular ingredient and is instantly recognizable.  European cookies often feature a lot of ground nuts. Salt, while a staple in American cookies, is not used in most European Cookies.  

    Why You'll Love This European Cookie

    • Only a few ingredients are needed.
    • It's super easy to make.
    • These few ingredients pack a wallop of taste.
    • They ship really well.
    • The Viennese Lemon Hearts keep well in an airtight container, actually getting better as they sit.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Cookie Ingredients

    The ingredients for the Viennese Lemon Cookies are ground almond flour, granulated sugar, lemon zest, egg  yolks and almond extract.

    FRONT ROW: Lemon Zest, egg yolks and almond extract

    BACK ROW: Finely ground almond flour, granulated sugar

    Lemon Glaze

    Ingredients for the lemon glaze are powdered sugar, lemon juice and red jel food coloring

    FRONT ROW: Lemon Juice, red gel food coloring

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Step 1. Place the almond flour in the processor and pulse several times to make sure no lumps remain. Step 2. Add the sugar and the lemon zest. Process to incorporate them. Step 3. Add the egg yolks and process until throroughtly mixed. Step 4. The dough will not ball up.

    This collages shows the dough shaped into a flat round, placed between waxed paper,rolled out and a tray of heart cookies

    Step 5. Remove the dough from the processor and shape into a flat round. Step 6. Place between two large pieces of waxed paper and indent the dough several times to help in rolling it out. Step 7. Roll the dough about ¼" thick, turning it over and straightening the paper on the bottom. Step 8. Cut out heart shaped cookies and place them on a parchment lined baking sheet. Bake as directed being careful to not over bake the cookies.

    The last collages shows a bamboo skewer, the glaze in a bowl with the red gel, the glaze swirled with the bamboo skewer to marbelize it and a tray of glazed cookies.

    Step 9. A thin bamboo skewer is perfect for swirling the glaze. Step 10. Divide the glaze in half. Cover the surface of the unused half with plastic wrap to keep it from crusting over. Place 5 dots of food coloring around the edges and in the middle of the glaze. Step 11. Swirl the food coloring to make a pattern. Step 12. Holding the cookie by the edge, place it top side down into the glaze just so it comes to the edge of the cookie. Hold it upside down for several seconds to allow the excess glaze to drip back into the bowl. Place it on parchment to dry. Eventually, the glaze will become all pink. At that point use the second bowl to continue.

    Recipe FAQS

    Can ground almonds be used instead of almond flour?

    If the almonds are combined with the sugar and processed until they are powdered or at the very least very finely ground, they can. However a better texture will be had with almond flour as the processor cannot get them that fine.

    Why is the dough rolled out between waxed paper?

    Rolling cookie doughs between waxed paper makes it easy to control the dough. Soft cookie doughs are difficult to manage on a floured work surface. By rolling between waxed paper, the cookies can be transferred, still on the waxed paper, to a baking sheet and quickly chilled to continue.

    Does the almond flour make the cookies taste on almonds?

    Interestingly enough, it doesn't impart much of a flavor. The flour uses blanched almonds which are rather neutral in flavor.

    Storage

    These cookies last a long time stored in an airtight tin. Even if they are over baked, glazing them will soften the cookie after a day in storage. The unbaked cookies freeze well - just add a couple of minutes more when baking.

    Expert Tips

    • Roll the cookies between waxed paper. See my post on Cut Out Cookies Using the Waxed Paper Technique for more in depth information.
    • This dough is rather sticky and that is how it should be. Do not add extra almond flour. Reroll the scraps as necessary.
    • I used a 2 heart cutter for the cookies.
    • The cookies should not be over baked or they will be hard. Still good but better a bit softer.
    • Storing these for a couple of days makes them even better.
    This photo features 4 of the heart shaped cookies glazed in white with several covered with sanding sugar.

    A Few Other European Cookies to Enjoy

    • Rows of plain and powdered sugar Serbian Walnut Cookies on the diagonal are shown
      Serbian Walnut Cookies Recipe
    • A platter of brightly Decorated Shortbread Cookies for Easter including ducks, flowers and Easter eggs.
      Easy Decorated Shortbread Cookies
    • Langue de Chat cookies in a bowl.
      Langue de Chat
    • Almond Macaroons
      Almond Macaroons

    Love these Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

    Red and White glazed heart shaped Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies on a white plate with blue edges.

    Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies are a European cookie that are a cinch to make using the food processor. They are a delightfully chewy cookie equally fantastic plain or glazed.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 9 minutes mins
    Glazing 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 59 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine American
    Servings 36 cookies
    Calories 68 kcal

    Equipment

    • 2" heart shaped cookie cutter
    • Food Processor
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Heart Shaped Cookie Ingredients

    • 1 large lemon
    • 6 ounces almond flour (170 grams)
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar (150 grams)
    • 3 large egg yolks
    • ½ teaspoon almond extract

    Glaze Ingredients

    • 1 ½ cups powdered sugar (200 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
    • red gel food coloring

    Instructions
     

    Heart Shaped Cookies

    • For a detailed tutorial on how to make rolling cookies between waxed paper and why I prefer the paper as well as glazing the cookies, please see my posts Cut Out Cookies Using the Waxed Paper Technique and Painted Cookies.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper and set aside.
    • Zest the lemon using a microplaner for best results. Set aside.
    • Place the almond flour in the processor and pulse several times to make sure there are no lumps.
    • Add the granulated sugar and lemon zest. Process briefly to mix.
    • Add the egg yolks and almond extract. Process until thoroughly mixed. The dough will not ball up.
    • Remove it from the processor and shape it into a flat round.
    • Place it between two large pieces of waxed paper. Indent the dough several times with a rolling pin to make it easier to roll out,. Roll out about ¼" thick. Turn the waxed paper with the dough over several times to straighten the paper if it wrinkled. Cut the cookies out and place them on parchment lined baking sheets. Re-roll the scraps as necessary.
    • Bake for 9 to 11 minutes just until barely browned on the edges. Cool completely before glazing.

    Glazing the Cookies

    • Sift the powdered sugar to remove any lumps. Add the lemon juice and stir to combine. Stir somewhat gently to reduce the air bubbles. Divide the mixture in half.
    • Add the food coloring around the edges of the bowl and in the middle. Swirl the food coloring around until it looks marbelized. See the photos.
    • Hold a cookie by the edges and dip the top only into the glaze. Hold it above the bowl and let the most of the excess drip back into the bowl. Place on parchment paper to dry. Move around the bowl from time to time for the most interesting finishes.
    • When the bowl of glaze you are using becomes one color or the swirling is no longer evident, repeat with the second bowl of glaze.
    • Dry the cookies until the glaze is completely set. This can take several or more hours. Do not rush it.
    • When the glaze is dry and set, they can be stored in an airtight container almost indefinitely.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    _________________________________________________
    Roll the cookies between waxed paper. See my post on Cut Out Cookies Using the Waxed Paper Technique  and Painted Cookies for more in depth information.
    This dough is rather sticky and that is how it should be. Do not add extra almond flour. Reroll the scraps as necessary. 
    I used a 2” heart cutter for the cookies.
    The cookies should not be over baked or they will be hard. Still good but better a bit softer.  If glazing them, the glaze will soften them if they have been over baked.
    Storing these for a couple of days makes them even better.
     
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 36cookiesCalories: 68kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 1gFat: 3gSaturated Fat: 0.3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 15mgSodium: 1mgPotassium: 7mgFiber: 1gSugar: 9gVitamin A: 21IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 13mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Muffaletta Bread

    Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Feb 3, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 5 Comments

    A slice Muffaletta Bread layered with meats, cheeses and condiments on a plate with olives and celery.

    Muffaletta Bread is a simple bread made in a large round loaf and stuffed with a variety of meats and condiments then cut into wedges. It's absolutely perfect for a gathering when the host wants to actually enjoy being with the guests and not stuck in the kitchen getting food ready. This bread is used for the famous New Orleans sandwich of the same name that uses an olive salad, Italian cold cuts and cheeses.

    The bread by itself is marvelous and so easy you won't believe it. It takes 5 ingredients and can be made in the processor in a matter of minutes after which it rises, is shaped (I have an easy way to get it into the traditional round shape), and rises again before baking.

    A slice Muffaletta Bread  layered with meats, cheeses and condiments on a plate with olives and celery.

    While the bread can be baked the same day, I strongly suggest you refrigerate it up to three days to develop even more flavor. It can also be baked and frozen so it's ready when you are.

    This bread is so easy, it's perfect for a beginning baker or anyone who is hesitant about bread baking.

    Other great sandwich breads include: Outback Steakhouse Bread, Sweet and Hot Red Pepper Bread, The Story of No-Knead Bread and Me, Brazilian Cheese Bread.

    If you are looking for a great savory breakfast idea, try this Easy Eggs Benedict for Mother's Day.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love this Bread

    • It's so easy to make a beginner can make it in a matter of minutes.
    • Since the bread should be round, I'm going to show you a really easy way to shape it.
    • There are only a few ingredients that may be in your pantry already.
    • There is no need to knead it as the processor or mixer does it for you.
    • Bakes into a beautiful golden loaf.
    • It has a thin, crispy crust with a soft interior that is perfect for holding a stack of meats, cheeses and condiment.
    • It will lets you be a guest at your own gathering.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Muffaletta Bread

    Ingredients for the Muffaletta bread are oilive oil, salt, yeast, sugar, bread flour, and water.

    FRONT ROW: Olive oil, sugar, insant yeast, salt

    BACK ROW: Bread Flour, Water

    My Sandwich Ingredients

    These were the ingredients I used for my sandwich. However, anything you like can be substituted. Just have a variety of meats, cheeses, condiments and dressing. This sandwich can also be made vegetarian.

    The meats and cheeses included are or a 9" round of bread: 4 slices each of Swiss, American and pepperjack cheeses, 4 large slices of hickory smoked ham, roast beef and smoked turkey except and 8 slices of hard salami. 3 or 4 Roma tomatoes were used and hot banana peppers covered the bottom slice of bread. Roma tomatoes were used because the juice less. Mustards, flavored or plain mayonnaise, sandwich spreads, durkee, etc, can be used as the dressing.

    The sandwich ingredients include Swiss, American, pepperjack cheeses, ham, salami, smoked turkey, roast beef, banana peppers, tomatoes.

    FRONT ROW: Swiss Cheese, ham, hard salami, smoked turkey, roast beef

    MIDDLE ROW: American cheese

    BACK ROW: Pepperjack cheese, hot banana pepper, sandwich dressing, plum tomatoes

    Key Ingredients

    • Bread Flour will ensure you get the highest rise and best texture out of this bread. All purpose can be substituted but the bread won't be quite the same.
    • The olive oil I used was virgin for the best taste. Vegetable oil or canola can also be used.
    • The sugar can be omitted if desired. It will take the bread longer to rise but will still be fantastic.
    • Instant Yeast is used to speed things a long. Although the photos below show the yeast added with the flour, I have recently changed how I handle instant yeast. In my experience, I have found that while gathering the other ingredients, adding instant yeast to whatever liquid is being used softens it enough to increase its rising power and the end product is higher than just adding it to the flour. In the past, on several occasions, I noticed little bumps in the mixed dough and that were unincorporated yeast. I use this method with any recipe using instant yeast. The second time I made this dough I used this method and the dough rose more.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    This collage shows the flour, salt and sugar in the bowl of a processor, processed, the water, yeast and olive oil aded,and  the dough formed.

    Step 1. Add the bread flour, sugar, salt and yeast to the processor bowl. Step 2. Pulse several times to mix the ingredients. Step 3. Combine the water and olive oil and pour over the dry ingredients. Step 4. Process until it mostly forms a ball. The dough should be soft but not sticky. NOTE: Follow these same steps if using a mixer.

    The dough is poured out onto a work area, shaped into a ball, put in a bowl to rise and flattened and put in a 9" cake pan to rise.

    Step 5. Pour the dough onto a work surface. Step 6. Shape it into a ball. Step 7. Place it in a container or bowl that has been sprayed with a non-stick baking release, turn it over so both sides are coated, cover with plastic wrap and mark the time on it. It will rise in about 2 hours with sugar, 2 ½ to 3 hours without sugar.Step 8. After it has risen, flatten it into a 9" circle and place it in a 9" cake pan that has also been sprayed with the releasing agent.

    The dough has been covered in the pan, it has risen, has parmesan cheese on top and has been baked.

    Step 9. Cover the dough directly and either let it rise again to bake it immediately or place it in the refrigerator for up to 3 days before baking. Step 10. If the dough has been refrigerated, remove it from the fridge and cover it with a tea towel. Allow it to rise until doubled. Step 11. Preheat the oven and in the meantime, brush the top of the dough with olive oil and sprinkle with parmesan cheese, sesame seeds or leave it plain. Step 12. Bake as directed and cool on a rack before releasing. It can be frozen, well wrapped, for up to 3 months. Thaw at room temperature and refresh in a 350°F oven for 10 minutes.

    Assembly of a Sandwich

    This collage shows the tomatoes sliced, banana peppers on the bottom of the slice bread, cheese on one layer and roast beef on top of it.

    Step 13. Juice the Roma tomatoes by cutting off the top and squeezing the liquid from them. Slice about ¼" thick. Set aside. Step 14. Slice the bread horizontally in half. Spread a thick layer of whatever dressing you are using on the bottom slice of the bread to within ½" of the edge of the bread. Cover with the banana pepper rings. Step 15. I layered the meats and cheeses as follows: Ham, Swiss cheese, salami, American cheese and smoked turkey. Step 15. The layering continued with pepperjack cheese, and roast beef.

    The last collage shows the tomatoes covering the roast beef, the top put on the sandwich, paper covering the sandwich and a 10# sack of flour on top to weight the sandwich down.

    Step 17. Cover the beef with the sliced tomatoes. Step 18. Spread the underside of the top of the bread with another layer of dressing to within ½" of the edge of the bread and place the top on the tomatoes, dressing side down. Step 19. Cover the sandwich with parchment. Step 20. Place a tray on top of the paper and in that tray place a 10# bag of flour. I used two 10# weight to compress the sandwich in the refrigerator overnight. To serve, let the sandwich come to room temperature, cutting it into as many wedges as desired.

    Recipe FAQS

    Who invented the Muffaletta Sandwich?

    In 1906, a Sicilian, Lupe Salvadore, opened the Central Grocery in French Quarter of New Orleans. The story goes he saw fellow Sicilians buying ingredients for such a sandwich from the French Market and was put off by the mess they were making. So he created the signature olive salad, the key ingredient to a Muffaletta, layered Italian cold cuts and cheeses on the round loaf and a sandwich for the ages was born.

    What kind of bread is Muffaletta Bread?

    The bread is round and flat, has a lightly crisp crust and is soft inside sort of like focaccia or ciabatta bread.

    What category of sandwich is a Muffaletta

    It is in the same category as a sub, hero, hoagie or grinder.

    Expert Tips

    • Be sure to juice the tomatoes so they don't leak when the sandwich is compressed,
    • When layering, alternate cheeses, condiments, meats, and/or vegetables.
    • By compressing the sandwiches the ingredients all stay together and don't start falling out of the bread. It also makes it easy for the host to enjoy the guests since all that needs to be done is cut and serve.
    • Make sure to use enough of the dressing to add to the sandwich but keep it within ½" of the edge of the bread so when it is compressed, it doesn't ooze out.
    This photos shows a slice of the Muffaletta sandwich on a plate with black olives and celery sticks.

    Other Amazing Breads

    • Stuffed Focaccia
    • Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.
      Buttermilk Flatbreads
    • 3 slices of Homemade Breakfast Stromboli sit on a wite plate with a mug and the remainder of the roll in the background.
      Homemade Breakfast Stromboli
    • Stuffed Italian Bread - Pane Bianco

    Love this Muffaletta Bread? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

    A slice Muffaletta Bread layered with meats, cheeses and condiments on a plate with olives and celery.

    Muffaletta Bread

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This bread is used for the famous French Quarter sandwich of the same name. Just about the only way to obtain this bread is to make it yourself and this bread is so easy, it's perfect for a beginning baker or anyone who is hesitant about bread baking. The sandwich is compressed in the fridge overnight which means you get to join the gathering and aren't stuck in the kitchen.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 22 minutes mins
    Resting time 2 hours hrs
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 37 minutes mins
    Course Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servomgs
    Calories 262 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9x2" round cake pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Muffaletta Bread

    • 2 ½ cups bread flour (350 grams)
    • 2 tablespoons granulated sugar (25 grams)
    • 1 ½ teaspoon instant yeast
    • 1 ¾ teaspoon table salt
    • 1 cup water
    • 2 + tablespoons olive oil
    • grated parmesan or sesame seeds

    Assembly of Sandwich

    • 4 large slices ham (¼ pound)
    • 4 large slices, smoked turkey (¼ pound)
    • 4 large slices roast beef (¼ pound
    • 8 slices hard salami (¼ pound)
    • 4 slices Swiss Cheese (¼ pound)
    • 4 slices American Cheese (¼ pound)
    • 4 slices pepperjack cheese (¼ pound)
    • 4 roma tomatoes
    • Hot banana peppers, as needed
    • Sandwich dressing of choice

    Instructions
     

    Muffaletta Bread

    • The instructions for the processor and the mixer are the same unless otherwise noted.
    • Spray a 9x2" round cake pan with a non-stick baking spray. Set aside.
    • Place the flour, sugar, salt and instant yeast in the bowl of a processor. Pulse several times to mix.
    • Combine the water (cold if using the processor - warm if using a mixer) and olive oil. Pour over the dry ingredients and process until it mostly forms a ball.
    • Pour it onto a work surface and form it into a ball. Place it in a container or bowl sprayed with a non-stick baking spray. Turn it over so both sides are coated. Cover the bowl or container with plastic wrap and let rise for about 2 hours until doubled in bulk.
    • Deflate the dough and press it into a 9" round. Place it in the prepared 9" pan.
    • At this point it can be covered directly with plastic wrap and refrigerated up to 3 days to develop flavor. If baking immediately, cover it and let it rise until doubled.
    • Preheat the oven to 450°F. While the oven is preheating, brush the top of the bread lightly with olive oil. Sprinkle with grated parmesan cheese or sesame seeds.
    • Bake 18 to 22 minutes until golden brown and medium brown. Cool on a rack and use immediately or wrap well and freeze for up to 3 months. That, unwrapped at room temperature.

    Assembly of Sandwich

    • These ingredients are the ones I used. Feel free to use any meats, cheeses, condiments, and sandwich spreads you like.
    • Juice the roma tomatoes by cutting off the top and squeezing the liquid from the tomato. Slice them about ¼" thick and set aside.
    • Slice the bread in half horizontally.
    • Spread a thick layer of the sandwich spread on the bread to within ½" of the edge. Cover it with the hot banana peppers.
    • Layer the meats and cheeses in the following order: Ham, Swiss cheese, salami, American Cheese, smoked turkey, pepperjack cheese, roast beef and slice of tomato to cover the beef.
    • Spread the underside of the top layer of bread with a thick layer of sandwich bread to within ½" of the edge of the bread.
    • Place the sandwich on a parchment line rimmed baking sheet. Place a piece of parchment on top of the bread. Place another baking sheet on top of the paper and weight down with at least 10 pounds of weight. I used two 10# dumbells because I had them but a 10 pound bag of flour works also. Do not use sugar.
    • Refrigerate overnight to compress the sandwich.
    • To serve: Bring to room temperature and cut as desired.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    ______________________________________________
    Bread Flour will ensure you get the highest rise and best texture out of this bread.  All-purpose flour can be substituted but the bread won't be quite the same.
    The olive oil I used was virgin for the best taste. Vegetable oil or canola can also be used.
    The sugar can be omitted if desired. It will take the bread longer to rise but will still be fantastic.
    Instant Yeast is used to speed things a long. Although the photos below show the yeast added with the flour, I have recently changed how I handle instant yeast. In my experience, I have found that while gathering the other ingredients, adding instant yeast to whatever liquid is being used softens it enough to increase its rising power and the end product is higher than just adding it to the flour. In the past, on several occasions, I noticed little bumps in the mixed dough and that were unincorporated yeast. I use this method with any recipe using instant yeast. The second time I made this dough I used this method and the dough rose more. 
    Be sure to juice the tomatoes so they don't leak when the sandwich is compressed,
    When layering, alternate cheeses, condiments, meats, and/or vegetables.
    By compressing the sandwich the ingredients all stay together and don't start falling out of the bread. It also makes it easy for the host to enjoy the guests since all that needs to be done is cut and serve.
    Make sure to use enough of the dressing to add to the sandwich but keep it within ½" of the edge of the bread so when it is compressed, it doesn't ooze out.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 6servingsCalories: 262kcalCarbohydrates: 45gProtein: 8gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gSodium: 685mgPotassium: 179mgFiber: 3gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 345IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 15mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake

    Modified: Jul 3, 2025 · Published: Jan 27, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 30 Comments

    A slice of the Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake sits on a yellow and blue rimmed plate with a multi-colored napkin and mug in the background.

    This Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake is the perfect cake for crumb lovers. The ratio of crumbs to cake is almost equal and that's my type of coffee cake. A river of cinnamon apples runs through a sour cream coffee cake that stays softly delicious for days under a cake cover.

    A slice of the Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake sits on a yellow and blue rimmed plate with a multi-colored napkin and mug in the background.

    One batch of crumbs is divided into the filling and the topping. The cake itself is easily and quickly put together. The hardest thing is waiting the hour plus to be able to eat it.

    Other Coffee cakes equally as tempting include: Easier "Danish Pastry Recipe", Irish Apple Cake, Cuccidati Coffee Cake, and the Pina Colada Coffeecake.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What's With the Pretzels?

    There is one unusual ingredient in the crumbs and filling - pretzels. If you saw my post on the (Almost) No Bake Pumpkin Pie, which I hope you have, you'll see the pretzels and pecans used in the crust. Then it was used for flavor. In this instance, the pretzels are used to balance the sweetness of the crumb mixture. Every once in a while you might taste them but they add a depth of flavor that otherwise would not be there.

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • It's quick to put together.
    • The sour cream keeps this coffee cake soft, tender and full of flavor.
    • The crumbs are over the top.
    • Crumb lovers will make this their go to recipe.
    • It cuts beautifully.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Apple Filling

    The filling for the Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake include, granny smith aopples, flour, brown sugar, unsalted butter, pretzels, pecans, vanilla, salt, and cinnamon.

    FRONT ROW: Vanilla, salt, cinnamon

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, pretzels, pecans

    BACK ROW: Granny Smith Apples, all-purpose flour, brown sugar

    Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake

    The cake ingredients are baking powder, baking soda, salt, eggs, unsalted butter, granulated sugar, sour cream and milk.

    FRONT ROW: Baking powder, salt, baking soda

    MIDDLE ROW: Eggs, unsalted butter, milk

    BACK ROW: Sour Cream, all-purpose flour, granulated sugar

    Important Ingredients

    • My cinnamon of choice is Korinje cinnamon for its bold but mellow flavor.
    • I used waffle pretzels. If you use a different pretzel make sure to weigh them as there will, most likely, be more or less in a cup.
    • Granny Smith Apples are used for their tart flavor.
    • The milk can be whole or 2%.
    • Sour Cream is used not only for flavor but because it acts to soften the final prodoct and give it a longer shelf life.
    • Either dark or light brown sugar can be used but dark adds more flavor.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & Instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The Filling

    The first collage for the Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake includes the prezels in the processor, processed to crumbs, the pecans added and chopped.

    Step 1. Add the pretzels to the processor bowl. Step 2. Process until very finely ground. Step 3. Add the pecans to the processor. Step 4. Pulse to break them up into coarse pieces.

    This collages shows the  brown sugar and cinnamon mixed vanilla added, crumbs made for filling and the flour added to the remaining cinnamon sugar.

    Step 5. Combine the brown sugar and cinnamon. Add the brown sugar and pretzel/pecan mixture from the processor. Combine completely. Remove ¾ cup, add 2 tablespoons flour from the measured amount. Step 6. Add the vanilla. Step 7. Stir with a fork to moisten everything. Cover with plastic wrap and set aside. Step 8. To the remaining toping, add the rest of the flour and salt, stirring until evenly combined. Melt the butter and set both aside.

    Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake

    The collage for the cake shows the dry ingredients sifted together, the sour cream and milk together,the butter in the mixing bowl with the sugar and then creamed.

    Step 9. Sift together the all-purpose flour, baking powder, baking soda and salt. Set aside. Step 10. Mix the sour cream and milk together. Set aside. Step 11. Add the granulated sugar and softened butter (72 to 75°F) to a mixing bowl fitted with the scraper or paddle attachment. Step 12. Cream them together until very light and fluffy.

    The eggs are added to the mixing bowl and the batter is mixed, the first addition of the flour is incorporated.

    Step 13. Add the eggs to the batter. Step 14. Beat on medium and them on high to incorporate them. If they curdle, beat a bit longer. See my post on How to Avoid Curdled Batter. Step 15. Add half the flour. Step 16. Beat on low until all is mixed.

    The sour cream/milk is added to the batter and beaten in followed by the remainder of the flour beaten in.

    Step 17. Add the sour cream mixture. Step 18. Beat until totally mixed. Step 19. Add the remainder of the flour and blend in to make a smooth, very thick batter.

    Half of the batter is spread on the bottom of the pan, the apple mixture is spread on top of the batter and the remainder of the batter is dolloped over the filling.

    Step 21. Spray the pan with a non-stick baking spray. Spread half the batter over the bottom of the pan. Step 22. Add the shredded apples to the reserved filling mixture. Step 23. Spread the filling almost to the edges of the pan. Step 24. The batter is very thick so first dollop it over the apple filling.

    The remaining batter covers the filling, the top crumbs are added, the unbaked cake in its pan is on a parchment lined half sheet pan and the baked cake is released from the pan.

    Step 25. Spread the batter carefully over the filling. Step 26. Add 14 tablesponns of the melted butter to the remaining crumb mixture and toss with a fork until crumbs form. If it is dry, add the remaining butter a little at a time. Do not add more than is needed. Step 27. Place the unbaked coffee cake on a parchment lined half sheet pan. Step 28. After it has baked and cooled, remove the cake from the pan. Transfer to a serving plate.

    Recipe FAQS

    What is the difference between coffee cake and regular cake?

    The main differences are the topping, texture and size. Coffee cakes are usually a bit denser and are topped with crumbs, streusel or powdered sugar as opposed to a frosting. If they are filled, the filling is baked within the cake and they are one layer cakes.

    Where did coffee cakes originate?

    Germany is given credit for the coffee cake where they are called kaffeekuchen.

    Why are they called coffee cakes?

    Originally the were served with coffee in Germany. They are often served with coffee or tea in America or as snack cakes.

    Expert Tips

    • Granny Smith apples are the apples of choice for this cake. They are more tart and juice less.
    • Add the apples to the reserved crumb topping just before spreading them over the batter to prevent them from over juicing.
    • For the lightest cake, make sure the butter is softened to about 72° to 74°F in order for it to mix well with the sugar and form the necessary air pockets to aid in the rising of the batter. Under creamed or creaming with too cold butter will make a denser cake with a heavy texture resulting in less batter.
    • Flours can be more or less dry which is why the recipes gives a range of butter needed to make the crumbs for the topping.
    • Use a fork to incorporate the butter into the dry ingredients for the crumbs. A spoon will not yield crumbs as much as mix the ingredients together.
    • A cheesecake or springform pan is necessary to remove the cake as it shouldn't be turned upside down to release it or the crumbs can be damaged.
    • Add ¾ of the butter for the top crumbs initially. If they are dry or don't form crumbs, add additional butter a little at a time. Use only enough butter to make the crumbs. More will make a paste.
    This picture shows a slice of the Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake on a yellow and blue rimmed plate with a multi-colored napkin and mug in the background.

    Other Interesting Coffee Cakes

    • This picture shows a slice of the coffee cake on a white, lace edged plate on a marble counter.
      Apricot Crumb Coffee Cake
    • Blueberry Crumb Coffee Cake
      Blueberry Crumb Coffeecake
    • A piece of the New York Crumb cake on a plate with a stack in the background.
      New York Style Crumb Cake
    • Raspberry Ripple Coffeecake on a white plate with a cup of tea.
      Easily Made Raspberry Ripple Coffeecake

    If you love this Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake, it would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

    A slice of the Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake sits on a yellow and blue rimmed plate with a multi-colored napkin and mug in the background.

    Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake

    Helen S. Fletcher
    A river of cinnamon apples runs through a light and flavorful sour cream coffee cake that stays softly delicious for days under a cake cover.
    4.67 from 6 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Cook Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
    Course Coffee Cake
    Cuisine American, Breakfast, Snack
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 569 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9" x 3" Cheesecake or springform mold
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Apple Filling and Crumb Topping

    • 1 cup waffle pretzels (50 grams)
    • ½ cup pecans (60 grams)
    • 1 ¼ cups brown sugar, packed (250 grams)
    • 1 tablespoon cinnamon
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
    • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour, divided (210 grams)
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 14 - 16 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (200 to 225 grams)

    Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake

    • 1 ½ cups peeled and shredded apples, packed
    • 1 ¾ cups all-purpose flour (245 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon table salt
    • ¾ cup sour cream (170 grams)
    • ¼ cup milk
    • 8 tablespoons butter (1 stick or 114 grams)
    • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
    • 2 large eggs

    Instructions
     

    Apple Filling and Crumb Topping - Each step is shown in the Step by Step Photos.

    • Place the pretzels in the bowl of a food processor. Process until finely ground.
    • Add the pecans to the processor and pulse to chop coarsely.
    • Combine the brown sugar, cinnamon and the pretzel/pecan mixture.
    • Set aside ¾ cup of this mixture to use as the middle layer of the coffee cake. Stir in 2 tablespoons of flour from the measured amount. Add the vanilla. Set aside.  
    • To the remaining mixture, add the rest of the flour and salt and stir until evenly combined. Add 14 tablespoons of the the melted butter to the flour mixture, tossing with a fork until everything is moistened and crumbs form.  If crumbs do not form, add the remainder of the butter a bit at a time. Cover with plastic wrap. This crumb topping will be used on top of the batter.  Set aside. 

    Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake

    • It is very important the butter be softened to about 72 to 74°F for the creaming to be effective. If the butter is too cold, the mixture won't be light and fluffy and the cake can be more dense.
    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.  Spray a 9 x 3” round cheese cake or springform pan with a non-stick cooking spray and set aside.
    • Peel and shred the apples. Measure 1 ½ cups, packed. Cover them directly with plastic wrap. Set aside.
    • Whisk together the flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt.  Set aside.
    • Whisk together the sour cream and milk.  Set aside.
    • Cream the butter and sugar in a mixing bowl until very light and fluffy. Add the eggs and beat until completely combined.  If they curdle, beat on high. See my post on How to Avoid Curdled Batter.
    • Add ½ of the flour mixture, beating until completely mixed. followed by the sour cream mixture and last add the remainder of the flour mixture, beating each time until completely combined.
    • Pour half the batter into the pan and smooth flat.  
    • Add the shredded apples to the ¾ cup brown sugar mix, stirring well. Distribute evenly over the batter.
    • Dollop small bits of the remaining batter over the entire apple filling and carefully spread it out.  
    • Cover the batter with the crumbs.
    • Bake 65 to 75 minutes until a tester or toothpick comes out clean.  Cool in the pan.
    • Release from the pan and place on a cake board or serving plate.
    • The Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake will last for at least 4 days covered. It can also be frozen then well wrapped for several months. Thaw at room temperature.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    _____________________________________________________
    Granny Smith apples are the apples of choice for this cake. They are more tart and juice less.
    Add the apples to the reserved crumb topping just before spreading them over the batter to prevent them from over juicing.
    For the lightest cake, make sure the butter is softened to about 72° to 74°F in order for it to mix well with the sugar and form the necessary air pockets to aid in the rising of the batter. Under creamed or creaming with too cold butter will make a denser cake with a heavy texture resulting in less batter.
    Flours can be more or less dry which is why the recipes gives a range of butter needed to make the crumbs for the topping. 
    Use a fork to incorporate the butter into the dry ingredients for the crumbs. A spoon will not yield crumbs as much as mix the ingredients together. 
    A cheesecake or springform pan is necessary to remove the cake as it shouldn't be turned upside down to release it or the crumbs can be damaged. 
    Add ¾ of the butter for the top crumbs initially. If they are dry or don't form crumbs, add additional butter a little at a time. Use only enough butter to make the crumbs. More will make a paste.
     
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 569kcalCarbohydrates: 75gProtein: 6gFat: 28gSaturated Fat: 15gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 95mgSodium: 445mgPotassium: 163mgFiber: 2gSugar: 42gVitamin A: 797IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 88mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Decadent Chocolate Snack Cake

    Modified: Apr 23, 2026 · Published: Jan 23, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A partially eaten piece of the Decadent Chocolate Snack Cake sits on a white plate with a fork and bit of marshmallow with the cake in the background and a blue and white vase.

    This Decadent Chocolate Snack Cake is a deeply chocolate cake that is simplicity itself. In fact, it doesn't even require a mixer. The basic cake is tiled with chocolate chunks. From there you have options. Top it with the marshmallow cream and stop there or top the marshmallow cream with a caramel drizzle and that is decadence itself.

    A partially eaten piece of the Decadent Chocolate Snack Cake sits on a white plate with a fork and bit of marshmallow with the cake in the background and a blue and white fase.

    The marshmallow cream is easy to make as is the caramel which can be made ahead and great to have on hand for desserts and ice cream.

    This is actually a compilation of parts of three recipes - Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins, Caramel - A Building Block of Pastry, and How to Make a S'Mores Tart.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    About the Caramel

    Caramel has an unwarranted reputation of being hard to make. Nothing could be further from the truth. There are two ways to make caramel. The dry method which requires putting sugar into a heavy skillet (think cast iron here) and melting it, then adding butter and cream. Truthfully, I have never been able to do this.

    The second way is the way we made it at the bakery and, for me, is much easier and more foolproof as long as the directions are followed. With this method, water, corn syrup and granulated sugar are brought to a boil in a large pot. It needs to be at least 3 times the amount of ingredients as it will boil up really high. This is cooked until the sugar turns a medium brown. Off heat the butter, cream and vanilla are added and then it is cooked to the desired temperature depending upon how it is going to be used.

    The big thing with the wet method is to wash down the sides of the pan as described below to make sure no sugar crystals remain. If they do, the caramel can granulate which simply means it becomes grainy and is no longer smooth.

    This recipe makes about 2 cups but cutting it down is difficult. It is great on ice cream, pound cakes, bread puddings or just eating it out of the container. It lasts forever in a covered container in the fridge. To soften it, just microwave it briefly and you're ready to go.

    This Chocolate Cake....

    • Uses basic Ingredients that you probably have on hand.
    • Is packed with flavor and customizable.
    • Can be made with just the basic cake alone, add the marshmallow cream or make the whole lot including caramel.
    • Both the marshmallow cream and caramel are easy to make an I'll show you how.
    • Is a lot easier to make than it looks but nobody needs to know that.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Caramel

    The ingredients for the caramel are water, granulated sugar, unsalted butter, vanilla, and corn syrup.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, vanilla extract, corn syrup

    BACK ROW: Water, granulated sugar, heavy cream

    Chocolate Cake

    Ingredients for the chocolate cake include all-purpose flour, Dutch cocoa,baking powder, baking soda, salt, brown sugar, milk, vegetable oil, eggs, sour cream, vanilla, instant coffee and chocolate chunks.

    FRONT ROW: Baking soda, baking powder, instant coffee, salt

    SECOND ROW: Vanilla extract, eggs, chocolate chunks

    THIRD ROW: Dutch cocoa, sour cream, whole milk

    FOURTH ROW:  All-purpose flour, canola oil, brown sugar

    Marshmallow Cream

    The ingredients for he marshmallow cream include granulated sugar, egg whites, corn syrup, water, and vanilla.

    FRONT ROW:  Water, vanilla extract

    BACK ROW:  Granulated Sugar, egg whites, corn syrup.

    Key Ingredients

    • The chocolate I use is Callebaut Calets #811. While it looks like chocolate chips it is made like that so it melts easily without any chopping. There are no additives it is pure chocolate. Prior to the calets we used to have to chop 10# blocks. Sometimes at the bakery we would chop 10 blocks at a time. Not fun!
    • Dutch processed cocoa is important in this recipe for its dark, rich flavor. Switching it out for anything else can adversely effect the outcome since the leavening agents are different for natural cocoa and will not be effective.
    • Dark or light brown sugar may be used interchangeably. I used dark for this recipe.
    • Whole milk was also used per the original recipe. I didn't test with any other milk.
    • Sour cream and oil add to the richness and moistness of the muffin.
    • Either instant coffee or instant espresso may be used. Both enhance the flavor of the chocolate.
    • Heavy Cream can also be referred to as 40% cream, meaning that it contains 40% butterfat. It is preferred over whipping cream which has less butterfat. It whips up firmer and needs no stabilizer.
    • Corn Syrup  is the key to a perfect caramel. Clear corn syrup is an invert sugar and, used in the correct proportions, will prevent the caramel from becoming grainy. . There is some confusion between corn syrup and high fructose corn syrup.  Karo Corn syrup as found on grocers' shelves, either clear or dark, is 100% glucose (sugar) and is not the same as the high fructose variety used in commercial products. Years ago Karo changed their formula for consumer corn syrup to no longer include the offending high fructose corn syrup. I don't know about other brands.
    • I use table salt.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Caramel

    The first collage shows the caramel being made with the liquid ingredients in a pan, the lid on, the syrup boiling and the color of the syrup

    Step 1. Add the water, sugar and corn syrup to a medium size pan. Step 2. Either cover the pan with a lid and leave it on while boiling the syrup for about 3 minutes or use a pastry brush dipped in cold water to wash down the sides of the pan. This ensures there are no sugar crystals left that can granulate the caramel. Step 3. Remove the lid and bring the syrup to a hard boil. Step 4. Boil the syrup until a deep golden brown.

    This collages shows the butter being added to the caramel syrup, then the cream, the mixture brought to a boil to finish, the completed caramel.

    Step 5. Remove the pan from the heat and add the butter, stirring until melted. Step 6. Add the cream and the caramel. Step 7. Bring to a boil and cook until 232°F on a thermometer. Step 8. Transfer the caramel to a bowl to cool.

    Decadent Chocolate Cake

    This collage shows the flour being sifted, the cocoa , baking powder, soda and salt sifted, mixed and the brown sugar added.

    Step 9. Sift the flour into a large bowl. Step 2. Sift the cocoa, baking powder, baking soda and salt over the flour. Step 11. Whisk to combine the ingredients completely. Step 12. Add the brown sugar. I find the easiest way to mix in the sugar is by using my hands. This enables me to squish out any lumped up sugar.

    The coffee and vanilla are combined, the coffee mixture, milk, eggs and oil are mixed in a separate bowl, then added to the dry ingredientss to make the batter.

    step 13. Combine the vanilla and coffee, stirring well. Set aside. Step 14. In a separate bowl, combine the milk, eggs, oil and coffee mixture. Step 15. Whisk together to blend completely. Step 16. Add to the dry ingredients and mix with a spoon. Do not use a whisk, the batter is very thick.

    The batter is poured into a square pan, the chocolate chunks weighed out, distributed over the batter and the baked cake.

    Step 17. Line the bottom of a 9x9" square pan with parchment paper. Spray the paper and the sides of the pan. Pour the batter into the pan. Step 18. Using chocolate chunks, Step 19. distribute them over the batter. Step 20. Bake as directed and cool.

    The last collage shows the syrup boiling for the marashmallow cream, the egg whites, sugar and vanilla in a mixing bowl, beaten marshmallow cream and piped onto the cake then drizzled with caramel.

    Step 21. Add the water, sugar and corn syrup to a saucepan and bring to a hard boil. Step 22. Place the egg whites, sugar and vanilla in a mixing bowl. Step 23. When the syrup reaches 230°F, start beating the whites to the soft peak stage. If they reach the soft peak stage before the syrup has boiled to 246°F, lower the speed to low and keep the mixture moving. Do not turn off the mixer. When the syrup is the correct temperature, raise the mixer to medium and slowly pour the syrup between the beater and the side of the pan. Raise the speed of the mixer to high and beat until lukewarm and very stiff. Step 24. Place the marshmallow cream into a piping bag and pipe onto the cake. Alternatively, just spoon it on. Drizzle with caramel. I divided the cake so you could see it as the basic cake and then continued on to add the marshmallow cream and caramel.

    Recipe FAQS

    What is a snack cake?

    Usually, it is a simple one layer cake that can be cut off and eaten as a snack.

    Is Marshmallow Cream the same as Marshmallows?

    Basically yes. There is a difference in the amount of the ingredients and temperature for marshmallows.

    Where does the name marshmallow come from?

    Originally made from the mallow plant that grows wild in the marshes of Asia and Europe, it has been brought to America.  The name is made from the area in which it grows and the from the plant.  

    Expert Tips

    • Make sure to pay attention to the degrees specified in the caramel and marshmallow cream. Over cooking either one will alter its texture.
    • Don't over mix the cake batter. Use a spoon or rubber spatula and just mix until everything is combined.
    • Use the chunk chocolate for the best finish to the top the cake.
    • When making the syrup for the marshmallows, use a saucepan that holds about 6 cups. The mixture rises up as it boils. However, do not use a larger pan or the ingredients will spread out too much making it difficult to use the thermometer.
    • Do not under beat the marshmallow cream or it will not hold its shape.
    A partially eaten piece of the Decadent Chocolate Snack Cake sits on a white plate with a fork and bit of marshmallow with the cake in the background and a blue and white vase.

    More Easy Recipes that You Will Love

    • Spice bars ready to eat surrounded by spices.
      Spice Bars
    • Crumb Topped Orange Date Muffins
      Crumb Topped Orange Date Muffins
    • Four finishes on the Carrot Cake Dougnuts are plain, pecan topped, sugared and filled with cream cheese.
      Carrot Cake Baked Doughnuts
    • A butter crust holds a raspberry jam filling topped with an almond filling of toasted almonds, sugar, butter, eggs, amaretto, almond and vanilla flavoring. It is finished with a dusting of powdered sugar
      Easy Almond Raspberry Tart

    Love this Decadent Chocolate Snack Cake? It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

    A partially eaten piece of the Decadent Chocolate Snack Cake sits on a white plate with a fork and bit of marshmallow with the cake in the background and a blue and white vase.

    Decadent Chocolate Snack Cake

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Decadent Chocolate Snack Cake is a deeply chocolate cake that is simplicity itself. In fact, it doesn't even require a mixer. There is the basic version, the marshmallow cream topped version and the one finished with caramel. Take your pick!
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr 45 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Cake
    Cuisine American
    Servings 16 servings
    Calories 624 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9x9" baking pan
    • Thermometer
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Caramel

    • 1 cup water
    • 1 ¼ cups granulated sugar (250 grams)
    • ½ cup clear corn syrup
    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter (90 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract

    Decadent Chocolate Cake

    • 1 tablespoon vanilla
    • 1 teaspoon instant coffee
    • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour (210 grams)
    • 1 cup Dutch cocoa (85 grams)
    • ¼ teaspoon baking powder
    • ¾ teaspoon baking soda
    • 1 teaspoon table salt
    • 1 ⅓ cups brown sugar (265 grams)
    • ½ cup whole milk
    • ¾ cup canola or vegetable oil
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 cup sour cream (225 grams)
    • 1 cup chocolate chunks (150 grams)

    Marshmallow Cream

    • 3 tablespoons water
    • ⅔ cup clear corn syrup
    • ⅓ + 1 cup + tablespoon granulated sugar (75 grams)
    • 2 large egg whites
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla

    Instructions
     

    Caramel

    • Place the water,sugar, and corn syrup in a 3 quart sauce pan. Stir over heat until the sugar is dissolved completely. Bring to a hard boil.
    • Either wash down the sides of the pan with a pastry brush dipped in cold water or put a lid on the pan for 3 to 4 minutes. Boil, without disturbing until the syrup is a dark, medium brown.
    • Off heat, immediately add the butter and stir until it is melted. Mix the cream and vanilla and stir it into the pan. If some of t he cream lumps up, don't worry. Return it to medium high heat and bring it to a boil again. Boil to 232°F on a thermometer.
    • When it is done, transfer it to a bowl or a storage container and let it cool to room temperature.
    • It can be stored at room temperature for a couple of days or, for longer storage, refrigerate almost indefinitely. Microwave briefly to use it.
    • Yield: About 2 cups.

    Decadent Chocolate Cake

    • Preheat the oven to 375°F. Line the bottom of a 9x9" square pan with parchment paper. Spray the paper and sides of the pan with a non-stick-baking-spray.
    • In a very small bowl, combine the vanilla and instant coffee. Stir to dissolve coffee and set aside.
    • Sift the flour into a large bowl.
    • Sift the cocoa, baking soda, baking powder and salt on top of the flour. Whisk together to mix well.
    • In a smaller bowl, whisk together the milk, oil, eggs, sour cream and coffee mixture.
    • Pour the liquid ingredients over the dry ingredients and stir with a spoon or fold together with a rubber spatula just until everything is mixed well. Do not over mix.
    • Distribute the chocolate chunks evenly over the top.
    • Pour into the prepared pan and smooth the top. Bake for 30 to 35 minutes until a tester comes out with just a bit of crumbs on it. Do not over bake.
    • Cool in the pan and then turn it out onto a cake board or serving dish.

    Marshmallow Cream

    • In a small saucepan, bring the water, corn syrup and ¼ cup (50 grams) sugar to a boil. Wash down the sides of the pan with a pastry brush dipped in cold water. Continue to boil hard until a thermometer reaches 246°F.
    • In the meantime, place the egg whites, remaining sugar and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer fitted with the whisk attachment. When the temperature of the sugar syrup reaches 230° start beating the egg whites on high to the soft peak stage.
    • If the egg whites reach temperature before the syrup is done, reduce the speed of the mixer to low and keep beating. Do not turn off the mixer.
    • When the syrup comes to temperature, raise or lower the speed of the mixer to medium and slowly drizzle it into the egg whites, keeping it between the side of the pan and the whisk. Increase the speed of the mixer to high and beat until very thick and lukewarm.

    Finishing

    • Place the marshmallow cream into a pastry bag fitted with a ½" plain tip. Pipe the meringue on a diagonal covering the entire cake.
    • If using the caramel, heat about ½ cup in the microwave until fairly liquid. Heavily drizzle the caramel in the opposite direction of the marshmallow.
    • The cake can be stored for several days at room temperature, covered.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    ___________________________________________________
    Make sure to pay attention to the degrees specified in the caramel and marshmallow cream. Over cooking either one will alter its texture.
    Don't over mix the cake batter. Use a spoon or rubber spatula and just mix until everything is combined.
    Use the chunk chocolate for the best finish to the top the cake.
    When making the syrup for the marshmallows, use a saucepan that holds about 6 cups. The mixture rises up as it boils. However, do not use a larger pan or the ingredients will spread out too much making it difficult to use the thermometer.
    Do not under beat the marshmallow cream or it will not hold its shape.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 16servingsCalories: 624kcalCarbohydrates: 92gProtein: 5gFat: 29gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 12gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 61mgSodium: 255mgPotassium: 245mgFiber: 3gSugar: 78gVitamin A: 491IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 77mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Orange Chiffon Cake

    Modified: Sep 16, 2025 · Published: Jan 13, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 33 Comments

    Orange Chiffon Cake is one of the easiest cakes to make. It is light and airy, deeply flavored and basically takes two steps to make. I'm going to show you an easier way to whisk the egg whites and sugar that is hassle free and doesn't require the slow addition of sugar to the egg whites.

    One of my readers Sue had this to say about this recipe "I made this cake three times - once to test the recipe and two more to make a cake and cupcakes. I followed it exactly, and weighed the flour and sugar. Each time, it was ***PERFECT*** 
    Thank you, Helen for sharing this recipe and most importantly great instructions"

    A slice of Orange Chiffon Cake on a white plate with strawberries and the cake in the background.

    The cake can be made in an angel food pan or in layers as I did for the Orange Cranberry Cake. It can be served plain with just a dusting of powdered sugar, add some macerated fresh fruit or finished with an orange glaze. It's ideal for an impressive looking cake with a lot fewer calories than most.

    This is one cake that should definitely be in your repertoire.

    If you love anything orange be sure to check out my Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake. While not Orange, one of my best cakes is definitely My Best Banana Cake Recipe.

    And if you prefer a fruity cupcake, check out my Strawberry Surprise Cupcake Recipe.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is a Chiffon Cake

    There are several classifications of cakes and one of them is the foam cake such as my Perfectly Easy Angel Food Cake, or my Lemon Butter Sponge Cake. These cakes depend, in part or in whole, on whipped egg whites to provide the volume of the finished item after baking. The egg whites make a foam that are folded together with the flour portion of the recipe. Some recipes may also use baking powder as an aid, but the essential thing is the beaten egg whites.

    Chiffon cakes are very easy to make. They have oil in them which automatically contributes to a moist cake. The lack of flavor from the vegetable or canola oil allows whatever the cake is flavored with to come to the front and be the predominant flavor. They also have baking powder as an assist to rising which makes them easier than recipes that depend completely on the air in the whipped egg whites.

    You simply mix everything but the egg whites and sugar together and then separately, the whip the egg whites and sugar then fold them together.

    Beating Sugar and Egg Whites

    Here's the part you're going to love. Traditionally, egg whites are beaten to the soft peak stage and then the sugar is added a tablespoon at a time. However, there is a more modern way to combine them. Simply combine the egg whites along with the sugar and cream of tarter, if using, in a clean mixing bowl fitted with a clean whisk attachment. Beat until the desired consistency.

    Use baker's sugar if possible as it will dissolve better and faster than regular granulated sugar - see my post Three Easy Sugar Fixes which tells you how to make brown sugar, powdered or confectioners sugar, and superfine or baker's sugar at home. Baker's sugar is a finer grind of granulated sugar but not powdered sugar which contains cornstarch.

    If folding beaten egg whites into a recipe they should be beaten to a medium consistency. If they are beaten too stiffly they will lose a lot of the air beaten in because it will take longer with more effort to fold in completely without what I refer to as "clouds" or unfolded whites in your finished recipe .

    Why You'll Love this Recipe

    • It's really easy. If you can separate an egg you have it made.
    • There are basically two steps. Beat the yolk with everything but the whites and sugar then fold together.
    • The whites and sugar can be beaten together from the start, eliminating the need to spoon the sugar in gradually.
    • The cake stands tall and elegant if made in an angel food pan but can also be used for layer of a cake.
    • The cake needs only a sprinkling of powdered sugar or a simple orange glaze to finish it.

    Variations

    • The orange zest and juice can be changed to lemon zest and juice.
    • A great combination is to use a chocolate glaze such as my Dark Satin Ganache as used in the Boston Cream Pie. In this case I would use half of it.
    • Serve it with sweetened fruit or macerate the fruit in Amaretto.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Orange Chiffon Cake

    The ingredients for the Orange Chiffon Cake include, Orange juice, cake flour, vegetable oil, egg yolks, egg whites, granulated sugar, vanilla, orange zest, baking powder, cream of tarter and salt.

    FRONT ROW: Cream of Tarter, vanilla extract, orange zest, baking powder, salt.

    MIDDLE ROW: Egg yolks, egg whites, granulated sugar

    BACK ROW: Orange Juice, cake flour, vegetable oil

    Orange Glaze Ingredients

    The ingredients for the Orange Glaze are powdered sugar, orange zest, orange  juice, lemon  juice and butter.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, orange zest, orange juice, lemon juice

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage shows the dry ingredients being sifted into the mixing bowl, then mixed with the liquid ingredient, the egg whites, sugar and cream of tarter in a mixing bowl, then beaten.

    Step 1. Sift the cake flour, 1 cup of sugar, baking powder and salt into a mixing bowl fitted with the paddle attachment. Mix briefly to combine. Step 2. Add the oil, egg yolks, juice, orange zest and vanilla. Mix for about 2 minutes to combine completely. Step 3. In a clean mixing bowl fitted with the whisk attachment, add the egg whites, remaining sugar and cream of tarter. Step 4. Beat on low to combine, raise the speed to medium and beat until foamy, then raise to high and beat until medium peaks form.

    This collage shows the beaten egg whites in the bowl with the flour mixture, a plastic spatula in the middle of the whites, turning the bottom mixture to the top and the finished mix.

    Step 5. Pour the egg whites over the flour/egg mixture. Step 6. To fold in, plunge a plastic spatula into the center of the whites going all the way to the bottom of the bowl. Step 7. Scoop up some of the bottom mixture, bringing it to the top and turn it over onto the whites. Step 8. Turn the bowl about an eighth of a turn each time and repeat this, making sure you get to the bottom of the bowl each time until the two are mixed together.

    The batter is poured into an angel food pan, and baked, it is cooled upside down and released by going around the side of the pan with a small spatula.

    Step 9. Pour the batter into an ungreased angel food pan and smooth the top. Step 10. Bake as directed. Step 11. Cool the orange chiffon cake upside down. If the pan doesn't have feet on it, hang the pan on a soda or beer bottle to cool. Step 12. To release the cake, place a small flexible metal spatula between the cake and the edge of the pan. Go around the rim of the pan, keeping the spatula on the metal rim, not the cake. Release the cake around the tube in the same manner.

    The last collage for the chiffon cake shows the bottom being released with a metal spatula, the ingredients for the glaze in a bowl, mixed and poured over the cake.

    Step 13. To release the cake from the bottom, place a metal spatula between the metal bottom and the cake. Go around the bottom and turn the cake onto a cake board or serving dish. Step 14. Combine all of the glaze ingredients in a bowl. Step 15. Mix the ingredients together with a spoon. Do not use a whisk as it can make air bubbles in the glaze. Step 16. Pour the glaze over the cake letting the glaze run down the sides.

    Recipe FAQS

    Why are angel food and chiffon cakes baked in an ungreased pan?

    An angel food cake pan is very tall. If it were to be greased or prepared in any way the cake could slide down the side during baking as the side sets faster than the middle. The cake could lose some of it height losing its airy, light quality which is the point of these cakes.

    What is the difference between an angel food and chiffon cake?

    The angel food cake is made of only egg whites, sugar, flour, salt, flavoring and cream of tartar. Air whisked into the whites is the only leavening agent. Chiffon cakes have all of the above plus egg yolks, baking powder, and oil. They both used beaten egg whites.

    Why is it called a chiffon cake?

    Because it is light and airy like chiffon.

    Who invented the chiffon cake?

    Harry Baker, a caterer in 1927, invented the cake and kept the recipe to himself until he sold it to Betty Crocker in 1948.

    Storage and Freezer Instructions

    The cake can be stored at room temperature, covered for several days. It can also be baked and frozen, without the glaze, and well wrapped, for several months. Thaw, unwrapped at room temperature. Glaze after it come to room temperature.

    Expert Tips

    • Navel Oranges are the best for zesting as their skins are thicker and their juice is often sweeter. Three medium size oranges will yield the zest and juice needed for both the cake and the glaze.
    • This cake, simply finished with powdered sugar is lower in fat that those with frosting and filing.
    • Using superfine or baker's sugar with the egg whites allows the sugar to dissolve faster than with regular granulated sugar.
    • Do not beat the whites and sugar to stiff peaks. They don't fold well into the flour mixture.
    • Folding the two mixtures together should be done with as few strokes as possible to keep the air in the mixture.
    • Cool the cake completely before releasing.
    • The three extra egg yolks can be thrown into scrambled eggs or used for Lemon Curd.
    The bottom picture shows a slice of the chiffon cake with strawberries on a white, lace edge plat with the cut cake in the background, a blue napkin and a coffee cup in the background.

    Other Easy Cakes You're Sure to Love

    • A slice of the Orange Almond Tea Cake sits on a white plate with 2 strawberries and the rest of the cut cake is behind it.
      Orange Almond Tea Cake
    • Angel food Cake
      Perfectly Easy Angel Food Cake
    • This Ultimate Chocolate Fudge cake is gluten free and easy to make. It is finished with a chocolate glaze and served with a Vanilla Creme Anglaise
      Updated GF Ultimate Chocolate Fudge Cake
    • Citrus Pound Cake
      Citrus Pound Cake

    If you love this Orange Chiffon Cake It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating. Thank you.

    Orange Chiffon Cake

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Orange Chiffon Cake is one of the easiest cakes to make. It is light and airy, deeply flavored and basically takes two steps to make. I'm going to show you an easier way to whisk the egg whites and sugar that is hassle free and doesn't require the slow addition of sugar to the egg whites.
    4.88 from 8 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 50 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course Cake
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 325 kcal

    Equipment

    • Angel Food Cake pan
    • Stand Mixer
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Orange Chiffon Cake - please note that the flour volume requires you to SIFT THE FLOUR BEFORE MEASURING to obtain the 2 ¼ cups. Weighing is always the best option.

    • 2 ¼ cups sifted cake flour (225 grams)
    • 1 ½ cups baker's or superfine sugar (300 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon table salt
    • ½ cup vegetable oil
    • 7 large eggs, separated
    • 3 additional egg whites
    • ¾ cup orange juice
    • Zest from 2 oranges
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 1 ¼ teaspoon cream of tartar

    Orange Glaze

    • 2 cups powdered sugar (260 grams)
    • 1 tablespoon orange zest
    • 4-5 tablespoons orange juice
    • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
    • 1 tablespoon butter, melted

    Instructions
     

    Orange Chiffon Cake

    • Preheat the oven to 325°F. Have the 10" angel food cake at hand. Do not prepare it any way.
    • In a large mixing bowl fitted with a paddle attachment, combine the flour, 1 cup of sugar (200 grams), baking powder and salt.  Mix to combine.  .  
    • Add the oil, egg yolks, juice, vanilla and zest.  Mix for about 1 or 2 minutes until well combined. Set aside.
    • In a clean mixing bowl fitted with the whisk attachment, add the egg whites, remaining ½ cup of sugar (100 grams) and the cream of tartar. Beat on low to mix, raise the speed to medium and beat until very foamy, then raise to high and beat until medium peaks. The peaks should not bend over as in soft peaks, nor should the be as stiff as for a meringue,
    • Pour the whites over the flour mixture and fold together. To fold in, plunge a plastic spatula into the center of the egg whites all the way to the bottom. Scoop up some of the flour mixture and bring it up to the top, turning the spatula over to deposit it. Turn the bowl about an eighth of a turn and continue in this manner until the two are mixed.
    • Pour the batter into the unprepared angel food pan and level it. Bake for 45 to 50 minutes until medium brown, it springs back when lightly touched or a tester comes out clean.
    • Immediately, turn it upside down to cool if the pan has feet or hang it on a soda or beer bottle to cool.
    • When completely cool, go around the sides of the pan with a small, flexible metal spatula, keeping the spatula to the edge of the pan, not the cake. Release the center tube in the same manner. Remove the side.
    • To remove the bottom, place a spatula between the metal bottom and the cake. Go around the whole bottom keep the spatula to the metal base.
    • Place a cake round or serving plate over the top and turn the chiffon cake out. it's normally served upside down.

    Orange Glaze

    • Combine all of the ingredients in a bowl and mix with a spoon. Do not use a whisk as it can make air bubbles. If it is too thick, add a bit more juice or water, if too thin, add a little powdered sugar to get to the right consistency.
    • Pour over the cake allowing the excess to run down the side of the cake.
    • To store, place under a cake dome where it will last for several days. For longer storage, freeze the cake, without the glaze, until hard. Wrap well. It will keep for several months. Thaw, uncovered at room temperature. Glaze after it is thawed.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    ______________________________________________________
    Navel Oranges are the best for zesting as their skins are thicker and their juice is often sweeter. Three medium size oranges will yield the zest and juice needed for both the cake and the glaze. If you're slightly short of juice, add water. 
    This cake, simply finished with powdered sugar is lower in fat that those with frosting and filing. 
    Using superfine or baker's sugar with the egg whites allows the sugar to dissolve faster than with regular granulated sugar. 
    Do not beat the whites and sugar to stiff peaks. They don't fold well into the flour mixture. 
    Folding the two mixtures together should be done with as few strokes as possible to keep the air in the mixture.
    The three extra egg yolks can be thrown into scrambled eggs or used for Lemon Curd.
    Cool the cake completely before releasing.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 325kcalCarbohydrates: 65gProtein: 8gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.05gCholesterol: 111mgSodium: 232mgPotassium: 174mgFiber: 1gSugar: 47gVitamin A: 232IUVitamin C: 11mgCalcium: 64mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones

    Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Jan 6, 2025 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

    A plate of 6 Stuffed Buttermilk Scones on a blue rimmed plate with a multi colored napkin in the background.

    Think of these fantastic Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones as sconewiches. Two currant scones are stuffed with a brown sugar and cinnamon filling (think cinnamon rolls) finished with a vanilla glaze. Much quicker than even Cinnamon Bread, these are the perfect touch of sweetness after the holidays.

    A plate of 6 Stuffed Buttermilk Scones on a blue rimmed plate with a multi colored napkin in the background.

    To make this recipe even more inviting, these scones can be frozen before or after baking so they are ready anytime you are.

    There's also a couple of tips in here to speed things along and make them even easier to get into the oven.

    A couple of other tasty sweet breads include the Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake, Breakfast Scones, Lemon Sugar Buns, and the Carrot Cake Baked Doughnuts.

    If you want more easy holiday recipes, check out Recipes for a Stress-Free Thanksgiving Morning.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    English or American Scones?

    Funny you should ask. I always thought one was made with eggs and one wasn't. Evidently not! It seems that, at least nowadays, the recipes are fairly interchangeable. Americans tend to incorporate more add-ins while the English prefer their clotted cream and jam. Personally, I'd take either one.

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • They're packed with cinnamon and sugar and who doesn't love that?
    • They have all the characteristics of cinnamon rolls without all the waiting.
    • Easy does it with a few tips to make them even easier.
    • They can be frozen either before baking or after making scones on a 
      moment's notice.

    Variations

    • This is a basic recipe so any add-ins can be used.....or omitted.
    • Add the zest of a lemon or orange to the dough for a bit of zing.
    • Sprinkle chopped, toasted nuts on top of the glaze before it dries.
    • If adding fruit, frozen is my choice because it doesn't discolor the dough as much as fresh which juices more. 
    • Any dried fruit is a great addition, such as dried cherries, apricots, blueberries or figs, dates or raisins. And don't forget the chocolate chips, minis are great here.
    • Spices such as cinnamon, nutmeg, ginger, and/or cloves can be added to the dough for a spiced version.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Scones

    Ingredients for the scones include all-purpose flour, buttermilk, butter, currants, baking powder, sugar, and salt.

    FRONT ROW: Baking powder, granulated sugar, salt

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, currants

    BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, buttermilk

    Cinnamon Filling

    The cinnamon filling consists of brown sugar, cinnamon and unsalted butter.

    FRONT ROW: Cinnamon, unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Brown Sugar

    Vanilla Glaze

    The glaze ingredients consist of powdered sugar, unsalted butter, milk, and vanilla.

    FRONT ROW: Milk, vanilla, unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage shows the currants soaking in water, the dry ingredients in the mixing bowl, mixed and the cut up butter added.

    Step 1. If using the currants, cover them in the hottest water available while prepping the remaining ingredients. Step 2. Add the dry ingredients to the mixing bowl. Step 3. Whisk them together. Step 4. Fit the mixer with the paddle and add the cold, cubed butter.

    This collages shows the butter cut into the flour mixture, the buttermilk added, the dough formed and the currants added.

    Step 5. Beat until the butter is in pea size chunks. Step 6. Add the buttermilk. Step 7. Mix until the batter comes together Step 8. Squeeze all of the water out of the currants. They should be moist but not wet. This is important so the dough does not become wet.

    The third collages sows the scone dough on the table, formed into a round and divided in two, a cake pan on top of the dough and the dough shaped into a round.

    Step 9. Pour the dough onto a work area and knead it several times to bring it together into a smooth ball. Step 10. Divide it in half and shape each half into a round. Working with one ball at a time, sprinkle the surface with a little flour and flour the top. Step 11. Place a 9" round cake pan on top of the dough Step 12. Press down firmly, rotating the pan around to form a circle of dough the size of the pan. If it isn't big enough, simply pat it out to size.

    Thios collage shows the butter spread on the bottom round, the cinnamon sugar on top, the edges of the dough wet and the top round on,

    Step 13. Spread the melted butter over the bottom round to within ½" of the edges. Step 14. Mix the brown sugar and cinnamon together and spread over the butter. Step 15. Wet the edges of the uncovered dough. Step 16. Roll out the second piece of dough into a 9" round and place it over the cinnamon.

    The last collage shows the round marked into 4 with one quarter removed, the unbaked scones on the tray, then baked and glazed.

    Step 17. Mark the filled scones into quarters. Freeze them at this point until firm but not rock hard. This makes it easier to cut and keeps the filling inside. Cut each quarter in half or thirds. These are very rich so thirds might be a better option. Chill or freeze briefly so they go into the oven cold. Step 19. Bake until browning. Step 20. Mix all of the ingredients for the vanilla glaze together until smooth. Drizzle or cover the scones with the glaze. Allow to sit at room temperature for a couple of hours for the glaze to firm up.

    Recipe FAQS

    What is the secret to good scones?

    Use cold butter and cut it in leaving pea size pieces to make a flaky dough. The dough should be soft and a bit tacky but not wet. Mix only until it begins to hold together, then knead it by had several times to bring it together and shape into a round.

    What makes a moist scone?

    Buttermilk or sour cream are keys to tender scones.

    Do scones use eggs?

    Some do, some don't. Eggs will make a more cake like scone, the lack of them, all things being equal, makes a tender, moist scone. There is no right or wrong.

    Storage and Freezing

    The scones may be frozen two ways. If freezing before baking, my choice, freeze the entire marked round. Do not cut them. To cut and bake, thaw them slightly until firm but not hard and cut each quarter into 2 or 3 pieces. Place on a parchment lined baking sheet and bake in a preheated oven as called for.

    Expert Tips

    • All of the ingredients should be cold. The cold butter should be cut into the flour in lima bean size pieces (bigger than pea size) to produce a flaky scone. The buttermilk should be cold also.
    • Do not over mix or over handle the dough. Mix it until it just comes together and then knead a few times by hand to bring it together into a smooth ball.
    • Freeze the assembled rounds before cutting until firm but not hard. This will make cutting them easier and the filling will stay inside. If cut when first assembled, some of the filling falls out.
    • Refrigerate or freeze the cut scones until cold but not frozen before baking.
    • Cream or milk makes a glaze that dries with a low gloss. Water dries flat and isn't as pretty.
    • Dark or light brown sugar may be used. The dark will add more flavor.
    • It is most important to squeeze all the water from the soaked currants. They should be moist but not wet or the texture of the dough will change.

    A scone with a bite out of it sits on a blue rimmed plate with a colorful napkin behind it and more scones behind that.

    Other Quickly Made Breads

    • Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.
      Buttermilk Flatbreads
    • Breakfast Scone
      Breakfast Scones - An Easy Morning Treat
    • The Beauty of Buttermilk
      The Beauty of Buttermilk in Baking

    If you love these Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

    A plate of 6 Stuffed Buttermilk Scones on a blue rimmed plate with a multi colored napkin in the background.

    Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Think of these fantastic Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones as sconewiches. Two currant scones are filled with a brown sugar and cinnamon filling (think cinnamon rolls) and finished with a vanilla glaze.
    4.50 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 40 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast/brunch
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 302 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Cinnamon Filling

    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted
    • ⅓ cup brown sugar (65 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons cinnamon

    Buttermilk Scones

    • ½ cup currants, optional (60 grams)
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, cold (85 grams)
    • 3 cups all-purpose flour (420 grams)
    • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
    • 1 tablespoon baking powder
    • ¾ teaspoon table salt
    • 1 ½ cups buttermilk, cold

    Vanilla Glaze

    • ¾ cup powdered sugar (100 grams)
    • 1 ½ tablespoons unsalted butter, softened (25 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 1 + ½ tablespoons milk

    Instructions
     

    Cinnamon Filling

    • Combine the brown sugar and cinnamon. Melt the butter. Set aside.

    Buttermilk Scones

    • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside. Soak the currants overing them in the hottest water available while the rest of the recipe is made.
    • Cut the butter into lima bean size pieces and keep cold.
    • Add the flour, sugar, baking powder and salt to a mixing bowl fitted with the paddle attachment. Mix it for a few seconds. Add the butter and mix to break up the butter into lima bean size pieces.
    • Add the buttermilk and beat on low to medium low until the dough starts to come together.
    • Drain the currants. Squeeze all of the water out of them. These need to be moist but not wet or it will change the texture of the dough. Add them to the dough and mix just until incorporated.
    • Pour it onto your work surface and knead it several times to form a smooth ball. Divide the ball in half (approximately 475 grams per piece).
    • Flour the work surface lightly and also the top of one of the pieces of dough. Place a 9" round cake pan on top and press down, rotating the pan to flatten the dough. If doesn't come to the edges, just pat it out.
    • Place the round on the parchment lined baking sheet. Brush the round with the melted butter to within ½" from the edge and top with the cinnamon/sugar mixture, keeping the edge clean. Pat the mixture into the butter.
    • Flatten the second piece of dough as for the first. Wet the clean edge with water and place the second round on top of the first. Press the edges together.
    • Mark the dough, without going through it, into quarters. The easiest way to to mark in in half, turn it 90° and mark it again.
    • To make the scones easier to cut and keep the filling inside, freeze the rounds until firm and cold throughout. You don't want to freeze it all the way.
    • Preheat the oven to 375°F. Line a second baking sheet with parchment.
    • When ready, cut the scones as desired by cutting each quarter into 2 or 3 pieces. Place them on a parchment lined baking sheet alternating them so the points are up and down to get them all on the tray. Freeze again just until cold if they have warmed up.
    • Bake for about 25 minutes until lightly browned. Cool on the tray. A small amount of the filling will leak out if they were cold going into the oven. It will break off easily when cooled.

    Vanilla Glaze

    • Combine all of ingredients in a bowl and whisk until smooth. Drizzle over the scones or top them completely.
    • The scones are best freshly made but will hold if covered lightly for a day.
    • To make ahead, completely freeze the round of assembled scones. Thaw it just enough to be able to cut and precede as above. Alternatively, bake them and freeze them, well wrapped, without the glaze. Thaw, warm in a 350°F for about 10 minutes and glaze them when cool.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    ___________________________________________________
    All of the ingredients should be cold. The cold butter should be cut into the flour in lima bean size pieces (bigger than pea size) to produce a flaky scone. The buttermilk should be cold also.
    Do not over mix or over handle the dough. Mix it until it just comes together and then knead a few times by hand to bring it together into a smooth ball.
    Freeze the assembled rounds before cutting until firm but not hard. This will make cutting them easier and the filling will stay inside. If cut when first assembled, some of the filling falls out.
    Refrigerate or freeze the cut scones until cold but not frozen before baking.
    Cream or milk makes a glaze that dries with a low gloss. Water dries flat and isn't as pretty.
    Dark or light brown sugar may be used. The dark will add more flavor.
    It is most important to squeeze all the water from the soaked currants. They should be moist but not wet or the texture of the dough will change.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12sconesCalories: 302kcalCarbohydrates: 49gProtein: 5gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 27mgSodium: 290mgPotassium: 138mgFiber: 1gSugar: 23gVitamin A: 336IUVitamin C: 0.3mgCalcium: 120mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Homemade Breakfast Stromboli

    Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Dec 28, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    3 slices of Homemade Breakfast Stromboli sit on a wite plate with a mug and the remainder of the roll in the background.

    Homemade Breakfast Stromboli - what's not to love about a fantastic, easy to make bread enclosing, scrambled eggs, bacon, hash browns, 2 cheeses and red peppers? I sure don't know. It bakes up perfectly and cuts into beautiful slices with the filling intact.

    3 slices of Homemade Breakfast Stromboli sit on a wite plate with a mug and the remainder of the roll in the background.

    I have used my super flavorful and easy Homemade Pizza Dough which turned out to be one of my biggest posts this year. Everyone loves it! It goes together in minutes, rises really fast but still has tons of flavor and can be used in multiple ways.

    Stromboli can be filled with almost anything as long as it isn't a wet filling. It can be packed with meats and cheeses, just veggies, whatever you want for any time of the day or any occasion.

    Other Italian inspired recipes include: Stuffed Focaccia, International Flatbreads, Stuffed Italian Bread - Pane Bianco, Italian Calzones, and the Muffaletta Bread. Asparagus Season is Here makes a great accompaniment. Another impressive breakfast recipe is the Easy Eggs Benedict for Mother's Day.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • After the ingredients are prepped, it's super easy and fast to get into the oven.
    • As long as the ingredients aren't wet, this can be made and refrigerated overnight.
    • The pizza dough can be made up to 3 days ahead and refrigerated. It is far easier to roll out and fill if it is cold.
    • After the initial rise of the pizza dough, the stromboli never rises again. After filling, it goes straight into the oven.
    • It can be served as is or with a sauce such as taco sauce, marinara, even ranch if that's your go to.

    How to Easily Make Bite-size Bacon

    When I want bite-size pieces of bacon, I simply cut ¾" to 1" strips vertically as shown. When fried in a skillet, they reduce to the perfect size. Be sure to fry these until they are crispy so they don't become soggy in the stromboli.

    Bacon cut vertically to  make bite-size pieces when fried.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Pizza Dough

    The dough for the pizza  dough includes yeast, oil, salt, all-purpose flour, semolina flour and water.

    FRONT ROW: Instant yeast, olive oil, salt

    BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, semolina flour, water

    Homemade Breakfast Stromboli Ingredients

    Ingredients for the Homemade Breakfast Stromboli are cheddar cheese, red peppers, pepper jack cheese, pizza dough, eggs, hash brown potatoes, and bacon.

    FRONT ROW: Cheddar Cheese, roasted red peppers, pepper jack cheese

    MIDDLE ROW: Pizza Dough

    BACK ROW: Eggs, hash brown potatoes, bacon

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions

    Step by Step Instructions

    The photos in this first collage are the pizza dough rolled out, the cheddar cheese spread on, topped with the fried hash brown potatoes which are topped with the scrambled eggs.

    Note: Before starting the bacon and hash browns should be cooked until crisp and the eggs scrambled. Everything should be completely cooled before rolling out the dough. The cheeses need to be shredded. The jarred peppers should be dried well between paper towels.

    Step 1. Roll the dough into into a 10" x16" rectangle on a lightly floured board. It will be easiest to do if the dough is cold. The 16" side should be in front of you. Step 2. Mark off 3" on the far end of the dough. There should be no ingredients on this part as the filling will push forward as it is rolled. Spread the shredded cheddar cheese evenly to within 1" of each end. Step 3. Top the cheese with the hash brown potatoes. Step 4. Add the scrambled eggs.

    This collages shows the  red peppers, bacon and pepperjack cheese being added and the dough being rolled up.

    Step 5. Add the red peppers. Step 6. Top with the bacon. Step 7. Finish with the pepper jack cheese. Step 8. Fold the 1" exposed side dough over the filling. Wet the end of the roll with water. Roll the filled dough up tightly all the way to the end. Seal the end of the dough by pinching it together.

    The last collage shows the finished roll, the roll transferred to a parchment lined baking pan and scored, afterwhich it is egg washed, vents cut on top and double panned.

    Step 9. The finished roll is turned seam side down. Step 10. It is placed on a parchment lined half sheet pan and scored into 1" slices. Do not go all the way through the dough. Egg wash the roll twice. Cut several vents in the top. Step 12. Cool briefly if serving immediately.

    Recipe FAQS

    What is a stromboli?

    It is a yeast dough, usually a pizza dough, filled with an assortment of meats, vegetables, eggs, whatever is desired and tightly rolled up and baked. It can be served with or without a sauce.

    Isn't that the same as a calzone?

    While they can both be made with the same ingredients, calzones are a hand pie where the filling is placed on a round of dough which is turned over the filling and baked.

    Where did the Stromboli come from?

    An Italian immigrant in Philadelphia invented it, as legend has it, to feed hungry coal miners who wanted something filling and portable they could take to work.

    Where did the name come from?

    It is named after the volcanic island of Stromboli off the coast of Sicily. It was inspired by the name of a movie "Off the Island of Stromboli".

    Storage and Reheating

    Store leftovers in the refrigerator. To reheat wrap each slice in foil. Poke a 1 in hole in the top and heat at 350°F for about 10 to 15 minutes.

    The stromboli can also be made ahead and frozen if desired. For a whole roll, thaw in the fridge, then warm in a 350°F oven for 20 to 25 minutes on a parchment lined baking sheet. If it's whole it doesn't need to be wrapped.

    Expert Tips

    • Have all the ingredients prepped and cooled. The bacon and hash browns should be fried crisp, the eggs scrambled, the jarred red peppers drained and patted dry and the cheeses shredded.
    • After it is filled and rolled up, score it into the desired number of pieces without going through the dough. This will make cutting it easier after baking.
    • Make sure to keep the bottom 3" of dough clean without any filling. The filling will push down as it rolls and fill in the empty space. Otherwise some of the filling is bound to get pushed out of the dough. Each side should have a 1" margin to allow it to be folded over the ingredients to keep them inside the roll.
    • Roll it tightly to avoid any air spaces.
    • It is baked immediately without rising.
    • Double pan so the bottom doesn't overbake before the rest of it baked.
    3 slices of Homemade Breakfast Stromboli sit on a wite plate with a mug and the remainder of the roll in the background.

    More Tempting Savory Dishes

    • A slice of the Torta Rustica displaying the multiple layers of the filling.
      Torta Rustica - A Savory Italian Pastry
    • Chicken Pot Pe
      Easy, Elegant Chicken Pot Pie
    • A slice of the French Onion Tart showing the tomatoes and olives in the yeasted crust with a sprig of basil.
      French Onion Tart
    • This Mayfair Salad Dressing features, lettuce, swiss cheese and ham strips, croutons and Mayfair dressing.
      Mayfair Salad Dressing - Better than Caesar

    If you love this Homemade Breakfast Stromboli, It would be hugely helpful and so helpful it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

    3 slices of Homemade Breakfast Stromboli sit on a wite plate with a mug and the remainder of the roll in the background.

    Homemade Breakfast Stromboli

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Homemade Breakfast Stromboli - what's not to love about a fantastic, easy to make bread enclosing, scrambled eggs, bacon, hash browns, 2 cheeses and red peppers? It bakes up perfectly and cuts into beautiful slices with the filling intact.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Cook Time 40 minutes mins
    Rising 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 25 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 16 servings
    Calories 250 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Homemade Pizza Dough

    • 1 ¾ cups all-purpose flour (240 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons semolina flour (30 grams)
    • ¾ teaspoon salt
    • 3 tablespoons olive or canola oil
    • ¾ cup warm water (90°F)
    • 1 ½ teaspoons instant yeast

    Homemade Breakfast Stromboli

    • 8 ounces bacon (225 grams)
    • 2 cups frozen hash brown potatoes
    • 5 large eggs
    • 4 ounces cheddar cheese, shredded (114 grams)
    • 4 ounces pepper jack cheese, shredded (114 grams)
    • ½ cup jarred, roasted red peppers
    • 1 large egg, beaten

    Instructions
     

    Homemade Pizza Dough

    • Using the ingredients above, go the Homemade Pizza Dough for photos and instructions.

    Homemade Breakfast Stromboli

    • Preheat the oven to 400°F. Line a half sheet pan with parchment paper. Set aside.
    • For the easiest way to cut the bacon into bite-size pieces is to open a package of bacon and cut ¾" to 1" pieces vertically as shown in the photo. Be sure to fry them until crisp so they don't become soggy in the stromboli. Place between paper towels and pat well to remove excess grease. Cool before using.
    • Fry the hash brown potatoes until medium brown and crispy. Cool before using.
    • Whisk the eggs to mix them. Add 2 tablespoons water and whisk. Place in a medium hot skillet with a bit of butter or oil and cook to the desired consistency. Cool before using.
    • Pat the jarred red pepper between paper towels to dry the off. Cut into bite size pieces.
    • Roll the dough into a 10" x 16" rectangle on a lightly floured surface. It will be easiest to do if the dough is cold. The 16" side should be in front of you.
    • Mark off 3" on the far end of the dough. There should be no ingredients on this part as the filling will push forward as it is rolled.
    • Spread the shredded cheddar cheese evenly to within 1" of each side.
    • Top the cheese with the hash brown potatoes, followed by, in order by the scrambled eggs, red peppers, bacon, and top with the shredded pepper jack cheese.
    • Fold the 1" exposed side dough over the filling. Wet the end of the roll with water. Roll the filled dough up tightly all the way to the end. Seal the end of the dough by pinching it together.
    • Turn the roll over so the seam is on the bottom. Place the roll in the prepared pan. Score it every inch or as large as you want the pieces. This will make it cut easier. The roll may be tightly covered at this point and refrigerate overnight.
    • When ready to bake, cut 3 vents in the top of the roll along the marked lines. Brush with the egg wash twice.
    • Double Pan. Bake at 400°F fro 35 to 40 minutes until medium brown and the inside temperature is 200°F.
    • Cool for a few minutes and then cut along the scored lines to serve.
    • Leftovers can be individually wrapped in foil and stored in the refrigerator for a couple of days. To serve, preheat the oven to 400°F, Cut a hole in the top of the foil to let the steam escape and heat for 10 to 15 minutes until hot. Unwrap and serve.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    ____________________________________________________
    After the ingredients are prepped, it's super easy and fast to get into the oven.
    As long as the ingredients aren't wet, this can be made and refrigerated overnight.
    The pizza dough can be made up to 3 days ahead and refrigerated. It is far easier to roll out and fill if it is cold. 
    After the initial rise of the pizza dough, the stromboli never rises again. After filling, it goes straight into the oven.
    You can fill it with your favorites as long as they are not wet.
    It can be served as is or with a sauce such as taco sauce, marinara, even ranch if that'syour go to.
    Have all the ingredients prepped and cooled. The bacon and hash browns should be fried crisp, the eggs scrambled, the jarred red peppers drained and patted dry and the cheeses shredded.
    After it is filled and rolled up, score it into the desired number of pieces without going through the dough. This will make cutting it easier after baking.
    Make sure to keep the bottom 3" of dough clean without any filling. The filling will push down as it rolls and fill in the empty space. Otherwise some of the filling is bound to get pushed out of the dough. Each side should have a 1" margin to allow it to be folded over the ingredients to keep them inside the roll.
    Roll it tightly to avoid any air spaces.
    It is baked immediately without rising. 
    Double pan so the bottom doesn't overbake before the rest of it baked.
    Store leftovers in the refrigerator. To reheat wrap each slice in foil. Poke a 1 in hole in the top and heat at 350°F for about 10 to 15 minutes.
    The stromboli can also be made ahead and frozen if desired. For a whole roll, thaw in the fridge, then warm in a 350°F oven for 20 to 25 minutes on a parchment lined baking sheet. If it's whole it doesn't need to be wrapped.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 16servingsCalories: 250kcalCarbohydrates: 18gProtein: 10gFat: 15gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.04gCholesterol: 93mgSodium: 385mgPotassium: 177mgFiber: 1gSugar: 0.2gVitamin A: 255IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 122mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Easier "Danish Pastry" Recipe

    Modified: Apr 23, 2026 · Published: Dec 22, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 17 Comments

    A slice of Easier Danish Pastry sits on a silver cake server with the braid in the background.

    This Easier "Danish Pastry" Recipe replaces the traditional laminated Danish pastry with my really easy 60 Second Brioche coupling it with the Viennese Braid technique which is equally easy to make. This Chocolate Raspberry Braid combines these two to produce a very professional looking finished pastry worthy of the name Danish Pastry. It's packed with flavor, perfectly balanced and indulgent.

    This is perfect for anytime you want to make a great impression or for festive holidays. Since it can be done in its entirety, frozen, thawed and warmed, it is just the thing for an early morning breakfast, brunch, afternoon break or really anytime.

    A slice of Easier Danish Pastry sits on a silver cake server with the braid in the background.

    In my first book, "The New Pastry Cook", I used this filling with croissant pastry.  When I started to think about what to do with Brioche pastry, this came to mind immediately.  I used a cooked filling instead of raspberry jam because the jam has a tendency to leak out when it is in the oven.  However, I have included instructions if you want to use jam instead.

    Brioche is a very versatile basic recipe for both sweet and savory. These recipes will get you started: Super Fast and Easy Brioche Rolls, Orange Bread Pudding, Twice Baked Brioche - A Breakfast Treat, Glazed Lemon Twists with Brioche, Lemon Gooey Butter Cake in a Brioche Crust, and a Blueberry Lemon Pizza in a Brioche Crust.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    A Word About Brioche

    I could never understand the need to beat Brioche for 15 or20 minutes as so many recipes state. That can literally burn out a mixer. Whether you make in the processor with my 60 second version or in a mixer, it just doesn't need to beat that long. If using a mixer, 4 or 5 minutes max is all it needs.

    Yes, it is one of the most enriched doughs to be made, heavy with eggs and butter but it has yeast which will make it rise. While the gluten in the flour needs to be activated by beating, it's just like other yeast doughs. Also, using bread flour like I do in this recipe, gives the yeast a boost. The only thing I can think of is it might be a carry over from the days it was created when mixers weren't around and this was done by hand.

    I learned my brioche from a wonderful French pastry chef. This is much more of a batter than a dough. Because it is a slack dough it can't be kneaded by hand. To shape it, it must be refrigerated overnight to firm up the butter and make it easy to roll. Additional flour should never be added. To do that would ruin the texture as well as the taste. There are many versions of brioche but this one is the most delicious, best and fastest I've seen.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Filling Ingredients

    Ingredients for filling the Chocolate Raspberry Braid Recipe inlcude frozen strawberries, brandy, lemon juice sugar and minute tapioca.

    Clockwise starting with the Raspberries, granulated sugar, lemon juice, brandy and minute tapioca.

    Brioche Ingredients

    Ingredients for brioche include yeast, sugar, bread flour,, salt, butter, eggs and half and half.

    FRONT ROW: Instant yeast, salt, sugar and a pinch of sugar

    MIDDLE ROW: Water, half and half and bread flour

    BACK ROW: Unsalted butter, eggs

    Chocolate Filling

    The chocolate filling consists of chocolate and unsalted butter.

    Left to Right: Semisweet Chocolate, unsalted butter

    Important Ingredients

    • Frozen Red Raspberries are thawed and used for the filling. The liquid is saved for other uses.
    • Instant yeast is best to work with the large amount of butter and sugar.
    • Unsalted butter is used for it pure butter taste.
    • Size Large Eggs are important to providing enough liquid to the recipe.
    • The Chocolate is #811 Callebaut Callets. They look like chocolate chips but are pure semisweet chocolate.
    • Minute tapioca is used because it thickens without becoming bouncy and it allows the item to be frozen and thawed in its original condition. Cornstarch breaks down if frozen and then thawed.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Brioche

    Please see 60 Second Brioche to make the dough. This needs to be done the day before and refrigerated overnight. It can be held in the fridge up to 3 days before using.

    Raspberry Filling

    Step 1. Thaw the raspberries very well. Place them in a strainer or sieve and drain them very well. This can take a couple of hours or you can press down on them with a spoon. Step 2. Place them in a sauce pan with the brandy, lemon juice, sugar and tapioca. Place over medium heat ad bring to a full boil, stirring constantly. Cook for 1 minute. Cool completely, cover and chill overnight, Step 3. Alternatively, to chill the filling quickly, spread it in a half sheet pan and cover the top with plastic wrap. It will be ready use by the time you prepare the rest of the recipe. If in doubt, place the pan in the fridge. Step 4. Remove the chilled dough and roll it into a 10 ½" x 14" rectangle on a lightly floured surface. This should be done fairly quickly as the dough will soften. Place it on a baking sheet with the 10" side vertical to the cookie sheet (not a half sheet pan as the sides need to be open). Chill or freeze it briefly to continue.

    This collage shows the rolled out dough on a cookie sheet, measuring in 3" on the top and bottom of the same side and a ruler laid on the dough where it should be marked.

    Step 5. Trim the edges to straighten them. In the photo above, I have not placed it on the cookie sheet, but moved it after I cut it. It is best to trim it on the cookie sheet so it doesn't get out of shape. This step facilitates moving it in and out of the fridge or freezer without getting it out of shape if it gets too soft to work. Step 6. Without cutting through the dough, mark it 3" in from the edge on top. Step 7. On the same side of the dough, mark it 3" in on the bottom. Step 8. Lay a ruler between the two marks and mark a line straight down. Again, do not cut through the dough. Repeat on the other side of the dough leaving a 4" center strip of dough unmarked.

    This collage shows the butter and chocolate melted together, then spread done the center of the dough, the raspberry on top of the chocolate and the side of thedough being marked in 1" increments.

    Step 9. Combine the chocolate and butter in a small bowl. Heat it in the microwave on half power or over hot water and stir to mix together. Cool. Step 10. Spread it down the center of the dough. Chill briefly to set the chocolate. Step 11. Spread the raspberry filling over the chocolate. Step 12. Mark, but do not cut through every inch down the side of the dough on both sides.

    The fourth collage shows the braid being cut up to the filling, completely cut on both sides, the first cut folded over at the top on the right and several strips folded over on the left.

    Step 13. Cut the 1" pieces up to the center fillings. Step 14. All of the strips of dough should be cut on both sides. Step 15. Start the braid by bringing the first strip on the left side over the filling, pointing it down slightly. Brush the tip with water. Step 16. Continue down the braid, folding the strips over making sure the edges are brushed with water to ensure they adhere to each other.

    The last collage shows the bottom of the braid with the last two strips laid out, the left folded over, the finished braid, and then brushed with egg wash and sprinkled with sliced almonds.

    Step 17. Fold the nest to the last strip of down down, leaving the bottom left and right strip. Step 18. Fold the left strip straight across, brush with water and fold right strip straight across also. Step 19. Chill it just until firm enough to transfer to a half sheet pan lined with parchment paper. This is how it should look when completed. Cover it with a tea towel and let it rise until doubled. Step 20. When ready for the oven, brush it lightly with a beaten egg and sprinkle it with sliced almonds. Double pan and bake as directed.

    Recipe FAQS

    What is the name of a Danish Pastry Braid

    Wienerbrød – Danish Pastry Braid.

    What is the difference between braided doughs and Danish Braids

    Regular braided dough uses strands of dough that are rolled into long strips and then braided with 3,4 5 or more strips by intertwining them. Danish braids are made from one piece of dough which is cut from the sides at 1" intervals and then folded over the filling from the left and then the right so there is no intertwining and the pastry remains flat.

    From where does Brioche come?

    Brioche is one of the prized French breads. It can be made into bread loaves, rolls, used in pastries both sweet and savory. It is an enriched dough using eggs and a considerable amount of butter.

    Expert Tips

    • When making the brioche, the eggs and butter should be cold.
    • The sponge is used to form a dough of optimum gluten development because rich doughs can take a long time to rise. Yeast is a microorganism. It is able to use carbohydrates to develop and produce carbon dioxide that makes the bread dough rise. By using a sponge the number single cell living organisms is increased dramatically cutting the time need to rise as well as baking up higher doughs.
    • Due to the high butter content of the dough, it needs to be worked cold. Moving it in and out of a fridge or freezer makes it easy to work with.
    • A thick raspberry jam can be used instead of the cooked filling by keeping it about a ½" from the top and bottom of the dough. This should help contain the leaking problem.
    • Make sure to wet the edges of the dough when braiding it so they don't pop up when baking.
    This photo of the baked Chocolate Raspberry Brioche Braid shows the braid on a platter with a pale green napkin next to it and a stack of plates and a cup and saucer next to it.

    More Elegant Pastries for You

    • A slice of the Mincemeat Cream Cheese Danish sits on a white plate with a cofee cup and the uncut danish in the background.
      Part 2: Mincemeat Cream Cheese Danish
    • Pithiviers made with Blitz Puff Pastry
      Pithiviers made with Blitz Puff Pastry
    • Chocolate Raspberry Pop Tarts
      Chocolate Raspberry Pop Tarts
    • Cream Horns for Chocolate Marshmallow Cream Horns
      Chocolate Marshmallow Cream Horns

    If you love this Easier Danish Pastry Recipe, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

    A slice of Easier Danish Pastry sits on a silver cake server with the braid in the background.

    Easier Danish Pastry Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Easier Danish Pastry Recipe replaces the traditional laminated Danish pastry with my really easy 60 Second Brioche coupling it with the Viennese Braid technique which is equally easy to make. This Chocolate Raspberry Braid combines these two to produce a very professional looking finished pastry worthy of the name Danish Pastry. It's packed with flavor, perfectly balanced and indulgent.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 55 minutes mins
    Rising Time 4 hours hrs
    Total Time 4 hours hrs 55 minutes mins
    Course Pastry
    Cuisine International
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 339 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Brioche Dough

    • 1 ½ teaspoon instant yeast
    • 2 tablespoons warm water
    • Pinch granulated sugar
    • 2 ¼ cups bread flour (315 grams)
    • 1 ½ tablespoons granulated sugar
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¾ cup unsalted butter, (170 grams or 1 ½ sticks)
    • 3 large eggs
    • ¼ cup half and half

    Raspberry Filling

    • 24 ounces frozen, unsweetened red raspberries (680 grams)
    • 2 tablespoons brandy
    • 2 teaspoons lemon juice
    • ½ to ¾ cup granulated sugar (100 to 150 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons minute tapioca

    Chocolate Filling

    • 2 ounces semisweet chocolate (60 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons unsalted butter, (10 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Brioche - see 60 Second Brioche.

      Raspberry Filling

      • Drain thawed raspberries very well.  Reserve the juice.  I usually put mine in a strainer over a bowl and let them drain for several hours.  
      • In a saucepan, combine the raspberries, brandy, lemon juice, sugar and tapioca.  
      • Place over medium heat and bring to a full boil, stirring constantly.  Cook for 1 minute. Cool completely, cover and chill overnight. Alternatively, to chill the filling quickly, spread it in a half sheet and cover it with plastic wrap.  It will be ready to use in about 15 to 20 minutes.  

      Chocolate Filling

      • Melt the chocolate and butter together. Cool if hot, but make sure it is still spreadable.
      • To make this easier, please refer to the photo for the cutting and assembly instructions.
      • After chilling overnight, Roll the dough into a 10 ½" x 14 ½" rectangle. Trim it to a 10"x14" rectangle.Place it on the parchment lined pan with the 10" side of the dough vertical on the baking pan. If at any point the brioche softens, refrigerate or freeze briefly to firm up.
      • Without cutting the dough, mark the dough on both sides 3" in from the 10" side on the top and bottom. Connect the marks so a straight line runs from the top to the bottom on both sides. This will leave a 4 inch section marked off in the middle.  
      • Spread the chocolate evenly over this 4 inch section but do not cross the lines.  Place the baking sheet in the refrigerator or freezer to harden the chocolate. This will take minutes. Do not freeze the dough.
      • Spread the cold raspberry filling over the chocolate. 
      • Mark both sides of the dough into 1 inch horizontal strips, just up to the filling on both sides.  
      • Cut the strips up to the filling.
      • Starting at the top, fold the first left strip of dough in and over the filling, then slightly down.  Brush the tip with water and cross the first right strip over it.  Continue folding the strips in the manner until the bottom is reached.  
      • Fold the last 2 strips straight across the bottom to seal the braid. Cover with a tea towel and let it rise until doubled. This can take 2 hours or so if the room is cool.
      • Preheat the oven to 375°F.  Brush the braid with the beaten egg and sprinkle with sliced almonds.  
      • Double pan and bake in the upper third of the oven for 25 to 30 minutes until deep golden brown.  Cool on a rack.
      • To make ahead:  Bake, cool, wrap well and freeze for up to 3 months.  Defrost at room temperature on a rack .  Place on a baking sheet and heat in a preheated 350°F oven for about 15 minutes.
      • This Danish pastry is best eaten the day it is made or thawed from the freezer and heated but can be covered and kept at room temperature for a day or so.  

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      __________________________________________________
      When making the brioche, the eggs and butter should be cold.
      The sponge is used to form a dough of optimum gluten development because rich doughs can take a long time to rise. Yeast is a microorganism. It is able to use carbohydrates to develop and produce carbon dioxide that makes the bread dough rise. By using a sponge the number single cell living organisms is increased dramatically cutting the time need to rise as well as baking up higher doughs.
      Due to the high butter content of the dough, it needs to be worked cold. Moving it in and out of a fridge or freezer makes it easy to work with.
      A thick raspberry jam can be used instead of the cooked filling by keeping it about a ½" from the top and bottom of the dough. This should help contain the leaking problem. 
      Make sure to wet the edges of the dough when braiding it so they don't pop up when baking.
      Note:  The leftover juice can be turned into a delicious syrup for pancakes, ice cream, pound cake, etc.  For 1 ½ cups juice, add 1 tablespoon cornstarch and 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice.  Sugar to taste may be added.  Cook over medium heat, stirring constantly until the syrup comes to a boil.  Boil for 1 minute.  Serve warm or cold.  Refrigerate any unused syrup. 
      This Danish pastry is best eaten the day it is made or thawed from the freezer and heated but can be covered for a day or so.  
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 12servingsCalories: 339kcalCarbohydrates: 39gProtein: 7gFat: 17gSaturated Fat: 10gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 83mgSodium: 125mgPotassium: 183mgFiber: 5gSugar: 15gVitamin A: 500IUVitamin C: 15mgCalcium: 43mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Individual Italian Tiramisu

      Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Dec 16, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

      An Individual Italian Tiramisu sits on a cream colored plate and dark beige and silver trim with a cup of tea and a plater of tiramisu in the background,

      This Individual Italian Tiramisu is not to be missed. It's the same one we serve at the restaurant and I have made thousands of these since I put them in the dessert line. This is the perfect dessert to finish out the holidays or the year. It makes an elegant presentation and everyone likes their own personal dessert. It's extravagant and beautiful but most important you'll savor every bite of the light as air filling and the intense coffee rum sponge. You're gonna love those oooohs and ahhhhs when you serve them.

      An Individual Italian Tiramisu sits on a cream colored plate  and dark beige and silver trim with a cup of tea and a plater of  tiramisu in the background,

      With the sponge cake made, it's all downhill since there is no baking after that. The beauty of these Individual Italian Tiramisu is they can be frozen weeks ahead and just thawed to be served.

      There are two ingredients that set this recipe apart - dark rum along with the coffee wash for the sponge and Tahitian vanilla. Madagascar vanilla will not impart the same flavor. Read the Key Ingredients section regarding where to purchase this. (I am not an affiliate for this.

      Here a are a few other show stoppers: Individual Banana Caramel Tart with Rum Pastry Cream and Praline. Sweet Cherry Calzones with Amaretti Crumble, Hazelnut Meringues with Raspberry Mascarpone Mousse, Banana Pudding with Maple Pecans, and Peach Mousse with Cinnamon Crunch.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Rings or No Rings

      Professional bakers use rings with no bottoms for many pastries. They are easy to use and release and can be used for all sorts of molded desserts. They are often used with mousses as well as other desserts and pastries. The ones I use are almost 3" wide and 2" in depth. There are a multitude of different sizes but try to stay as close to this size as possible.

      Alternatively, these can be made in clear glasses so the layering shows. Just adjust the size of the sponge rounds and amount of mascarpone according to the size of the glasses.

      Why You'll Love This Recipe

      • While this looks elegant and complicated, I'm going to show you every step along the way and it is way easier than it looks. There's a newer way to incorporate the sugar into the egg whites included in this recipe.
      • The sponge consists of only eggs, sugar and cake flour. It doesn't get much easier.
      • Once the sponge is made the rest is downhill as there is no more baking - just some mixing and assembling.
      • The fact they can be frozen a month ahead is a fantastic time saver when you're busy with the rest of the cooking.
      • It's packed with flavor and is incredible tasting.
      • There will be almost enough egg whites to make my Perfectly Easy Angel Food Cake that requires no folding in of the flour. Easy is the word here.
      • While not normally an ingredient, I use just a touch of gelatin to ensure the mascarpone layer sets. When you make hundreds of these, the last thing you want is a filling that wobbles.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Sponge Cake

      Ingredients for the sponge cake include egg yolks, granulated sugar, cake flour and egg whites.

      FRONT ROW: Egg yolks, baker's or granulated sugar

      BACK ROW: Cake Flour and egg whites

      Coffee-Rum Wash

      The sponge wash includes, water,dark rum and coffee.

      FRONT ROW: Dark Rum, instant coffee

      BACK ROW: Water

      Mascarpone Filling

      The mascarpone filling for the Individual Italian Tiramisu include Tahitian vanilla, gelatin, egg yolks, mascarpone, water, powdered sugar, and heavy cream.

      FRONT ROW: Tahitian vanilla, gelatin

      MIDDLE ROW: Egg yolks, mascarpone, water,

      BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, heavy cream

      Whipped Cream Finish

      The whipped cream top  includes powdered sugar and heavy cxream.

      LEFT TO RIGHT: Powdered sugar, heavy cream

      KEY INGREDIENTS

      • The eggs should be size large. They don't have to be room temperature. Just break and use.
      • Baker's sugar is preferred over granulated. It can be easily made by going to my post, Three Easy Sugar Fixes.
      • My preference for rum is Meyer's Dark Rum for maximum flavor. If you don't want to buy a whole bottle, it comes in small airline bottles which is perfect for this recipe. Also, if you want the flavor but not the alcohol, heat the rum and light it on fire. That will burn off the alcohol and only the flavor will be left.
      • Instant coffee is one of the most important ingredients in the wash. Espresso can be used but reduce it to 1 ½ tablespoons so it doesn't overpower the rest of the ingredients.
      • Mascarpone came to us from Italy and is technically a cheese. It is often compared to cream cheese but it is much lighter, smoother and personally, I don't think they taste alike. Both are good and have their uses but don't use cream cheese in this recipe. It can be pricy in grocery stores and cheese shops but Trader Joe's has 8 ounce cartons which is what you need very reasonably.
      • Powdered sugar is important for the filling. Most recipes call for granulated but the filling has the tendency to gritty from the sugar. Powdered sugar solves that problem.
      • Tahitian Vanilla is one of the most important ingredients to the flavor of this tiramisu. Madagascar won't impart the same flavor. Tahitian vanilla can be very expensive. At the restaurant, we have paid up to $400.00 a gallon. However, Tahitian Natural Vanilla Flavor comes from Papua New Guinea and is the very same thing as that which is listed as pure but is much less expensive. While 4 ounces of the pure goes from $18.99 to $33.95, the Papua New Guinea costs $10.99 for 4 ounces. I was apprehensive about making the switch but we could detect no difference in the taste - just the price. For the PNG version go to Olive Nation. Again, I am not an affiliate for this product.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Sponge

      Step 1. Combine the egg yolks and half of the sugar (65 grams) in a mixing bowl fitted with the whisk. Step 2. Start beating on medium and raise the speed to high as the ingredients come together. Beat until the mixture is very light in color and thick. Step 3. Clean the bowl and the beater. Place the egg whites and sugar in the bowl. Step 4. Beat the whites until they start to show the marks from the whisk and form peaks. Do not over beat. The whites should hold their shape but not be really firm.

      In this picture the flour is sifted over the egg yolks, the whites are on top of the flour, they are folded together and the batter is fiinished,

      Step 5. Sift the flour over the egg yolk mixture. Step 6. Pile the egg whites on top. Step 7. Fold the mixture together by plunging a rubber spatula into the center of the mixture going to the bottom of the bowl. Scoop up some of the mixture, push the spatula to the edge of the bowl, bringing it to the top and turn it over the top. In the meantime, turn the bowl an eighth of a turn and repeat until the mixture is folded together. This will keep the air in the yolks and whites allowing the sponge to rise. Do not stir together or the sponge can deflate. Step 8. Continue in this manner until the ingredients are one.

      Mascarpone Filling

      The mascarpone must be room temperature to be folded in. If it is cold, the mixture may curdle.

      This collage shows the baked sponge in  a half sheet, pan,the cream for the mascarpone filling beaten, the yolks, powdered sugar and vanilla in a mixing bowl and mixed.

      Step 9. Spread the sponge evenly in a parchment lined half sheet pan and bake as directed. Step 10. Fit the mixer with the whisk attachment. Whip the cream for the filling to the soft stage as seen in the photograph. Remove to a bowl. Step 11. Without cleaning the bowl, place the egg yolks, powdered sugar and Tahitian vanilla in the bowl of a mixer. Step 12. Beat until very light and increased in volume.

      The gelatin is combined with the water, the mascarpone is added to the beaten yolk mixture, the gelatin is liquifed and added to the mascarpone mixture.

      Step 13. Add the gelatin to the cold water in a very small bowl, mixing completely. Step 14. Add the mascarpone to the beaten yolk mixture. Step 15. Beat on low until completely mixed. Step 16. Liquify the gelatin briefly in the microwave so it is about room temperature but completely liquid. Add it to the mascarpone mixture.

      This collage shows the cream being added to the mascarpone mixture and folded in, the rum and coffee wash for the sponge mixed  and being brushed on.

      Step 17. Add the reserved cream to the mascarpone. Step 18. Fold it in completely. Set aside. Step 19. Combine the warm water, coffee and rum. Step 20. Brush the entire amount evenly over the sponge. Some will soak through - that's as it should be.

      The fifth collage shows the soaked sponge being cut with a round cutter, 3 molds filled with the bottom sponge, a tray of 6 molds and 2 glasses filled with the mascarpone filling and the top sponge on top.

      Step 21. Cut rounds out of the soaked sponge the size to fit your mold. Step 22. Line the bottom of the molds, soaked side up. Step 23. Fill the molds with the mascarpone filling. Step 24. Add another round of soaked sponge, soaked side down. If in molds that will freeze, freeze them. If in glasses, refrigerate.

      Finishing

      The last collage shows a tiramisu being released from a mold using a hair blower, chocolate shavings, the tiramisu topped iwth whipped cream and the shavings added.

      Step 25. To easily release the tiramisu, place one on the table and go around it with a hair blower. Then simply push them out. They an also sit at room temperature for 5 to 10 minutes, but they don't always come out as smoothly. Step 26. To make the shavings, select any bar chocolate that is thicker such as Trader Joe's pound plus which is what is pictured. Place a piece of parchment on the table to catch the shavings. To make the shavings in dark or milk chocolate, hold the room temperature chocolate by the wrapper or wrap foil around the part you will hold. Simply use a vegetable peeler and peel off the shavings. Do not pick the up at this point. Place them in a small pan or plate, still on the paper, and refrigerate to get them cold and set. Step 27. Whip the cream and powdered sugar for the topping, until fairly stiff. Place it in a piping bag with a #4 or #5 open star tip and pipe a mound around the top of the tiramisu. Step 28. Top with the shavings. If they are cold, they an be picked up, otherwise use a spoon. Refrigerate. If making ahead and freezing, omit the whipped cream topping and shavings. Leave in the molds and freeze. The day of or day before serving, release and finish as above.

      Recipe FAQS

      What kind of cheese is mascarpone

      While classified as a cream cheese, it is made with cream while American cream cheese is made with cream and milk. It is a fresh cheese and isn't aged so it has a limited shelf life.

      Is rum the only liquor that can be used with tiramisu

      No, Amaretto, Kahlua, Marsala are just a few that can be used.

      Why do Europeans not refrigerate eggs?

      When eggs are laid they have a protective coating on them that keeps the yolks and whites safe. In America, the eggs are washed before selling and that removes the coating which is why they have to be refrigerated to be safe.

      Expert Tips

      • Make sure the mascarpone is at room temperature before adding it to the egg yolk mixture.
      • Don't use too high a speed on the mixer when beating in the mascarpone or it can curdle.
      • This recipe uses raw egg yolks. I have seen methods of "making them safe" but I have never found them unsafe. I have baked professionally for 35 years and even longer than that if you count the years before I became a professional and never once in that time have I had a rotten egg or a problem with eggs. And if you think about it, Americans have gone bonkers over runny egg yolks. At least mine stay cold! But if you are concerned then don't make this recipe.
      • When beating egg whites to be folded in, keep them pliable. If they are beaten too stiff, they won't fold in smoothly and a lot of air will be lost because of the time it takes to get the batter smooth without lumps of unmixed whites. See the photo above for the sponge cake. This same rule holds for whipped cream when folding it in.
      • Brush all the liquid on the sponge layers. It is important to the final flavor.
      A clear platter with 5 tiramisu,

      A Few More Individual Desserts

      • Orange Date Bread Pudding with Hard Sauce drizzled on
        Orange Date Bread Pudding
      • An individual Chocolate Caramel Tart on a white background with raspberries.
        No Bake Mini Chocolate Caramel Tarts
      • This Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cake features a pineapple slice with a cherry in the middle on top of a yellow cake sitting on a blue and white plate.
        Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes
      • Individual Meringue
        Meringue Shells

      If you love these Individual Italian Tiramisu, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

      An Individual Italian Tiramisu sits on a cream colored plate and dark beige and silver trim with a cup of tea and a plater of tiramisu in the background,

      Individual Italian Tiramisu

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This Individual Italian Tiramisu is not to be missed. It's the same one we serve at the restaurant and I have made thousands of these since I put them in the dessert line. It makes an elegant presentation, it's extravagant and beautiful but most important you'll savor every bite of the light as air filling and the intense coffee rum sponge.
      No ratings yet
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine Italian
      Servings 8 servings
      Calories 766 kcal

      Equipment

      • 8 pastry rings about 3" around x 1 ¾" tall or
      • 8 glasses about the same size
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Sponge Cake

      • 6 large eggs, separated
      • ⅔ cup Baker's or granulated sugar divided (130 grams)
      • ¾ cup + 1T cake flour (100 grams)

      Coffee Rum Soak

      • 1 cup +2 T water
      • 2 tablespoons instant coffee or 1 ½ tablespoons espresso
      • ¼ cup Meyer's Dark Rum, preferred

      Mascarpone Filling

      • 1 teaspoon gelatin
      • 2 tablespoons cold water
      • ¾ cup heavy cream
      • 2 ½ cups powdered sugar (200 grams)
      • 4 large egg yolks
      • 1 teaspoon Tahitian vanilla
      • 8 ounces mascarpone cheese

      Whipped Cream topping

      • 1 ½ cups heavy cream
      • ¼ cup powdered sugar (30 grams)

      Instructions
       

      Sponge Cake

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a half sheet pan with parchment paper and spray the paper but not the sides of the pan.
      • With the mixer fitted with the whisk attachment, beat the yolks and ⅓ cup (65grams)sugar in a mixing bowl until very, very light in color (almost white) and very thick.  This took about 8 minutes in my Breville. Other mixers may take more or less time. Remove to a large bowl.
      • In a clean mixing bowl with a clean whisk attachment beat the egg whites and ⅓ cup (65 grams) sugar together until soft peaks form. Beat to medium peaks. This took about 4 minutes in my mixer.
      • Sift the cake flour over the yolk mixture, scoop the whites over the flour and fold everything together.
      • Spread evenly in the prepared pan and bake 13 to 15 minutes. This is a little longer than normal, but the sponge should be a bit dry.
      • This may be made several months ahead, wrapped well and frozen. Thaw at room temperature to use.

      Coffee Rum Soak

      • Combine all of the ingredients, stirring well.
      • Brush the sponge with the soak, using all of it. Some will go through to the bottom of the sponge and that is fine.
      • Using a round cutter the size of the ring or glass, cut rounds from the sponge. If your ring or glass is about 2" as was mine, cut very close together (see photo) to ensure you have enough. You will need 2 rounds per tiramisu.

      Mascarpone Filling

      • Make sure the mascarpone is room temperature before starting.
      • Fit the mixer with the whisk attachment. Beat the cream until fairly stiff. Remove to another bowl.
      • Without cleaning the bowl or beater, add the powdered sugar, egg yolks and vanilla. Beat until very, very light and fluffy – about 7 to 10 minutes.
      • Add the gelatin to the water in a very small bowl and stir to combine completely.
      • Add the room temperature mascarpone in thirds on low. Combine completely.
      • Heat the gelatin in the microwave just until liquified. Do not let it get really hot. Add it to the mixer and beat it in until it is incorporated.
      • Fold in the whipped cream

      Assembly

      • Place one soaked round soaked side up in each container.
      • If using the size ring I did, fill with about ½ cup of mascarpone filling. A #8 disher/scooper does a good job. Make sure the disher is leveled off. For other sizes, you want about twice the filling as the soaked round - see the photo.
      • Place another round on top, soaked side down. If using glasses, refrigerate the tiramisu. If using rings, freeze them.
      • They will keep, well covered, in the freezer for a couple of months at this point.
      • Make the chocolate curls. Place a piece of parchment or waxed paper on the table. Use a piece of chocolate that is about ⅓" or more thick. Using a vegetable peeler, "peel" the chocolate over the paper. Refrigerate.
      • To release from the rings, place a tiramisu on the table and go around it with a blow dryer. Push it out of the ring and place it on a parchment covered sheet pan. Place back in the freezer. If using glasses, skip this part and go to the next instruction.
      • In any case if they are in the rings, they should be frozen before proceeding.
      • Whip the cream and powdered sugar to fairly stiff peaks. Place in a piping bag fitted with a #4 or #5 open star tip. Pipe around the edge and in the middle of the tiramisus.
      • Decorate with the chocolate curls. Refrigerate until serving. These may be finished the day before if desired.
      • These will keep for several days in the refrigerator is covered.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      _________________________________________________
      Please see the Key Ingredients section for more information  
      Make sure the mascarpone is at room temperature before adding it to the egg yolk mixture.
      Don't use too high a speed on the mixer when beating in the mascarpone or it can curdle. 
      This recipe uses raw egg yolks. I have seen methods of "making them safe" but I have never found them unsafe. I have baked professionally for 35 years and even longer than that if you count the years before I became a professional and never once in that time have I had a rotten egg or a problem with eggs. And if you think about it, Americans have gone bonkers over runny egg yolks. At least mine stay cold! But if you are concerned then don't make this recipe.
      When beating egg whites to be folded in, keep them pliable. If they are beaten too stiff, they won't fold in smoothly and a lot of air will be lost because of the time it takes to get the batter smooth without lumps of unmixed whites. See the photo above for the sponge cake. This same rule holds for whipped cream when folding it in. 
      Brush all the liquid on the sponge layers. It is important to the final flavor. 
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 8servingsCalories: 766kcalCarbohydrates: 78gProtein: 13gFat: 43gSaturated Fat: 25gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 335mgSodium: 96mgPotassium: 192mgFiber: 1gSugar: 59gVitamin A: 1706IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 123mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe

      Modified: Sep 16, 2025 · Published: Dec 9, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

      A single Apple Muffin covered with a crunchy sugar topping.

      This super Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe is not only super easy and fast but one of the best muffins around. The key to these wonders is lots of apples and a really crunchy sugar topping that isn't exactly a crumb but a close cousin you're sure to love.

      A single Apple Muffin covered with a crunchy sugar topping.

      This apple muffin is one that was in the original post Fall Muffins that included the The Really Easy Pumpkin Muffin, Cranberry Muffins and this Apple Muffin. I tweeked this recipe just a bit and it is one of the best muffins I make. The crunchy sugar topping is worth the entire muffin. And, to make it even more attractive, the muffin, with the sugar topping can be frozen. The topping remains as crisp and crunchy as when it came from the oven.

      Other muffins you might enjoy are: Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins, Cranberry Orange Muffins and the Blueberry Crumb Muffins.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love this Apple Muffin Recipe

      • It's not only super fast - it's super easy and super delicious.
      • No more cutting apples into small dice. Just throw the apple chunks in a food processor, pulse a couple of times and they're ready. For more tips on using the food processor see my post Food Processor Tips When Baking.
      • The sugar topping consists of two ingredients mixed with a fork.
      • It's not the usual apple muffin.
      • The buttermilk and oil ensure a moist muffin.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Apple Muffins

      Ingredients for the Apple Muffin Recipe include brown sugar, vegetable oil, egg, buttermilk, all-purpose flour, cinnamon, baking soda, baking powder, salt and apples.

      FRONT ROW: Salt, cinnamon, baking powder, baking soda

      MIDDLE ROW: Brown sugar, egg,apples

      BACK ROW: Oil, all-purpose flour, buttermilk

      Crunchy Sugar Topping

      Ingredients for the Crunchy Sugar Topping are granulated sugar and butter.

      Granulated sugar, unsalted butter

      Key Ingredients

      Buttermilk also contributes to moistness. Whole or reduced fat can be used.

      Granny Smith Apples are preferred for this recipe as they don't juice as much as other apples. If apples juice a lot in the batter it will thin it out and change the texture. Granny Smiths are also tart and balance out the sugar.

      Brown sugar can be dark or light but the dark will impart more flavor.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      The first collage shows the apple chunks in a food processor, chopped up, the dry ingredients in a bowl and the brown sugar, oil and egg in the mixing bowl.

      Step 1. Peel and chop the apples in large pieces. Place them in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Pulse them a few times to chop them. Keep them in larger pieces. Step 3. Combine the flour, cinnamon, baking soda and baking powder in a bowl. Whisk them together and set aside. Step 4. Place the brown sugar, oil and egg in the bowl of a mixer.

      The second collage shows the brown sugar mixture beaten, the first batch of flour added, and mixed and the first third of milk added.

      Step 5. Beat the brown sugar, oil and egg until completely combined. Step 6. Add the first of the flour that alternates with the buttermilk. Always start and end with flour to prevent any curdling of the batter. Step 7. Beat to mix well. Step 8. Add the first of the buttermilk. Three additions of flour and two of buttermilk are fine.

      The first addition of milk is beaten in.  The final batter is shown, the apples added and mixed in.

      Step 9. Beat the milk in on low. The batter will be loose. Step 10. Continue alternating the flour and milk, ending with the flour to form a thick batter. Step 11. Add the chopped apples. Step 12. Mix them in on low just until combined.

      The last collage includes the muffins cups filled, the sugar and butter in a bowl, then mixed and topping the muffins.

      Step 13. Spray the paper cups with a non-stick baking release. Fill the muffin cups about ¾ full. Step 14. Add the melted butter to the granulated sugar. Step 15. Toss with a fork until all of the is coated and the mixture forms crumbs. Step 16. Top the batter with the crunchy sugar mixture. Pat it down gently. Bake as directed.

      Recipe FAQS

      How to keep apples from turning brown in recipes?

      There are several ways but it doesn't matter. They'll turn brown when baked.

      What kind of apples are best for muffins?

      Apples that don't juice too much and hold their shape without getting mushy are the best. Sweet apples such as Galas, Pink Ladies, Honeycrisp and Fujis work well as well as the more tart Granny Smiths.

      What makes a muffin moist?

      Oil and buttermilk or sour cream add to keeping muffins moist.

      Expert Tips

      • Granny Smith apples are best here. They won't juice too much and their tartness will add a counterpoint to the sugar.
      • Don't worry if they turn brown as they sit. I'm always amused that people obsess over this because they will turn brown as they bake.
      • Canola oil or vegetable oil are best in this recipe.
      • I have taken to spraying the paper cups to ensure a clean release from them. It's always disappointing to put the effort into muffins or cupcakes and then have them stick in the paper cups.
      • Lacking buttermilk, you can remove one tablespoon of regular milk and replace it with vinegar. Let it sit for about 5 minutes. It will start to separate but that's fine.
      • You will need 2 medium apples for 2 chopped cups.
      Several apple muffins in  their paper cups are on a cooling  rack.

      More Amazingly Easy Recipes

      • Lightening Fast Brownies
        Quick Macadamia & White Chocolate Brownies
      • Peanut Butter Cups
        Better Than Reese's Peanut Butter Cups
      • Hello Dollie Cookies
        Hello Dolly Cookies
      A single Apple Muffin covered with a crunchy sugar topping.

      Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe is not only super easy and fast but one of the best muffins around. The key to these wonders is lots of apples and a really crunchy sugar topping that isn't exactly a crumb but a close cousin you're sure to love.
      No ratings yet
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 30 minutes mins
      Cook Time 27 minutes mins
      Total Time 57 minutes mins
      Course Apple Muffins, Easy to make, Muffins
      Cuisine American
      Servings 8 large muffins
      Calories 536 kcal

      Equipment

      • 2 6 well Jumbo muffin tins or
      • 2 12 well regular muffin tins
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Apple Muffins

      • 2 cups apples, chopped
      • 1 cup dark brown sugar (200 grams)
      • ⅔ cup oil, canola or vegetable
      • 1 large egg
      • ¾ cup buttermilk
      • 2 ½ cups all-purpose flour (350 grams)
      • 2 teaspoons cinnamon
      • 1 teaspoon baking powder
      • 1 teaspoon baking soda
      • ½ teaspoon salt

      Crunchy Sugar Topping

      • ¾ cup granulated sugar (150 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (58 grams)

      Instructions
       

      Apple Muffins

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line 9 jumbo muffin cups or 16 regular size muffin cups with paper liners. Spray the liners. Set aside.
      • Peel and core the apples. Cut in large chunks and put int he bowl of a processor. Process several times to chop the apples, but keep them in larger pieces. Set aside.
      • Combine the brown sugar, vegetable oil and egg in the bowl of a mixer. Beat to mix completely.
      • Whisk together the flour, cinnamon, baking soda, baking powder and salt. Add it alternately with the buttermilk. 3 additions of flour and 2 of buttermilk are fine. The batter will be very thick.
      • Add the chopped apples and mix in on low just to combine.
      • Fill the muffin cups ¾ full. For the jumbo muffins a #8 disher/scooper works well.

      Crunchy Sugar Topping

      • Pour the melted butter over the sugar and mix with a fork making sure all of the sugar is coated.
      • Add the topping to the muffins filling the cups.
      • Bale for 25 to 28 minutes until a tester comes out clean.
      • Cool the muffins in their pans for about 10 minutes, then remove them to a cooling rack carefully without turning them upside down.
      • The muffins can be stored covered for several days or wrapped well and frozen for a couple of months. Thaw at room temperature.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      _____________________________________________________
      Granny Smith apples are best here. They won't juice too much and their tartness will add a counterpoint to the sugar.
      Don't worry if they turn brown as they sit. I'm always amused that people obsess over this because they will turn brown as they bake.
      Canola oil or vegetable oil are best in this recipe.
      I have taken to spraying the paper cups to ensure a clean release from them. It's always disappointing to put the effort into muffins or cupcakes and then have them stick in the paper cups. 
      Lacking buttermilk, you can remove one tablespoon of regular milk and replace it with vinegar. Let it sit for about 5 minutes. It will start to separate but that's fine. 
      About 2 medium apples are needed to make the 2 cups. 
      For more tips on using the food processor see my post Food Processor Tips When Baking.
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 8muffinsCalories: 536kcalCarbohydrates: 80gProtein: 5gFat: 23gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 6gMonounsaturated Fat: 13gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 31mgSodium: 353mgPotassium: 124mgFiber: 2gSugar: 49gVitamin A: 140IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 70mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Italian Neapolitan Cookies

      Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Dec 3, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

      The featured picture shows a two rows on the diagonal of the Neapolitan cookies cut in bars some in the background cut in half and a cup of tea on the side.

      These spectacular Neapolitan Cookies come to us from Italy where they represent the color of the Italian flag and are guaranteed to be eaten first on a cookie tray . Also known as Rainbow Cookies here, they look complicated but are, in fact, really easy to make. A single almond paste dough is divided into three bowls and colored red and green with the last bowl left plain. Cementing the layers together are two different jams.

      The featured picture shows a two rows on the diagonal of the Neapolitan cookies cut in bars some in the background cut in half and a cup of tea on the side.

      These cookies just get better while the sit. The jam, almond paste, and rum wash mellow out so one fantastic flavor graces your palate.

      Other European cookies you might enjoy include: Viennese Whirl Cookies, Serbian Walnut Cookies, Pryaniki - Russian Honey Spice Cookies, French Butter Cookies - Petit Beurre, French Macarons with Chocolate Raspberry Filling, and the fantastic German cookie, Murbteig. If you enjoy festive and colorful cookies, you'll love these Irresistible White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies!

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why these cookies are special

      Enhancing the cookie with a rum wash serves two purposes. It adds a depth of flavor to the cookie and secondly, it ensures it will remain moist. By combining the ingredients and bringing them to a boil, the alcohol dissipates leaving only the taste of rum behind.

      Besides the wash, which isn't in the original recipe I changed one other important item. Every recipe I have seen finishes the top of these cookies, by simply melting chocolate and spreading on. There's a couple of problems with this.

      The chocolate will set up for sure but in most cases it will shatter when you cut them - not a pretty look. It will also quickly get streaked because it isn't tempered.

      To overcome this, I have added a deeply chocolate thin frosting to the top that drys well, won't crack, looks better, is easier to put on and most importantly it tastes better.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Tri Colored Cake

      Ingredients for the Neapolitan Cookies include almond paste, granulated sugar, butter, eggs, almond extract, all-purpose flour, baking powder, salt, red and green food coloring.

      FRONT ROW: Red and Green Gel coloring, baking powder, salt, almond extract

      MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, almond paste

      BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, all-purpose flour and eggs

      Rum Wash and Jams

      The rum wash collage shows water, Meyer's Dark rum, granulated sugar, raspberry and apricot jam.

      FRONT ROW: Water, Meyer's Dark Rum

      BACK ROW: Seedless red raspberry jam, granulated sugar, jam

      Chocolate Frosting

      Frosting ingredients include instant coffee, water, vanilla, cocoa, powdered sugar.

      FRONT ROW: Instant coffee,corn syrup, vanilla

      MIDDLE ROW: Water, Dutch Cocoa

      BACK ROW: Powdered sugar

      Key Ingredients

      The almond paste can be purchased or home made. See my post on How To Make Almond Paste - or Not. It's super simple, works well here and is less expensive than bought.

      Gell Food Coloring is important because the colors are stronger. Additionally, less is needed than liquid which can add liquid to the item. Be sure to get a strong color in the raw batter as it can fade somewhat when baking. I used Betty Crocker Gel Colors that are easily obtainable at grocery stores.

      The Red Raspberry Jam should be seedless. Just stir it vigorously to loosen it up so it spreads easily.

      I've never seen Apricot Jam only Apricot Preserves. The difference between jams and preserves is that jams are smooth with no pieces of fruit in them. Preserves on the other hand do include fruit pieces. To get them perfectly smooth, I run them through my food processor.

      Meyer's Dark Rum is my favorite and the one I use. It imparts a deep flavor the lighter ones don't. It is made non-alcoholic by boiling it with the other ingredients. The alcohol evaporates and only the flavor is left. Small airline or individual serving bottles can be purchased which is exactly enough for the recipe.

      Dutch Cocoa that is 24 to 25% is the best choice here for a darker, deeper, richer looking taste and finish although natural cocoa can also be used.

      The slight amount of Corn syrup insures a shine to the finish frosting.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Tri Colored Cake

      The first collage for the Neapolitan Cookies shows almond paste, in a processor with sugar, processed until fine and the almond paste and sugar in the mixer bowl with butter.

      Step 1. On the left is the purchased almond paste, on the right the one on my post, How to make Almond Paste - or Not. Both are fine in this recipe. Step 2. Place the sugar and almond paste, cut in pieces, in the food processor, Step 3. Process until the mixture is very fine. Step 4. Place the almond/sugar mixture in a mixing bowl with the 3 sticks of softened butter. For the importance of how much to soften the butter, please see my post on Softened Butter.

      This collages shows the creamed butter and sugar misture, the eggs added, the batter curdled and the flour being sifted.

      Step 5. Beat the almond/sugar/butter mixture until very light. Step 6. Add the eggs and almond extract. Step 7. Beat until fluffy. It may curdle and that's fine. Step 8. Sift the flour, salt and baking soda together.

      This collages shows ⅓ of the flour going into the mixing bowl, mixed, the finished batter and the 3 bowls of red, green and white batter.

      Step 9. Mix in ⅓ of the flour mixture at a time. Step 10. The first third of the flour is in. Add the remaining two, one at a time. Step 11. All of the flour has been added. Step 12. Divide the batter into 3, about 500 grams each and color one red, one green and leave one plain.

      Step 13. Spread each of the batters in a separate 9x13 pan. Step 14. When ready to assemble the Neapolitans, combine the rum wash ingredients in a small pan and bring to a boil. Boil for 2 minutes. There should be 1 cup of liquid. If there isn't, add water to make up the difference. Step 15. After the layers have been baked and cooled, turn the green one upside down on a cake board. Step 16. Spread the seedless raspberry jam evenly over the layer.

      This collages shows the plainlayer on top of the raspberry jam, it is spread with the apricot jam, the red layer is on top and the three layers are wrapped in film.

      Step 17. Place the plain layer on top of the raspberry jam. Step 18. Spread the apricot preserves, which have been processed to smooth them out, on top of the cake. Step 19. Place the red layer on top of the preserves. Step 20. Cover the top and sides with plastic wrap.

      This collages shows 10 pounds of flour on top of the layers to cement them together, the powdered sugar and cocoa sifted together, whisked, and the liquid for the frosting in a measuring cup.

      Step 21. Place a pan or tray on top of the cookies, preferably the same size. Place a 10 pound bag of flour in the tray. Two 4 pound bags work well also. Refrigerate overnight to cement the layers together. 22. Sift the flour and cocoa together in a medium size bowl. Step 23. Make sure they are mixed well. Step 24. Place the water in a measuring cup or bowl. Dissolve the coffee in the water. Add the remaining liquid ingredients and mix well so the corn syrup doesn't sink to the bottom. Remove the layers from the fridge take off the flour, pan and plastic wrap. Pour the liquid over the powdered sugar/cocoa and stir well with a spoon until smooth and completely combined. If it is too runny, sift in a bit more powder sugar to stiffen it up just a bit. You want it to flow. If it is too tight, add water a teaspoon or so at a time.

      The last collages shows the frosting in the middle of layers, dripping down the sides, the layers trimmed and then cut into cookies.

      Step 25. Pour the frosting in the middle of the cake layer. Step 26. Spread it evenly over the layer allowing it to run down the sides as necessary. Let the frosting set up at room temperature. This may take several hours. Step 27. Trim the edges. I usually end up with 8" by 11". Step 28. Measure the long and short side of the layers. If you have the same measurements I have cut the short side into 8 even pieces of 1" each. Cut the long side into 4 pieces of 2 ¾" each yielding 32 bars or 64 smaller cookies.

      This photo shows a plate of the cookies cut into bars with smaller ones in the background along with a cup of tea.

      Recipe FAQS

      Why are there 2 spellings for the name of the cookie?

      The Italian cookie is spelled with an "a" - Neapolitan. The 3 flavored ice cream is spelled with an "o" - Neopolitan. They are not interchangeable.

      Can the colors be change?

      Yes, but it can't be called a Neapolitan then. The Italian Neapolitan cookie colors are the colors of the Italian flag.

      Do these cookie have to contain almond paste?

      Yes, that is the defining taste of the cookie. It is also and important ingredient in the dense almond flavored cake.

      Expert Tips

      • The baked dough is dense and rises to about ½".
      • Make sure to use gel colors to color the dough as the colors are more intense and gels do not add liquid to a dough.
      • Color the doughs brighter than you want them as they often fade slightly when baking.
      • These cookies stay moist and taste better the day or so after making.
      • Stir the powdered sugar/cocoa and liquid ingredients together to avoid air bubbles. If it is too thick, thin with a bit of water, if too thin, sift in a bit of powdered sugar. It should flow over the sides when covering the top.
      • Pour the boiled ingredients for the rum wash into a 1 cup measure so it will be easy to use ⅓ at a time.
      • Don't skip the weighting down of the layers. It important as the jams cement everything together so the cookies don't separate.
      • Process the apricot preserves to smooth them out. There shouldn't be any pieces of fruit when spreading out. It needs to be smooth.

      More European Pastries to Consider

      • A slice of the Orange Almond Tea Cake sits on a white plate with 2 strawberries and the rest of the cut cake is behind it.
        Orange Almond Tea Cake
      • A rich yeast dough is filled three ways one each with almond, poppyseed and walnuts
        European Nut Roll with Three Fillings
      • Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries
        Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries
      • Mincemeat Tartlets
        Mincemeat Tarts

      If you love these Neapolitan Cookes, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

      The featured picture shows a two rows on the diagonal of the Neapolitan cookies cut in bars some in the background cut in half and a cup of tea on the side.

      Italian Neapolitan Cookies

      Helen S. Fletcher
      These spectacular Neapolitan Cookies and will they might look complicated they are actually really easy to make. A single almond paste dough is divided into three bowls and colored red and green with the last bowl left plain. Cementing the layers together are two different jams.
      No ratings yet
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
      Course Cookies
      Cuisine Italian
      Servings 32 servings
      Calories 252 kcal

      Equipment

      • 3 9x13" pans (quarter sheet pans)
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Tri Colored Cookie Batter

      • 1 ¼ cups granulated sugar (250 grams)
      • 10 ounces almond paste (280 grams)
      • 1 ½ cups unsalted butter, softened (340 grams)
      • 6 large eggs
      • 1 tablespoons almond extract
      • 2 ½ cups all-purpose flour (350 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon baking soda
      • ½ teaspoon salt
      • Red Gel Food Coloring
      • Green Gel Food Coloring

      Rum Soaking Syrup

      • ½ cup water
      • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
      • ¼ cup dark rum

      Assembly

      • ½ cup seedless red raspberry jam
      • ½ cup apricot preserves

      Chocolate Frosting

      • ⅓ cup water
      • 1 tablespoons corn syrup
      • ½ teaspoon instant coffee
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla
      • 1 ½ cup powdered sugar (200 grams)
      • ½ cup cocoa, Dutch preferred (45 grams)

      Instructions
       

      Tri Colored Cookie Batter

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line 3 9x12 baking pans (quarter sheet pans) with parchment paper. Set aside.
      • Place the sugar in the bowl of a food processor. Cut or tear the almond paste into pieces and add to the processor. Process until the mixture looks like sand.
      • Remove the mixture to a mixing bowl and add the softened butter. Beat until very light.
      • Add the eggs and almond extract and beat until fluffy, scraping several times.
      • In the meantime, whisk together the flour, baking powder, and salt. Set the mixer to low and add the flour mixture to the butter ⅓ at a time, mixing just to combine. The batter will be very thick.
      • Divide the batter into 3 bowls of about 500 grams each. Color one bowl green, one red and leave the third bowl plain.
      • Spread each bowl evenly in one of the three parchment lined baking sheets.
      • Bake for 12 to 14 minutes. They will be barely browned ad a tester will come out clean. Do over bake. The layers will be about ½" each thick and dense.
      • Cool each pan completely.

      Rum Soaking Wash

      • Combine all the ingredients in a small pan. Bring to a boil. Boil for 2 minutes. Place in a 1 cup measure. If it doesn't measure 1 cup, add water. Cool completely.

      Assembly

      • Place the apricot preserves in the bowl of a processor and process until smooth. Set aside.
      • Place the green layer on a quarter sheet cake board upside down. Brush with ⅓ cup of the rum wash.
      • Spread the raspberry jam evenly over the layer.
      • Top with the plain layer, spread with another ⅓ cup of the rum wash, and spread with the apricot preserves.
      • Place the red layer on top and brush with the last ⅓ cup of the rum wash. Wrap the layers in plastic wrap.
      • Place a clean 9x13 or quarter sheet pan on top of the red layer. Place a 10 pound bag of flour in the pan and refrigerate overnight. Two 4 pound bags of flour will work also.

      Chocolate Frosting

      • Sift the powdered sugar and cocoa together. Stir together completely.
      • Dissolve the coffee in the water. Add the corn syrup and vanilla, stirring well to incorporate the corn syrup.
      • Add it to the powdered sugar/ cocoa mix. Stir with a spoon until completely combined. Do not be too vigorous with stirring to prevent air bubbles.
      • If the frosting is too loose or runny, sift in a bit more powdered sugar. If it is too thick, add water a teaspoon or so at a time. It should barely run down the sides when applied.
      • Spread it evenly over the top layer. It should run down the sides as seen in the photo. Let it sit at room temperature for several hours to set up.

      Cutting the Cookies

      • Trim the sides of the cookies. Measure the short long side. Mine were 8"x11" If yours are the same cut 8 1" srips across the short side and 4 2 ¾" down the long side to make 32 bars. These may be cut in half again to make 64 smaller cookies.
      • Store the cookies in a single layer to prevent marring the finish. They get better as they sit. The cookies will hold for 7 or more days if covered.
      • To make ahead, assemble through layering and weighing down the layers. Do not add the frosting. Wrap well and freeze for a couple of months after they have been weighted down. Thaw in refrigerator if possible. Finish as above.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      _________________________________________________
      The baked dough is dense and rises to about ½".
      Make sure to use gel colors to color the dough as the colors are more intense and gels do not add liquid to a dough.
      Color the doughs brighter than you want them as they often fade slightly when baking. 
      These cookies stay moist and taste better the day or so after making.
      Stir the powdered sugar/cocoa and liquid ingredients together to avoid air bubbles. If it is too thick, thin with a bit of water, if too thin, sift in a bit of powdered sugar. It should flow over the sides when covering the top. 
      Pour the boiled ingredients for the rum wash into a 1 cup measure so it will be easy to use ⅓ at a time. 
      Don't skip the weighting down of the layers. It important as the jams cement everything together so the cookies don't separate.
      Process the apricot preserves to smooth them out. There shouldn't be any pieces of fruit when spreading out. It needs to be smooth.
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 32barsCalories: 252kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 3gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 58mgSodium: 91mgPotassium: 79mgFiber: 1gSugar: 25gVitamin A: 324IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 28mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Orange Macadamia Rolls Recipe

      Modified: Jan 7, 2026 · Published: Nov 25, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 14 Comments

      An Orange Macadamia Roll sits on a white plate with a rack of other rolls behind it and a saucer to a coffee cup to the right.

      This Orange Macadamia Rolls Recipe is not to be missed. A tender sour cream yeast dough encloses an orange macadamia filling that's finished with a coffee glaze. The amazing yeast dough goes together quickly and is one of the easiest I've every made. It's basically two steps - mix the liquids and yeast, then add the flour, mix and set it to rise. I can't imagine an easier yeast dough to make. So if you're new or apprehensive about working with yeast, this is the reciope for you

      An Orange Macadamia Roll sits on a white plate with a rack of other rolls behind it and a saucer to a coffee cup to the right.

      Adding to its allure is the fact that it rolls out with no spring back or coaxing into the size you want. Just roll, fill and shape. This dough can be used wherever a sweet dough is used. I'm betting it will become a favorite!

      Be sure to check out the German Chocolate Sweet Rolls, Gibassier - A French Breakfast Treat, and the Swedish Cardamom Sweet Rolls.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      This Orange Macadamia Rolls Recipe:

      • Is The easiest yeast dough you'll ever work with.
      • After it's made, it can be refrigerated for up to 3 days before shaping and baking.
      • The rolls themselves are an indulgent treat that's perfect with morning coffee or tea.
      • Can be frozen without the glaze for several months.
      • Is perfect for anyone intimidated by yeast.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Yeast Dough

      The ingredients for the Orange Macadamia Rolls Recipe dough recipe include instant yeast, milk, sugar, salt, eggs, sour cream, unsalted butter and bread flour.

      FRONT ROW: Salt, milk, instant yeast

      MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, granulated sugar

      BACK ROW: Sour cream, bread flour, eggs

      Orange Macadamia Filling

      The filling ingredients are, toasted madacamia nuts, sugar, orange rind cocoa and unsalted butter.

      FRONT ROW: Orange zest, cocoa, unsalted butter

      BACK ROW: Toasted macadamia nuts, granulated sugar

      Coffee Glaze

      Ingredients for the Coffee Glaze include water, instant coffee, corn syryp, powdered sugar, macadamia nuts.

      FRONT ROW: Water, instant coffee, corn syrup, milk

      BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, macadamia nuts

      Key Ingredients

      • The sour cream and milk tenderize the dough making it soft. The milk should be warmed.
      • Bread flour is a stronger flour that is particularly good when using yeast. It provides a higher rise than all-purpose flour.
      • Instant yeast is a faster acting yeast than active dry yeast. If using the latter, the dough will take a bit longer to rise.
      • Macadamia nuts come to us from Hawaii and are a softer, creamier nut. Almonds are a good substitute if one is needed. Be sure to toast either one for maximum flavor.
      • Navel oranges are better for zesting. Juice oranges don't yield as much. I prefer a microplaner to zest the orange. A box grater doesn't yield as much and the zest is usually wetter.
      • Either Dutch or Natural Cocoa can be used. It is just for color and won't be tasted. Darkening the filling makes for a better looking roll.
      • Using milk instead of water in the glaze makes a shinier, prettier finish. Water dries duller.
      • Powdered sugar dissolves instantly with the milk.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Yeast Dough

      This first collages shows the liquid ingredients and salt and yeast in a bowl, whisked together, flour added and the finished dough.

      Step 1. Combine the warmed milk, granulated sugar, eggs, sour cream, 6 tablespoons melted butter, salt and the yeast in a mixing bowl. Step 2. Whisk them together. Step 3. Add all of the bread flour. Step 4. Fit the mixer with a dough hook if available and beat on low until until it comes together. Continue to beat the dough for 4 minutes.

      Orange Macadamia Filling

      This collage shows the dough in a rising container, the macadamaia nuts, sugar and cocoa in a processor bowl, processed and the orange added.

      Step 5. Place the finished dough in a container sprayed with a non-stick baking release. Cover the top of the dough with plastic wrap, place the lid on or cover with a tea towel, mark the time on it and let it rise until doubled in bulk. Step 6. Place the toasted macadamia nuts, sugar and cocoa in the bowl of a processor. Step 7. Process until the nuts are coarsely chopped. (I over processed and thought they were too small in the finished rolls). Step 8. Briefly pulse in the orange zest.

      Assembly

      Before rolling out the dough, use the technique in Chopping Nuts - An Easier Way to do this easily with the macadamias.

      In this collage you see the risen dough, the dough rolled out, buttered, and the filling spread on.

      Step 9. After the dough has risen. Step 10. Roll the dough as called for in the recipe. Step 11. Brush with the 2 tablespoons melted butter for the filling. Step 12. Spread the filling evenly over the dough to within ½" of the end. Place a piece of waxed paper over the filling and lightly roll it in.

      The first photo in this collage shows the dough rolled up, the seam pinched together, the seam pinched together and  the a piece cut in fourths.

      Step 13. Roll the dough up tightly. Step 14. Wet the edge of the dough and pinch the seam together. Step 15. Roll the dough over and roll it back and forth a couple of times to seal the seam. Mark the dough every 1 ¾". Step 16. Slice the dough into 8 portions. Turn one portion face up so the filling shows. Cut it into 4 pieces.

      This collage shows the rolls turned, cut in half again, the rolls in the muffin pans and then risen.

      Step 17. Holding each side of the cut dough above in your right and left hand, turn it down onto the work surface so the side of the dough is now on top. Step 18. Cut each half in two again, making 8 slices. Step 19. Place the pieces of dough randomly in the paper cups of a jumbo muffin pan. Press the rolls down in the cups. Repeat with the remaining 7 slices. Step 20. Place the rolls in a warm place and let them rise until they fill the cups. If you need a warm place to let them rise, turn the light on in your oven and place the rolls, covered, in. Use a thermometer and temp the oven from time to time to make sure it doesn't go above 85 to 90 degrees. if it does, use a wooden spoon to keep the door slightly ajar. They should take about 2 hours to rise.

      Glazing the Rolls

      Powdered sugar glazes can be iffy. They can be dull, somewhat shiny or one ingredient can make them really stand out. Add water to the powdered sugar gives a dull glaze when dried and isn't particularly attractive. Adding milk or cream makes a somewhat shiny glaze. But if you want a glaze that is really shiny and stays that way a bit of corn syrup is the answer. The glaze will dry fairly hard on top, but stay soft underneath. It really makes a difference.

      The last collage shows the baked Orange Macadamia Rolls baked, the coffee disolved in the water, added to the powdered sugar and the glaze mixed.

      Step 21. The baked rolls from the oven. Step 21. Dissolve the coffee in the water. Step 23. Whisk the coffee, corn syrup and milk together. Pour it into the powdered sugar and stir together until smooth. Don't be too vigorous or you will have a lot of air bubbles. Step 24. Spoon it over the rolls. Sprinkle heavily with the cut macadamias. See the photo below.

      Recipe FAQS

      Why are they called sweet rolls?

      When compared to regular bread dough, sweet roll dough usually has higher levels of sugar, fat, eggs, and yeast. Sweet rolls also usually have a filling inside that can include sugar, nuts, spices and are glazed on top,

      What are some examples of sweet rolls?

      The most common ones are Cinnamon rolls and Pecan sticky buns. The cinnamon rolls are finished with a powdered sugar glaze and the pecan sticky rolls are released and kept upside down exposing the pecan glaze.

      What are the two types of yeast dough called?

      Lean and rich. Lean doughs are made of few ingredients with no or little sugar. Rich doughs have butter, sugar, as well as spices and are often filled.

      Expert Tips

      • For the best flavor, toast the nuts. They will have a deeper flavor and add more to the filling.
      • Navel oranges yield the most zest and it is dryer when using a microplane to zest them than a box grater.
      • The cocoa is only used to color the filling so it shows up. It doesn't impart a flavor.
      • Almonds can be subbed for the macadamias if needed. Be sure to toast them first.
      • To make sure the filling adheres to the dough, place wax paper on top of it after it has been distributed over the dough and roll over the paper with a rolling pin.
      • The unassembled dough can be held in the fridge for up to 3 days.
      • The assembled rolls can be held in the fridge ovenight. They will take longer to rise because they are cold.
      • Chop the macadamias easily using the Use the technique in Chopping Nuts - An Easier Way to do this easily with the macadamias.
      This photos shows the rolls on a cooling rack having had the coffee glaze spoon over them and topped with chopped macadamia nuts.

      More sweet rolls and breads to tempt you

      • A rich yeast dough is filled three ways one each with almond, poppyseed and walnuts
        European Nut Roll with Three Fillings
      • A Swedish Cardamom Knot sits on a blue and white plate
        Swedish Cardamom Yeast Rolls
      • Rum Raisin Rolls on a plate with a cup of tea and an iced roll in the background
        Rum Raisin Rolls - A Long Ago Memory
      • Five Mexican sweet rolls, Conchas with different toppings.
        Conchas - A Mexican Sweet Bread

      If you love these Orange Macadamia Rolls, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

      An Orange Macadamia Roll sits on a white plate with a rack of other rolls behind it and a saucer to a coffee cup to the right.

      Orange Macadamia Rolls Recipe

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This Orange Macadamia Rolls Recipe is not to be missed. A tender sour cream yeast dough encloses an orange macadamia filling that's finished with a coffee glaze. The amazing yeast dough goes together quickly and is one of the easiest I've every made.
      5 from 1 vote
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 45 minutes mins
      Cook Time 20 minutes mins
      Rising times 2 hours hrs 40 minutes mins
      Total Time 3 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
      Course Sweet Rolls
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 rolls
      Calories 435 kcal

      Equipment

      • 2 6 well jumbo muffins tins
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Macadamia Orange Roll Dough

      • ½ cup sour cream (114 grams)
      • 2 large eggs
      • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (90 grams)
      • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
      • ¼ cup milk, warm - whole or 2%
      • ½ teaspoon salt
      • 2 ½ teaspoons instant yeast
      • 2 ½ cups bread flour (350 grams)

      Macadamia Orange Filling

      • 1 cup macadamia nuts (120 grams)
      • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon cocoa, Dutch or natural
      • 2 tablespoons orange zest (about 2 navel oranges)

      Assembly

      • 2 tablespoons butter, melted (30 grams)

      Coffee Glaze

      • ½ cup cup macadamia nuts, chopped (60 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon water
      • 1 teaspoon instant coffee
      • 1 teaspoon corn syrup, optional
      • 2 tablespoons milk
      • 1 ½ cups powdered sugar (200 grams)

      Instructions
       

      Macadamia Orange Rolls

      • Whisk together everything but the flour in the bowl of a mixer.
      • Fit the mixer with a dough hook if available. Add all the flour at once and beat on low until it comes together. Beat for 4 minutes to develop the gluten.
      • Spray a storage container at least three times as big as the dough with a non-stick baking spray and transfer the dough to the container. Cover the top of the dough with plastic wrap, put a lid on the container or cover with a towel. Mark the time on it. Let rise until doubled.
      • If the room is cool, a proofer may be made by turning the light on in the oven. Place the dough in the oven. Monitor the temperature of the oven after about an hour. It shouldn't get above 78F. If it gets too warm, prop the door open with a wooden spoon.
      • The dough may be used immediately or refrigerated up to 3 days.

      Orange Macadamia Filling

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Place the macadamia nuts on a tray in a single layer and toast for about 8 to 12 minutes or until medium brown. Cool completely.
      • Zest the oranges and set aside.
      • Place the sugar and cocoa in a processor. Pulse several times to mix.
      • Add the nuts and pulse to coarsely chop.
      • Add the orange rind and pulse very briefly to mix in. Do not let the nuts get too small.

      Assembly

      • Roll the dough into a 14" x 13" rectangle.
      • Brush with the melted butter.
      • Spread the orange macadamia mixture evenly over the dough leaving ½" without filling at the end of the 14" side.
      • Starting from the 14" side, roll the dough tightly as if a jelly roll. Wet the end of the dough without any filling and pinch the seam together.
      • Place in the freezer to chill for about 30 minutes until cold throughout but not frozen. This will make it much easier to cut.
      • In the meantime, line 8 wells (from the 2 jumbo muffin pans) with paper liners. Lightly spray the liners with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
      • Remove the roll from the freezer and mark every 1 ¾". There should be 8 rolls. Cut into 8 slices.
      • Lay one slice down so the filling is facing you. Cut it in 4 pieces.
      • Holding each side of the cut dough above in your right and left hand, turn it down onto the work surface so the side of the dough is now on top. Cut each piece in two again. See steps 17 and 18 in the step by step instructions if this is not clear.
      • Randomly fill each of the paper liners with one of the cut rolls. Press the dough lightly into the cup. Repeat with the other 7 rolls.
      • Cover with a tea towel and let them rise for about 2 to 2 ½ hours or until they just come to the top of the cups. The oven proofer described above can be used here also.
      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Bake for 20 to 23 minutes until browned and a tester comes out clean.
      • Cool completely, remove the papers and glaze. The rolls can be frozen at this point by individually wrapping them in foil and freezing for a couple of months. To finish, leave them in the foil, opening the top slightly. Bring to room temperature. Refresh them by warming in a 350° oven for about 10 minutes. Remove the foil. Cool, glaze and top with the chopped macadamia nuts.

      Glazing

      • Toast the nuts as above. Cool completely and coarsely chop. See the post Chopping Nuts - An Easier Way.
      • Mix the water and coffee together. Add the corn syrup and milk and stir all together.
      • Add to the powder sugar. Stir to make a smooth, lump free glaze. Do not be too vigorous with the stirring or there will be a lot of air bubbles.
      • Spoon over one roll. If it is too thin and the glaze runs off too much, add a bit of powdered sugar to tighten it. If too thick, add a few drops of water to loosen it. Spoon glaze over one roll at a time and immediately sprinkle with the chopped nuts. Let the glaze set up.
      • All yeast doughs are best served the same day. However, they may be kept under a cake dome for a day or so.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ______________________________________________________
      For the best flavor, toast the nuts. They will have a deeper flavor and add more to the filling.
      Navel oranges yield the most zest and using a microplaner rather than a box grater yields a dryer zest.  
      The cocoa is only used to color the filling so it shows up. It doesn't impart a flavor so either Dutch or natural can be used.
      Almonds can be subbed for the macadamias if needed. Be sure to toast them first. 
      The unassembled dough can be held in the fridge for up to 3 days. 
      The baked rolls, without the glaze and wrapped individually in foil, can be frozen for several months. To finish, leave them in the foil, opening the top slightly. Bring to room temperature. Refresh them by warming in a 350° oven for about 10 minutes. Remove the foil.  Cool, glaze and top with the chopped macadamia nuts.
      Chop the macadamias easily using the Use the technique in Chopping Nuts - An Easier Way to do this easily with the macadamias.
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 8rollsCalories: 435kcalCarbohydrates: 52gProtein: 7gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 13gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 58mgSodium: 134mgPotassium: 156mgFiber: 3gSugar: 29gVitamin A: 355IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 47mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Cranberry Muffins Recipe

      Modified: Aug 25, 2025 · Published: Nov 18, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 9 Comments

      This photo shows an open cranberry vanilla muffin sitting on top of more muffins.

      This Cranberry Muffins Recipe is quick to make, celebrates the season with their vibrant color and tart taste. While thought of mostly in the fall and around Thanksgiving, this fruit can be used in its frozen form to great advantage as in this recipe.

      A borken open Cranberry Vanilla Muffins sits on tp of whole muffins in their  papers.

      Frozen cranberries are used in this recipe to keep them from coloring the muffins gray and to keep them in large pieces. A 12 ounce bag of fresh cranberries can be frozen until hard or they can be bought frozen.

      A quick look around my blog and you'll see cranberry recipes abound. From cranberry curd in the Chocolate Cranberry Curd Tart, to Chocolate Cranberry Quick Bread, the not to be missed Cranberry Fresh Pineapple Relish, the refreshingly light Orange Cranberry Cake, as well as the frozen Riene de Saba Cake with Candied Cranberries, Cranberry Orange Muffins as well as Crunchy Topped Apple Muffins and the Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins.

      And if you are looking for more holiday breakfast inspiration, check out Recipes for a Stress-Free Thanksgiving Morning.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      A Little About Cranberries

      Cranberries are older than the recorded history of America. Indians ate them as well as using them for medicine and clothing dye.

      While they are often seen in water, they do not grow in water. They grow very close to the ground which needs to be sandy, acidic soil with a high water table which is called a bog. Cranberries are harvested by flooding the bogs, where the berries are separated from the vines and float to the top of the water. Pumps and conveyors send the berries into trucks to be transported for processing.

      In 1917, Elizabeth Lee, a cranberry farmer sold her canned sauce under the name "Bog Sweet." Later, she joined forces with Marcus Urann of Massachusetts who had started his company in 1912. Together they formed the company that became known as Ocean Spray. Today this is the largest cranberry growers organization in the United States.

      There are several interesting articles on cranberries including, The Cranberry Story , Cranberry Facts, and Where Tradition Meets Innovation,

      Recipe Ingredients

      Topping

      Nutmeg and vanilla make up the topping for the muffins.

      Nutmeg, granulated sugar

      Cranberry Muffins

      The ingredients for the Cranberry Vanilla Muffins are cranberries, granulated sugar, unsalted butter, eggs, all-purpose flour, baking powder,salt, milk and vanilla paste.

      FRONT ROW: Salt, baking powder, vanilla paste

      MIDDLE ROW: Eggs, butter, granulted sugar

      BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, frozen cranberries, milk

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      The first collages  hows the nutmeg and sugar, the sugar and butter in a mixing bowl then creamed and the vanilla paste added and all of that is mixed.

      Step 1. Combine the sugar and nutmeg. Set aside. Step 2. Place the softened butter and sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Cream them until light. Step 3. Add the vanilla paste. Step 4. Beat together until completely mixed.

      The second collages shows the eggs added to the mixing bowl, mixed, flour added and the resulting batter.

      Step 5. Add the eggs to the batter. Step 6. Beat until combined on medium speed. If the mixture curdles, which is might, raise the speed to high and beat until mixed. If is remains curdled, don't worry about it. It will be corrected in the next step. See my article How to Avoid Curdled Cake Batter for more information. Step 7. Add the first of the alternating flour and milk.I ususally add 3 portions of flour to 2 portions of milk. Always start and end with flour to prevent curdling. Step 8. Beat on low to mix.

      This collages shows the milk being added, the finished batte, the frozen cranberries in the processor and then processed.

      Step 9. Add the first of the alternating milk. Beat on low to mix. Step 10. Continue with two more portions of flour to one more of milk. Step 11. Put the frozen berries in the processor bowl. Step 12. Use long pulses to coarsely chop them. They will make a terrible racket.

      The last collage shows the chopped berries in the batter, mixed in, portioned into paper lined muffin cups, and cooking on a cooling rack.

      Step13. Pour the chopped cranberries into the batter. Step 14. Mix on low, scraping well to distribute the cranberries. Step 15. Fill the paper muffin liners almost to the top. Sprinkle heavily with the nutmeg sugar. Step 16. Bake as directed, cool on a cooling rack.

      Recipe FAQS

      Where do cranberries grow?

      A common misunderstanding is that cranberries grown in water. They do not. They grow on vines close to the ground in sandy, acidic soil that has a high water table known as a bog. When it is time to harvest them, the bog is flooded, the berries are freed from their vines and float to the top of the water where they are gathered and taken away for production.

      Are cranberries considered healthy?

      Yes. They are high in antioxidents and lower risk of urinary tract infection (UTI), the prevention of certain types of cancer, improved immune function, and decreased blood pressure.

      What do you cook or bake with cranberries?

      Cranberries are used for relishes, chutneys, sauces in quick breads, preserves, stuffings, in salads, stuffings with pork and chicken, cranberry crisps, muffins, cakes, drinks, cheesecakes, pies, tarts, bars, cookies, coffeecakes and more.

      Expert Tips

      • The softened butter should be about 75°F to blend well with the sugar.
      • The cranberries need to be frozen hard before processing.  Use immediately, do not let them thaw. 
      • The batter will be very cold and firm.  When filling the cups, press the batter down into them to make sure they are filled well.  Fill almost to the top.
      • Bake them immediately so the cranberries do not start to melt.
      A basket of muffins.

      More Delectable Cranberry Recipes

      • Several slices of Chocolate Cranberry Bread sists on a cream colored plate surrounded by Muffins, cranberries, a teal colored napkin, cup and saucer and a miniature pumpkin gourd.
        Chocolate Cranberry Quick Bread Recipe
      • Squares of Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake with cranberries and cinnamon sticks
        Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake
      • Cranberry Orange Muffins in three sizes, mini, regular and Texas on a gray plate with a red napkin.
        A Cranberry Orange Muffin
      • Cranberry Linzer Tart
        Make Ahead Cranberry Linzer Tart

      If you love these Cranberry Muffins, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

      This photo shows an open cranberry vanilla muffin sitting on top of more muffins.

      Cranberry Muffins Recipe

      Helen S. Fletcher
      These Cranberry Muffins are a quickly made treat for anytime of the day. Tart and vibrantly red cranberris give a boost of flavor to this tender muffin.
      4.50 from 2 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 30 minutes mins
      Cook Time 25 minutes mins
      Total Time 55 minutes mins
      Course Cranberry Muffins, Easy to make, Muffins
      Cuisine American
      Servings 16 muffins
      Calories 192 kcal

      Equipment

      • 2 12 well regular size muffin tins OR
      • 2 6 well Jumbo muffin tins
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Topping

      • 3 tablespoons granulated sugar (40 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon nutmeg

      Cranberry Muffins

      • 12 ounces cranberries, fresh or frozen
      • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
      • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened (114 grams)
      • 2 large eggs
      • 2 cups all-purpose flour (280 grams)
      • 2 teaspoons baking powder
      • ¼ teaspoon salt
      • ½ cup milk
      • 1 tablespoon vanilla paste or extract

      Instructions
       

      Topping

      • The cranberries should be picked over to remove any less than good ones. It is easiest to do this on a rimmed baking sheet so they don't roll away. Freeze the until hard.

      Cranberry Muffins

      • Preheat the oven to 375°F. Line cupcake wells with paper liners. Set aside.
      • Cream the sugar and butter together until light, scraping down as necessary.
      • Add the vanilla paste or extract, blending well.
      • Add the eggs, beating until combined. The mixture may curdle but this will be taken care of in the next step.
      • In the meantime, whisk together the flour, baking powder and salt. Add the flour and milk alternately, starting and ending with the flour. Three flour and two milk additions are fine.
      • Place the frozen cranberries in the bowl of a processor. Pulse to chop them coarsely. Add them to the batter and mix just until combined. The batter will be very firm and cold at this point.
      • Fill the paper cups almost to the top, pressing the batter down to make sure they are filled well. Sprinkle heavily with the nutmeg sugar.
      • Bake the regular size muffins for about 15 to 18 to minutes or until a tester comes out clean. Bake the Jumbo muffins for 24 to 26 minutes or until a tester comes out clean.
      • Cool about 5 minutes in the pans, then turn them out to finish cooking on a rack.
      • Yield: 15 to 16 regular size muffins or 9 to 10 Jumbo muffins.
      • Store at room temperature for up to 3 days or freeze for longer storage. Thaw at room temperature.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ____________________________________________________
      The softened butter should be about 75°F to blend well with the sugar.
      The cranberries need to be frozen hard before processing.  Use immediately, do not let them thaw. 
      The batter will be very cold and firm.  When filling the cups, press the batter down into them to make sure they are filled well.  Fill almost to the top.
      Bake them immediately so the cranberries do not start to melt.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 16muffinsCalories: 192kcalCarbohydrates: 30gProtein: 3gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 39mgSodium: 103mgPotassium: 56mgFiber: 1gSugar: 17gVitamin A: 236IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 48mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      (Almost) No Bake Pumpkin Tart

      Modified: Apr 22, 2026 · Published: Nov 11, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 8 Comments

      A slice of the pumpkin tart finished with a lattice design and whipped cream sits on a white plate with an orange and green gourd behind it as well as the pumpkin tart itself

      I don't know how to make an easier dessert than this No Bake Pumpkin Tart. It takes almost no time and can be made by seasoned bakers as well as beginning bakers with ease. If time is your problem, this is your dessert.

      A light as air intensely flavored pumpkin mousse sits in a pretzel crust which is one of the best of it's kind I have found. I know I will be using it again and probably more than once. It just has more flavor than a graham cracker crust. The saltiness of the pretzels lingers just a bit after the bite is gone. The almost refers to the crust being baked for 12 to 14 minutes.

      A slice of the pumpkin tart finished with a lattice design and whipped cream sits on a white plate with an orange and green gourd behind it as well as the pumpkin tart itself

      The tart is just sweet enough so that all of the spices and flavor come through. The pumpkin mousse is borrowed from the favorite Updated Pumpkin Mousse Torte. The light as a feather mousse is a pouf of pumpkin and spices that just float away with each bite. I can't imagine anything more perfect for the end of a traditional Thanksgiving dinner which is anything but light.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Recipe Ingredients

      Pretzel Crust

      Ingredients for the pretzel crust include, pretzels, unsalted butte, powder sugar and pecans

      FRONT ROW: Powdered sugar, pecans

      BACK ROW: Salted Waffle Pretzels, unsalted butter

      Pumpkin Tart Filling

      Ingredients for the pumpkin filling include gelatin, heafy cream, caanned pumpkin, powdered sugar, vanilla, salt, cinnamon, ginger, nutmeg and cloves.

      FRONT ROW: Nutmeg, ginger, vanilla, salt

      MIDDLE ROW: Gelatin, cinnamon, water, cloves

      BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, pumpkin puree (canned), heavy cream

      Whipped Cream Decoration

      Whipped cream and powdered sugar decorate the tart.

      Powdered sugar and heavy cream

      Key Ingredients

      The Pretzels can be a bit tricky to measure depending upon the shape of them. The volume measurement I give is for the waffle pretzels I used. This is where a scale comes in. It doesn't matter the shape and how much room they take up in a measuring cup - the weight is always the same.

      Canned Pumpkin is used but be sure not to get pumpkin pie filling. The pumpkin puree usually comes in a 15 ounce can and the pumpkin pie filling is about 30 ounces or twice as large. If you made the Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins and froze the leftover pumpkin you can use it in this recipe. It will, most likely be a bit watery but it doesn't matter. Just thaw it and bring it to room temperature. Whisk it before using.

      Always dissolve the gelatin in cold liquid - in this case water. Add the gelatin to the water and make sure to use a very small bowl as there is less than 2 tablespoons when mixed. Set aside and then microwave for about 5 seconds to liquify it.

      Heavy cream should be used. Regular whipping cream will not hold up as well. The cream should be very cold when whipped. It should be slightly firmer than the soft peak stage and just begin to hold its shape when folded together with the pumpkin mixture. For use as the decoration, it should be about a medium peak but not to the stiff peak stage.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & Instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      Pretzel Crust

      This collage for the Pretzel Crust shows the dry ingredients in the processor bowl, proxessed, the melted butter added and the finished crust.

      Step 1. Place the pretzels, pecans and powdered sugar in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Process until fine crumbs form. Step 3. Transfer the crumbs to a bowl and add the melted butter. Step 4. Toss with a fork to make sure all the crumbs are moistened and the mixture starts to form crumbs.

      The crumbs are lining the side of the tart pan, they are pressed against the sides, the remainder are poured into the bottom of the pan and pressed in flat.

      Step 5. Take the specified amount of crumbs and arrange them evenly and loosely around the edge of the pan. Step 6. Press them firmly against the rim of the pan. Step 7. Pour the remainder of the crumbs in the bottom of the pan and spread them evenly over the bottom. Step 7. Press them firmly against the bottom of the pan and firmly agains the crumbs on the rim of the pan. Bake as directed.

      Pumpkin Filling

      This collages shows the cream whipped, the pumpkin and spices in a bowl, the gelatin added and the finished filling,

      Step 9. Add the gelatin to the water and stir to completely mix. Set it aside. Whip the cream until it starts holding its shape. Set aside. Step 10. Place the remainder of the ingredients in a large bowl and whisk them together. Step 11. Heat the gelatin in a microwave for 4 to 5 seconds until liquid. Add it to the pumpkin ingredients and whisk together immediately. Step 12. Fold the cream into the pumpkin ingredients. Pour it into the baked crust and smooth the top. Refrigerate several hours or overnight before continuing.

      Releasing the Tart

      To release the tart from its shell, place is on a short can of anything, slide the rim down, place the tart on the table and slide a metal spatula between the bottom of the tart and the bottom of the tart pan, the released tart is placed on a cake board.

      Step 13. Place the tart on a short can. Step 14. Slide the rim down to the table. Step 15. Place a metal spatula between the tart and the bottom of the tart pan that is sitting on. Go around the bottom to loosen the crust. Step 16. Place the tart on a cake board or cake plate.

      Decorating the Tart

      The tart is decorated with whipped cream piped horizontally on top, the tart is turned 90° so the lines are vertical, another set of lines is piped in a lattice design and the edges are finished with a wreath of cream

      Step 17. With a small, plain tip, (I used an Ateco 801 which is about ⅛"), pipe 6 lines of cream horizontally from edge to edge. Step 18. Turn the tart 90° so the lines are now vertical. Step 19. Pipe a second set of lines diagonally across the tart forming a lattice design. Step 20. Finish the edges with a wreath of cream around the edge of the tart (I used an Ateco 825 open star which is about ⅜").

      Recipe FAQS

      What's the difference between a pumpkin pie and a pumpkin tart?

      The pumpkin pie is made in a pie pan which is slanted on the side and usually about 2" or more deep. The pumpkin tart is made in a tart pan that is usually shallow but can be deeper. Both have fluted side. The tart pans usually have removable sides.

      Is pumpkin pie filling the same as canned pumpkin?

      No. The pumpkin pie filling has ingredients added to the puree to be used by pouring into a pie shell. It generally weighs about 30 ounes. Canned pumpkin is only pumpkin puree. It usually comes in 15 ounce cans.

      Why does the color of pumpkin puree differ from can to can of the same brand?

      While pumpkin puree is specified on the label, kabocha squash, which is also known as Japanese pumpkin, is also used as it is very much like pumpkin. They are interchangeable in baking.

      Expert Tips

      • The tart can be frozen for several months, without the decoration, if kept in the tart pan and wrapped well in foil. Thaw in the refrigerator and decorate up to 1 day ahead of serving. Serve directly from the fridge.
      • Heavy cream is preferable as it needs no stabilization. At my bakery, we froze cakes finished with whipped heavy cream, as well as filled and decorated with no problem when thawed. See my post on Salvaging Over Whipped Cream, Heavy Creams The Work Horse of Creams, as well as Freezing Cream.
      • This tart uses canned pumpkin puree. There is some confusion between pumpkin puree and pumpkin pie filling. The pumpkin puree is just that and usually comes in 15 ounce cans. The pumpkin pie filling has additional ingredients so all that is need is a crust. It usually comes in 30 ounce cans. Also, if you made the Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins and froze the leftover puree you can use that. I used frozen puree. It will be a little looser but that is fine. 
      • Make sure to use a very small bowl to soften the gelatin. There will be only about 2 tablespoons.
      The bottom photo shows the pumpkin tart on a white lace plate on a blue background with gourds and the whole tart.

      More Holiday Desserts

      • Mincemeat Tartlets
        Mincemeat Tarts
      • This Riene de Saba cake features 2 layers of chocolate cake with a mousse like filling, topped with candied cranberries
        Reine de Saba Cake with Candied Cranberries
      • A slice of the Apple Crisp Cheesecake sits on a tan oplate with a fork on the plate and a napkin in the background.
        Apple Crisp Cheesecake
      • Cranapple Pie with a Pleated Crust ready to eat.
        Cranapple Pie with a Pleated Crust

      If you love this  Almost No Bake Pumpkin Tart, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

      A slice of the pumpkin tart finished with a lattice design and whipped cream sits on a white plate with an orange and green gourd behind it as well as the pumpkin tart itself

      (Almost) No Bake Pumpkin Tart

      Helen S. Fletcher
      I don't know how to make an easier dessert than this No Bake Pumpkin Tart. It takes almost no time and can be made by seasoned bakers as well as beginning bakers with ease. If time is your problem, this is your dessert.
      5 from 1 vote
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 45 minutes mins
      Total Time 45 minutes mins
      Course Tarts
      Cuisine American
      Servings 10 servings
      Calories 422 kcal

      Equipment

      • 9" tart pan with removable bottom
      • ⅛" plain piping tip
      • ⅜"open star piping tip
      • Piping bags
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Pretzel Crust

      • 3 cups salted waffle pretzels (125 grams)
      • ½ cup pecans (60 grams)
      • ¼ cup powdered sugar (35 grams)
      • ½ cup butter, melted (114 grams or 1 stick)

      Pumpkin Filling

      • 1 ½ teaspoons gelatin
      • 1 tablespoon water
      • ¾ cup heavy cream, cold
      • 1 ¾ cup canned pumpkin
      • ⅓ cup powdered sugar (45 grams)
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla
      • ½ teaspoon salt
      • ¾ teaspoon cinnamon
      • ¼ teaspoon ginger
      • ⅛ teaspoon nutmeg
      • ⅛ teaspoon cloves

      Whipped Cream Decoration

      • 1 ¼ cups heavy cream
      • ¼ cup powdered sugar (35 grams)

      Instructions
       

      Pretzel Crust

      • If using a different shape pretzel it may take more or less of them. It is best to weigh them and then it doesn't matter what shape they are. If you don't have a scale then process the pretzels until they are finely ground and measure 1 ¼ cups.
      • Spray a 9"x1" tart pan with a removable bottom. Set aside. Preheat the oven to 350°F.
      • Combine the pretzels (or pretzel crumbs), pecans and powdered sugar. Process them until they are fine crumbs. Transfer to a bowl.
      • Pour almost all of the butter in and toss with a fork until the crumbs are all coated and they begin to look like crumbs. Take a bit and press it between your fingers. If is sticks together well you don't need extra butter. Otherwise, add it to the crumbs and toss again. If in doubt, use all of the butter.
      • Press half the crumbs (about 160 grams) firmly into the sides of the tart pan. Press the remainder of the crumbs firmly into the bottom of the pan connecting with the crumbs on the side.
      • Bake the crust for 12 to 14 minutes until lightly browned and crisp when cold. Cool completely before continuing.

      Pumpkin Filling

      • Add the gelatin to the water in a very small bowl. Stir well to make sure they are completelyl mixed. Set aside.
      • Fit the mixer with the whisk attachment, add the cold cream and whisk until it begins to hold its shape. Set aside.
      • In a medium size bowl, whisk all the remaining ingredients together. Microwave the gelatin for about 5 seconds until it is liquid. Whisk it immediately into the pumpkin mixture.
      • Fold in the whipped cream. Pour into the crust. Spread it out evenly, smoothing the top. Refrigerate overnight to set up.

      Releasing the Tart

      • Place the tart on a short can. Gently pull the sides of the tart pan down. If they don't release easily, go around the edges of the pan with a hot hair blower briefly. Place the tart on the table.
      • Place a metal spatula between the bottom of the tart and the metal bottom of the tart pan. Go all the way around to make sure the bottom is free. Transfer to a cardboard cake circle or onto a cake plate.

      Decorating the Tart

      • Add the cream and powdered sugar to a mixing bowl fitted with a whisk attachment. Whip to medium peaks.
      • Using a small round pastry tip in a pastry bag ( I used an Ateco 801 which is about ⅛") , fill it with some of the cream, pipe 5 horizontal lines across the tart.
      • Turn the tart 90° so the lines are now vertical. Pipe 5 lines on the diagonal to create a lattice design.
      • Using a ⅜" open star tip (I used an Ateco 825 open star), pipe a wreath around the edge of the tart. Refrigerate until serving.
      • The tart can be made and frozen without the decoration. Leave it in the tart pan, freeze it hard, then wrap it well in foil and freeze for several months.
      • Thaw it in the refrigerator. Follow the instructions above for releasing the tart when thawed. Decorate as called for.
      • The tart should be kept in the refrigerator and will keep for 3 or 4 days.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ____________________________________________________
      The tart can be frozen for several months, without the decoration, if kept in the tart pan and wrapped well in foil. Thaw in the refrigerator and decorate up to 1 day ahead of serving. Serve directly from the fridge.
      Heavy cream is preferable as it needs no stabilization. At my bakery, we froze cakes finished with whipped heavy cream, as well as filled and decorated with no problem when thawed. See my post on Salvaging Over Whipped Cream, Heavy Creams The Work Horse of Creams, as well as Freezing Cream.
      This tart uses canned pumpkin puree. There is some confusion between pumpkin puree and pumpkin pie filling. The pumpkin puree is just that and usually comes in 15 ounce cans. The pumpkin pie filling has additional ingredients so all that is need is a crust. It usually comes in 30 ounce cans. Also, if you made the Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins and froze the leftover puree you can use that. I used frozen puree. It will be a little looser but that is fine. 
      Make sure to use a very small bowl to soften the gelatin. There will be only about 2 tablespoons.
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 10servingsCalories: 422kcalCarbohydrates: 35gProtein: 6gFat: 31gSaturated Fat: 17gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 78mgSodium: 255mgPotassium: 262mgFiber: 4gSugar: 13gVitamin A: 7659IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 58mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Serbian Walnut Cookies Recipe

      Modified: Nov 5, 2024 · Published: Nov 7, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 23 Comments

      Rows of plain and powdered sugar Serbian Walnut Cookies on the diagonal are shown

      These melt-in-your-mouth Serbian Walnut Cookies are also known as Vanilice and were quite the surprise to me.  When I first saw the recipe, I thought it was just another butter cookie, but the toasted ground walnuts give these cookies quite a boost.  While in the West we use pecans because they are indigenous to the Americas, walnuts are used in the Balkans because they are plentiful. 

      Not fond of walnuts? Use pecans or any other nut of your choice.

      Rows of plain and powdered sugar Serbian Walnut Cookies on the diagonal are shown

      The dough is really easy to roll and a joy to work with.  I took liberties with the apricot preserves which are also customary.  I wanted to boost the flavor of the jam and did so by adding a bit of cider vinegar along with some gelatin to tighten it. 

      The cookies are best made days ahead so the flavor matures.  While these cookies are wonderful sandwiched, they are also quite good on their own. Usually shown finished in powdered sugar, I found they are even better without.  The flavor of the cookie and the jam come through much better.  

      Other "nutty" cookies you might enjoy are Germany's beloved Zimtsterne, Italy's famous Baci di Dama and America's own Pecan Bars.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why these are sooooo easy to love

      • These are so easy to make. The cookies are of the shortbread type.
      • European cookies usually have less ingredients than many American cookies and these are no exception.
      • The dough is easy to work with and rolls out right from the mixer.
      • Making the cookies a few days ahead allows the flavors to meld.
      • The cut out, unbaked cookies can be frozen and baked when needed.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Apricot Filling

      The ingredients for the filling are apricot preserves, gelatin and cider vinegar.

      FRONT ROW: Gelatin, cider vinegar

      BACK ROW: Apricot preserves

      Serbian walnut cookies

      Ingredients for the cookies include unsalted butter, egg yolk, granulated sugar, vanilla, all-purpose flour and walnuts.

      FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter

      MIDDLE ROW: Egg yolk, granulated sugar, vanilla

      BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, walnuts

      Key Ingredients

      The walnuts or pecans, if using need to be toasted for the best flavor. Toasting any nut will bring out the best in them.

      The unsalted butter should be softened to cream well with the sugar. The reason I don't use the term room temperature because Alaska most likely has a colder room temp than say, New Mexico. The ideal temp for the butter is 72°F to 75°F. I have seen colder, lower temperatures suggested but the butter doesn't cream as well - it looks more like sand. There is an post you might enjoy on American Butter vs. European Butter.

      McCormick's Imitation Vanilla is fine here as the nuts take over the taste. See my post on The Making of Vanilla for an indepth discussion of pure vs. imitation.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      The collage for the apricot filling icludes the apricot jam in the processor, processed, brought to a simmer in a saucepan and the gelatin being added.

      Step 1. Place the apricot preserves in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Process until smooth. Step 3. Transfer to a small saucepan and bring to a simmer. Step 4. Add the gelatin to the vinegar in a very, very small bowl while the preserves are coming to a simmer. When the preserves are ready, take the gelatin out of the bowl. It will be a solid mass as in the picture. Tear it into small about 6 pieces and put them in the hot preserves immediately where they will melt. There is no need to liquify them first. Whisk them in and cool.

      The second collage shows the filling in a container, the walnuts and flour in the processor bowl, processed and the butter and sugar in a mixing bowl.

      Step 5. Transfer the filling to a small container and refrigerate. Step 6. Place the toasted nuts and flour in a processor bowl. Step 7. Process until the nuts are so finely chopped they are as one with the flour. Step 8. Place the softened butter and sugar in the bowl of a mixer.

      The butter and sugar are creamed, the egg yolk and vanilla are added,mixed in completely and the flour is added.

      Step 9. Cream the butter and sugar until light. Step 10. Add the vanilla and egg yolk. Step 11. Beat on medium to bring everything together. Step 11. Add the flour.

      The first picture in this collage hows the dough mixed, formed  into a round, placed between waxed paper, then rolled out and the cookies cut.

      Step 13. Mix the dough until it comes together completely. Step 14. Place it on a large piece of waxed paper and shape it into a round. Step 15. Place a second piece of paper on top and indent the dough with a rolling pin 4 or 5 times. Step 16. Roll the dough about ⅜" thick between the paper. Remove the top piece of paper. Leaving the dough on the bottom piece of paper, cut 1 ½" round cookies out. Cut the cookies close together. Keeping the cookies on the bottom piece of waxed paper, transfer them to a baking sheet and freeze them hard. Pop them out and place on a parchment line baking sheet. Bake as directed. See Cut Out Cookies using the Wax Paper Technique for complete information on freezing the cut out cookies and removing them to a baking sheet.

      The last collage shows the cookies baked on a baking sheet, the filling on the middle of the bottom cookie, spread out and the top cookie on.

      Step 17. Keeping the cookies on the bottom piece of waxed paper, transfer them to a baking sheet and freeze them hard. Pop them out and place on a parchment line baking sheet. Bake as directed. See Cut Out Cookies using the Wax Paper Technique for complete information on freezing the cut out cookies and removing them to a baking sheet. Step 18. Stir the filling vigorously to smooth it out and place a dollop on the upturned bottom of each cookie. Step 19. Spread it out to within about ⅛"of the edge. Step 20. Place the top on each cookie.

      Recipe FAQS

      How so you get clean edges on cut out cookies?

      Place the dough between waxed paper. Roll it out as called for. Chill, but don't freeze the dough. Cut straight down with the cutter and don't twist it. Cut out all the cookies at once.

      Why do my cookies get out of shape?

      Because the dough is too soft. Cut the cookies out as in the question above. Leaving the cookies on the bottom piece of paper, transfer the whole thing to a baking sheet and freeze them until rock hard. Then simply, poke them out, place them on a parchment lined baking sheet and bake as called for.

      How do I keep my cut out cookies from spreading in the oven?

      First use a recipe meant for cut out cookies. These usually won't spread out of shape. My Painted Cookies, Murbteig Pastry or Shortbread Cookies are good examples. After following the freezing instructions above, make sure they go into the oven frozen.

      Expert Tips

      • Always toast the nuts. Untoasted nuts just don't have the punch that a few minutes in the oven gives them.
      • Make sure the nuts are completely cooled before using them. I generally toast the whole bag, re-bag it, mark it and put it in the freezer. That way, I don't have to wait for them. We used to toast 30# boxes of nuts at a time at the bakery and freeze them.
      • Always make sure if the nuts are to be finely ground, that flour or sugar is put in the processor with them so they don't turn into a paste - unless of course you are making a nut butter.
      • Make sure the cookies go into the oven very cold or frozen. Although I don't believe these would go out of shape, I do this with any cut out cookie.
      Serbian Walnut Cookies on a grey tray with plain and powdered sugar cookies and a mug on it.

      More Yummy Cookies

      • A platter of brightly Decorated Shortbread Cookies for Easter including ducks, flowers and Easter eggs.
        Easy Decorated Shortbread Cookies
      • Four Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies on a white plate with a brown rim.
        Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies
      • Round Sable Breton cookies that are cross hatched on a lace edged plate.
        Sablé Breton
      • A plate of Viennese Whirls with strawberry and chocolate filling in front of gift boxes.
        Viennese Whirl Cookies

      If you love this Serbian Walnut Cookies Recipe, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

      Rows of plain and powdered sugar Serbian Walnut Cookies on the diagonal are shown

      Serbian Walnut Cookies Recipe

      Helen S. Fletcher
      The Serbian Walnut cookies are best made days ahead so the flavor matures.  While these cookies are wonderful sandwiched, they are also quite good on their own.
      No ratings yet
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 45 minutes mins
      Cook Time 16 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 1 minute min
      Course Cookies
      Cuisine American
      Servings 24 cookies
      Calories 201 kcal
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Apricot Filling

      • ¾ cup apricot preserves
      • 1 ½ teaspoon gelatin
      • 1 tablespoon cider vinegar

      Serbian Walnut Cookies

      • 1 cup walnuts (114 grams)
      • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened (114 grams)
      • ⅓ cup + 1 T granulated sugar (75 grams)
      • 1 large egg yolk
      • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla
      • 1 ¼ cups all-purpose flour (175 grams)
      • 2 cups powdered sugar (260 grams)

      Instructions
       

      Apricot Filling

      • This filling can be made days in advance and refrigerated.
      • Place the apricot preserves in the bowl of a processor. Process until smooth.
      • Dissolve the gelatin in the vinegar in a very small bowl.
      • Heat the preserves just to a simmer. Remove from the heat. Tear the gelatin into about 6 pieces and immediately add it to the hot preserves. There is no need to liquify it first. The heat will do that. Wait for a minute or two until you can see the gelatin has liquified. Stir it into the preserves. Transfer to a small container and refrigerate until needed.

      Serbian Walnut Cookies

      • Preheat the oven to 325°F. Line a couple of baking sheets with parchment paper and set aside.
      • Place the walnuts on a rimmed baking sheet and toast for 7 to 10 minuts until fragrant and slightly browned. Cool completely.
      • When cool, place the walnuts and flour in the bowl of a processor. Process until the nuts are finely ground and instinguishable. Set aside.
      • Place the butter and sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Beat until light.
      • Add the egg yolk and vanilla and beat to combine.
      • Add the flour mixture and beat on low just until completely incorporated. The dough should be good to roll out but if it is too soft, refrigerate briefly. Do not let it get too cold or it will be hard to roll.
      • Place the dough between two large pieces of waxed paper. Make 4 or 5 indentations and then roll the dough to abut ¼" thick. With a 1 ½" round cutter, cut the cookies out, keeping them close together
      • Remove the top piece of waxed paper and, keeping the cookies on the bottom pieces of paper, transfer the whole thing to a baking sheet. Freeze until rock hard.
      • When frozen, simply punch them out and place them on a cookie sheet about 5 across and 7 down. Refreeze if necessary.
      • Bake for 15 to 17 minutes from the frozen state until lightly browned and firm. Cool completely. These can be stored in an airtight container before filling for up to a week. The cookies can also be frozen, unbaked, wrapped well and kept for several months. Bake from the frozen state.

      Assembly

      • The cookies can be filled or left as single cookies. If sandwiching continue.
      • Sift the powdered sugar into a medium size bowl. Set aside.
      • Stir the filling vigorously to smooth it out. Turn half the cookies upside down and fill with about ¾ teaspoon apricot filling. Place the tops on the cookies.
      • Allow the filled cookie to set up on a rack overnight to tighten the filling.
      • If finishing with powdered sugar, place a cookie in the powdered sugar, coating both sides and rolling the edges in the sugar. Dust the tops with more powdered sugar.
      • Store in an airtight container for a week or 10 days.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ______________________________________________________
      Always toast the nuts. Untoasted nuts just don't have the punch that a few minutes in the oven gives them.
      Make sure the nuts are completely cooled before using them. I generally toast the whole bag, re-bag it, mark it and put it in the freezer. That way, I don't have to wait for them. We used to toast 30# boxes of nuts at a time at the bakery and freeze them. 
      Always make sure if the nuts are to be finely ground, that flour or sugar is put in the processor with them so they don't turn into a paste - unless of course you are making a nut butter. 
      Make sure the cookies go into the oven very cold or frozen. Although I don't believe these would go out of shape, I do this with any cut out cookie.
      For an in depth discussion about cut out cookies, see my post  Cut Out Cookies using the Wax Paper Technique

      Nutrition

      Serving: 24cookiesCalories: 201kcalCarbohydrates: 34gProtein: 2gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 18mgSodium: 5mgPotassium: 37mgFiber: 1gSugar: 26gVitamin A: 145IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 10mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Holiday Roundup - Sweet and Savory

      Modified: Dec 6, 2024 · Published: Nov 4, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

      Cranapple Pie with a Pleated Crust ready to eat.

      With Thanksgiving, Christmas and all the rest of the holidays just around the corner, here are some ideas to start you thinking about them. This roundup includes sweet as well as savory and some of the most popular recipes of the season.

      Be sure to see the Cookie Roundup of 45 Cookies and Bars where you're sure to find a new cookie or two for the season.

      Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways
      These Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways with their subtle spicing are an easy recipe that take no time to make but yield great taste. This make ahead, foolproof dough can go from dinner roll to breakfast roll with the addition of one ingredient.
      Check out this recipe
      Pumpkin Dinner Rolls and Breakfast Rolls out of one recipe
      Several slices of Chocolate Cranberry Bread sists on a cream colored plate surrounded by Muffins, cranberries, a teal colored napkin, cup and saucer and a miniature pumpkin gourd.
      Chocolate Cranberry Quick Bread Recipe
      Quick breads are great because they come together in minutes. This chocolate cranberry version is just the thing to start celebrating the holidays since it can be stashed in the freezer and just thawed.
      Check out this recipe
      Torta Rustica - A Savory Italian Pastry
      This Torta Rustica belongs in your repertoire when it comes to savory dishes. Layers of spinach filling, red peppers, artichokes and provolone are enclosed in an Italian butter pastry that is foolproof and so distinctive on its own. It's very accommodating and can be eaten hot, warm, or at room temperature for brunch, lunch or dinner.
      Check out this recipe
      A slice of the Torta Rustica displaying the multiple layers of the filling.
      Breakfast Scone
      Breakfast Scones - An Easy Morning Treat
      Sausage and cheese highlight these breakfast scones. To turn these Breakfast Scones into a breakfast sandwich make an egg omelet adding peppers, onions, or anything else you want. The scones can be made and frozen ahead of time.
      Check out this recipe
      Orange Cranberry Cake - A Holiday Specialty
      This spectacular Orange Chiffon Cake is filled with cranberry curd and chocolate ganache then finished with whipped cream. The filled cake without the finish can be frozen then finished the day before.
      Check out this recipe
      An Orange chiffon Cake is filled with cranberry curd and chocolate. The cake is finished with whipped cream and julienned candied orange zest
      Salted Macadamia Rum Toffee in a gold candy box with a star shaped pink ornament with Warm Holiday Wishes written on it and a snowman and gingerbread man on the ornament.
      Salted Macadamia Rum Toffee
      This Salted Macadamia Rum Toffee is simply a matter of adding a few ingredients at a time and taking the mixture to a stated temperature.  Stir in a couple of more ingredients and pour it into a prepared pan. In a matter of minutes, it’s cool and ready to finish.
      Check out this recipe
      Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart with Caramel Rum Sauce
      The Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart has a graham cracker crust that is pressed in and filled with a cream cheese mixture alternated with a pumpkin mixture which are swirled together. The baked tart can be frozen if made ahead. The simple Caramel Rum Sauce can be made weeks ahead and refrigerated.
      Check out this recipe
      A slice of Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart on a plate with Rum Caramel Sauce and the tart in the bakground
      Squares of Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake with cranberries and cinnamon sticks
      Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake
      This Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake is a breeze to make and is tart from the cranberries balanced by the pecan streusel.
      Check out this recipe
      Super Fast and Easy Brioche Rolls
      These updated, super-fast, and easy Brioche Rolls are the perfect complement to any special dinner and never more so than during the holidays.  When I say super easy, I mean super easy.  Just a quick turn in a food processor and the dough is are ready to rise.
      Check out this recipe
      Two Brioche Rolls are on a plate with a jar of jam.
      Pumpkin Mousse with a graham cracker crust, cheesecake layer topped with pumpkin mousse finished with a wreath of whipped cream
      Pumpkin Mousse Torte Recipe
      Pumpkin Mousse Torte is an easily made dessert that can be made ahead and frozen.  This was, without question, the most popular dessert we made for the fall months including Thanksgiving.  A crumb crust, cheesecake layer topped with a light, but intense pumpkin mousse soon became everyone's favorite.
      Check out this recipe
      Reine de Saba Cake with Candied Cranberries
      This frozen Reine de Saba cake is the perfect dessert for a busy schedule as the entire thing can be done a month ahead.  If you do freeze it ahead, keep it in the pan so the filling doesn’t get smooshed.
      Check out this recipe
      This Riene de Saba cake features 2 layers of chocolate cake with a mousse like filling, topped with candied cranberries
      Hot Peppered Pecans
      Hot Peppered Pecans
      These pecans are a standout. Heat Alert -  they are hot!!  So if you don't favor a lot of heat, tone down all the pepper and the hot pepper sauce. Start with half and go from there. These make a great gift for anyone who loves snacks.
      Check out this recipe
      Three Appetizers for an Instant Party
      These Three Appetizers including spicy meatballs, artichoke croustades and sesame salmon are all make-aheads that allow you to enjoy your guests.
      Check out this recipe
      Pumpkin Cheesecake with Salted Caramel Sauce
      Pumpkin Cheesecake with Salted Caramel Sauce
      This Pumpkin Cheesecake is highlighted by an out of this world Salted Caramel sauce.  As if that weren't enough it is easy to put together with all the flavors of the season.
      Check out this recipe
      Buche de Noel
      The Buche de Noel is a spectacular extravaganza from France. While it looks complicated, it can be done over several weeks.  I have posted a schedule.  Buche de Noel translates to Yule Log.  It is basically a jelly roll with the ends cut off and decorated to look like a tree trunk lying on the ground.
      Check out this recipe
      The spectacular Buche de Noel
      Mincemeat
      Time to Make Mincemeat
      This modern Mincemeat is meatless and easily made.  Coming from England, it essentially consists of cutting up a lot of fruit and letting it age with citrus, spices, rum, and brandy. It is important if you are going to use Mincemeat to start it now. 
      Check out this recipe
      Make Ahead Cranberry Linzer Tart
      Cranberry Linzer Tart with its bright deep red, vibrant,  cranberry filling is a variation of the Viennese Linzer Tart with raspberry filling.  The spiced Linzer pastry is a perfect partner with the cranberries.   It is best made ahead so the flavors can blend making this a natural for the holiday season.  It can also be baked and frozen until needed.
      Check out this recipe
      Cranberry Linzer Tart
      Salmon Wellington cut open to expose the filling on a plate
      Salmon Wellington with Lemon Asparagus Risotto Cakes
      These are particularly good for entertaining as they must be frozen solid -  so you can make them a month in advance, wrap well and tuck away in the freezer.  By freezing them solid, the salmon won't  overcook in the time it takes to bake the puff pastry.   It makes a perfect entrée for entertaining.
      Check out this recipe
      Orange Date Bread Pudding
      Dates and oranges used two ways make this a great winter dessert when so many fruits are not back until spring. Easily made, these are perfect for a casual or formal dinner.
      Check out this recipe
      Orange Date Bread Pudding with Hard Sauce drizzled on
      Hazelnut Gianduja Cake
      Hazelnut Gianduja Cake
      This Hazelnut Gianduja Cake is the perfect celebration or holiday cake and the updated methods and instructions make it completely approachable and doable for the home baker. The cake recipe consists of several component parts and three of the four can be made ahead. Actually, the entire cake can be made ahead and refrigerated or frozen if desired.
      Check out this recipe
      Cranberry Fresh Pineapple Relish
      Cranberries, fresh pineapple and a hint of orange made this one of the most popular recipes from my take out shop and we featured it every year for Thanksgiving. I still do. I think if you try it, it will become one of your traditions also.
      Check out this recipe
      Cranberry Fresh Pineapple Relish
      Puff Pastry Crackers
      Puff Pastry Crackers
      I don't know about you, but last minute everything seems to happen at my house and these Puff Pastry Crackers take care of that. With little time to plan or think ahead, it makes it difficult sometimes when your guests expect something a bit out of the ordinary.
      Check out this recipe
      Apple Crisp Cheesecake
      This Apple Crisp cheesecake is perfect for Thanksgiving.  It can be frozen and thawed for several days in the refrigerator, or for a day at room temperature with no harm.
      Check out this recipe
      A slice of the Apple Crisp Cheesecake sits on a tan oplate with a fork on the plate and a napkin in the background.
      Two chocolate truffles on a silver serving dish.
      Chocolate Chocolate Truffles
      At the bakery we were known for our chocolate. These Chocolate Chocolate Truffleswere the same ones we made - hundreds and hundreds that were hand dipped.
      Check out this recipe
      Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins
      Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins with pecan streusel couldn't be any easier. Two bowls and a few measuring utensils, a whisk and, a rubber spatula are all that are needed. Combine the dry ingredients in one bowl, the liquid ingredients in another, mix them together, plop them in the cups and into the oven they go.
      Check out this recipe
      Pumpkin Muffins on a cooling rack with a blue and yellow cloth and yellow smiley face tea cup,,
      Pumpkin cake donuts on a plate with a cup of tea.
      Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe
      This quick, easy Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe doesn't get any faster. With no yeast to wait for, these are ready in no time. They stay fresh for days. No cake donut pan? No problem. There's a work around below.
      Check out this recipe
      Tourte Milanese
      I came across Tourte Milanase years ago.  It’s a spectacular tour de force. And, as with most spectaculars, it requires a bit of preparation to get it finished.  But when it’s done and you cut into it, the striking layers of green, red, pink and white are dramatic.
      Check out this recipe
      A slice of Tourte Milanese sits on a plate exposing its dramatic yellow, green, red and pink layers.
      Cranapple Pie with a Pleated Crust ready to eat.
      Cranapple Pie with a Pleated Crust
      This Cranapple Pie was one of of the favorite dessert combinations at the bakery.    This pie uses a galette style crust which is a  usually freeform and  finished in one piece, without an upper crust.  This leaves the filling exposed and makes a beautiful presentation.
      Check out this recipe
      Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes
      Dazzle your friends and family with these classic Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes. Fruity, gooey, and caramelly this is one of America's favorite cakes.
      Check out this recipe
      This Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cake features a pineapple slice with a cherry in the middle on top of a yellow cake sitting on a blue and white plate.
      Hot Curried Party Mix in a bowl
      Hot Curried Party Mix
      The greatest thing about these is how easy they are to prepare. Be sure to make this Hot Curried Party Mix a minimum of one day ahead – a week is better. Stored in an airtight container, this will last a month, if you can keep out of it.
      Check out this recipe
      Caramel Apple Tart
      Caramel Apple Tart is everything you would want in an apple dessert.  Full of apples, spices, brown sugar and brandy, it's covered with walnut streusel and caramel. This was a fall favorite with my clientele at the bakery.
      Check out this recipe
      Slice of Caramel Apple Tart
      Scone with Cranberry Strawberry Jam on a plate
      Scones with Cranberry Strawberry Jam
      The scones are easily made and the jam requires no canning if kept in the refrigerator or freezer.  The combination of the cranberries and strawberries makes a sweet-tart topping for the scones, toast, biscuits, or pancakes and waffles. A jar of the jam makes a perfect hostess gift.
      Check out this recipe
      Brown Butter Tarts
      These make a stunning finish to a meal. Not to big but loaded with flavor these Brown Butter Tarts feature an easy press in crust, brickle (think toffee) filling and a unbelievable brown butter topping. The best part is that these can be frozen for a couple of months.
      Check out this recipe
      These individual Brown Butter Tarts feature a butter crust filled with brickle bits and a browned butter filling. They are lightly dusted with powdered sugar and served with caramel sauce
      Zippy Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads
      Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads
      They are perfect for the holidays as they can be kept in an airtight tin for weeks or in the freezer, unbaked for months. This makes a lot which is good because they are eaten quickly. These make a great gift also.
      Check out this recipe
      Carrot Cake Cheesecake
      This unusual carrot cake consists of two layers of carrot cake sandwiched with a creamy cheesecake and finished with the traditional cream cheese frosting.
      Check out this recipe
      Carrot Cake Cheesecake slice
      Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie slice on a plate with the pie plate in the background.
      Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie
      This is a fun apple pie with the top crust made to look like cinnamon buns. The use of undiluted frozen apple juice concentrate ups the flavor.
      Check out this recipe
      European Nut Roll with Three Fillings
      Nut rolls are especially popular during holidays and celebrations in Central Europe. This yeast dough is the easiest dough of its kind I have ever worked with.  When you roll it out there is absolutely no recalcitrance or spring back. I recommend you make the dough a day, or several days, ahead and work it cold.  It truly is a joy.
      Check out this recipe
      A rich yeast dough is filled three ways one each with almond, poppyseed and walnuts
      A slice of Lemon Glazed Lemon Twists made with Sixty Second Brioche
      60 Second Brioche
      The title, "60 Second Brioche" (pronounced BREE-ohsh) comes from my article title as it appeared in Bon Appetit Magazine.  While it takes a few minutes to prepare the ingredients, it does indeed come together in about sixty seconds in the food processor, making it the fastest brioche around.
      Check out this recipe
      TJ's Cowboy Bark
      Easy, quick and absolutely delicious. How can you go wrong with oreos, peanuts, almonds, toffee bits and pretzels. Sweet and salty all at once.
      Check out this recipe
      TJ's Cowboy Bark for TJj's Cowbow Bark
      Brandied Chocolate Cherry Almond Garmisch
      Brandied Chocolate Cherry Almond Garmisch
      Garmisch is another wonderful yeasted coffeecake as only the Germans can make them. Superb bakers, their products not only look beautiful but are luxurious tasting. The original filling was walnuts and while delicious, the chocolate cherry almond filling adds a note of excitement.
      Check out this recipe
      Chocolate Raspberry Marzipan Gateau
      This Chocolate Raspberry Marzipan Gateau is a prime example of French baking. Many of the component parts of this Marzipan Gateau can be made well ahead, in fact all of them. Assembly is quick and easy.
      Check out this recipe
      Chocolate Raspberry Marzipan Gateau
      Updated GF Ultimate Chocolate Fudge Cake
      This Ultimate Chocolate Fudge Cake naturally gluten free and is ultra-smooth and has a deep, intense chocolate taste without being bitter or overwhelming.
      Check out this recipe
      This Ultimate Chocolate Fudge cake is gluten free and easy to make. It is finished with a chocolate glaze and served with a Vanilla Creme Anglaise
      Five Mexican sweet rolls, Conchas with different toppings.
      Conchas - A Mexican Sweet Bread
      Conchas are a not overly sweet roll often served at breakfast with coffee or hot chocolate in Mexico.  Also known as Pan Dulce and Sweet Bread this buttery yeast dough is flavored with cinnamon, vanilla and anise.
      Check out this recipe

      Easy Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding

      Modified: Jul 30, 2025 · Published: Oct 28, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

      The Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding is shown partial opened up with a blubeberry sauce dripping down it on a white plate,

      This spectacular Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding is based on the Lemon Cheesecake I make at the restaurant. It is extremely popular and very unusual. This version of a bread pudding is very quick and easy to make. The ingredients take a few turns in the processor, are poured over the bread cubes, and into the pans it goes. Not much work at all for this uncommon bread pudding.

      The Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding is shown partial opened up with a blubeberry sauce dripping down it on a white plate,

      While I've chosen to show it with the Blueberry Sauce from the Lemonade Cake, a couple of others would be perfect to serve with the warm Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding. The Lemon Soaking Syrup from the Lemon Strawberry Cake or the Lemon Rum soaking syrup from the Lemon Rum Bundt Cake would make an ideal accompaniment to this remarkable dessert. Also check out My All Time Favorite Lemon Recipes.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why you'll love this recipe

      • It's really easy and quick to make. This bread pudding can be in the oven baking in about 30 minutes.
      • The ingredients are all readily available with the exception of the citric acid which is optional.
      • There is no water bath needed for this dessert.
      • This is packed with lemon flavor with lemon zest, lemon juice and citric acid which adds a bit of the tartness that make lemons so appealing.
      • These can be made ahead and frozen, thawed and reheated for a quick dessert.

      Recipe ingredients

      Ingredients for the Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding include brioche bread, cream cheese, granulated sugar, citric acid, eggs,lemon zest,vanilla, sour cream, half and half and lemon juice,

      FRONT ROW: Lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla

      MIDDLE ROW: Granulated sugar, sour cream, cream cheese

      BACK ROW: Bread, eggs, half and half

      Key Ingredients

      Either Brioche or Challah that has been purchased work well in this recipe.

      Citric Acid powder is used to add the tartness of lemons to the bread pudding. It can be omitted if desired but it does up the flavor. While not commonly found on store shelves it can be found on line including Amazon or just google "food grade citric acid powder" for more choices. Make sure you get food grade.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      The first collage shows a stack of bread slices cut vertically then cut into cubes, sugar and cream cheese in a processor bowl and processed.

      Step 1. Slice the bread about ¾" thick if the loaf is whole. Dry the slices until it feels stale but not dry. This can take 4 to 6 hours depending upon the bread. I place mine on cooling racks so both sides can dry at once. Once dried, stack several slices up and cut them vertically. Step 2. Cross cut them into about ¾" cubes. There should be about 8 cups. Set aside. Step 3. Place the cream cheese and sugar in the bowl of a processor. Step 4. Process until completely mixed. Scrape down and into the corners of the processor bowl to make sure it is all combined.

      The eggs,,lemon zest, vanilla, sour cream and citric acid are added to the processor bowl.

      Step 5. Add the eggs, lemon zest, vanilla, sour cream and citric acid to the processor bowl. Step 6. Process until smooth, scraping as necessary. Step 7. Add the half and half and lemon juice. Process again to complete the mixture.

      The mixture is poured over the bread cubes, it has soaked in and then it is poured into a square pan orinto individual cups.

      Step 9. Pour the liquid over the bread cubes making sure to stir it well so the liquid is contacting all the cubes. Step 10. Let it sit 15 to 30 minutes until the bread is soaked through and no liquid is sitting on the bottom of the bowl. Stir several times to make sure it is evenly soaking. The bread should not be mushy. Step 11. Spray a 9" pan with a non-stick baking spray and pour the mixture into the pan. Step 12 . Or, for individual servings, spray six 6-ounce ramekins or a Jumbo Muffin tin with a non-stick baking spray and divide the mixture between the cups filling them all the way to the top. Bake for 30 to 35 minutes or until a tester comes out clean. They will most likely rise during baking but will deflate as they cool.

      Recipe FAQS

      What constitutes bread pudding

      A custardy base is combined with stale, cut up bread to which many different ingredients can be added depending upon what is wanted. The bread should be soft having absorbed the custard.

      How do you know when the bread pudding is done baking?

      There are a couple of ways. One, insert a cake tester in the middle of the pudding. If it comes out clean it is done. The second method is to press the center of the bread pudding and if liquid comes up it needs to bake longer.

      When was bread pudding first made?

      English cooks in the 11th century repurposed stale bread. In later centuries it became known as "poor man's pudding" because food was scarce at times and the pudding was made only with boiling water sugar and spices. Today's version is much richer with eggs, milk or cream, spices and any number of additions.

      Expert Tips

      • The bread used should be stale but not hard or completely dried out. While any bread can be used, Brioche and Challah are often used for their taste.
      • The liquid base can be made in a mixer by following the same steps as for the food processor. Make sure the cream cheese is at room temperature so it mixes without lumps.
      • If another type of bread is used, it may require more or less liquid so add ¾ of the half and half first. If the bread is not completely coated, stir in the rest of the half and half.
      • While citric acid powder is listed as an ingredient, it can be omitted.
      A whole single bread pudding with blueberry  sauce on a white plate with a yellow napkin and spoon,

      Other scrumptious desserts

      • Orange Bread Pudding
        Orange Bread Pudding
      • An individual Chocolate Caramel Tart on a white background with raspberries.
        No Bake Mini Chocolate Caramel Tarts
      • Mincemeat Tartlets
        Mincemeat Tarts
      • Orange Date Bread Pudding with Hard Sauce drizzled on
        Orange Date Bread Pudding

      If you love this Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

      The Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding is shown partial opened up with a blubeberry sauce dripping down it on a white plate,

      Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding

      Helen S. Fletcher
      This spectacular Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding is based on the Lemon Cheesecake I make at the restaurant. It is extremely popular and very unusual. This version of a bread pudding is very quick and easy to make.
      5 from 1 vote
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 30 minutes mins
      Cook Time 35 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
      Course Bread Pudding
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 servings
      Calories 481 kcal

      Equipment

      • 9x9 square pan or
      • 6 cup Jumbo Muffin Pan or
      • 6 6 ounce ramekins
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      • ¾ pound Brioche or Challah (340 grams)
      • 4 ounces cream cheese, room temperature (114 grams)
      • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
      • 2 large eggs
      • 2 tablespoons lemon zest
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      • 1 teaspoon citric acid powder, optional
      • ⅓ cup sour cream (75 grams)
      • 1 cup half and half
      • ⅓ cup lemon juice, freshly squeezed

      Instructions
       

      • If the bread is whole, slice abut ¾" thick. Dry the slices on cooling racks for 4 to 6 hours until stale but not dried out. This can take 4 to 6 hours. Once dried, stack several slices up and cut them vertically. Cross cut them into ¾" cubes. There should be about 8 cups. Place them in a large bowl. Set aside.
      • Place the cream cheese and sugar in the bowl of a food processor. Process until smooth, scraping as necessary. Be sure to get to the bottom of the bowl and into the edges so there will be no lumps.
      • Add the eggs, lemon zest, vanilla, citric acid, and sour cream processing until smooth.
      • Add the half and half and lemon juice. Process until smooth and all is combined.
      • Pour the liquid mixture over the bread cubes, stirring well to make sure all the bread is coated with the liquid.
      • Let the bread mixture sit for 15 to 30 minutes until the bread is soaked through and no liquid is sitting on the bottom of the bowl. The bread should not be mushy but wet all the way through. Stir several times to make sure the liquid is evenly soaking the bread.
      • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
      • For a single bread pudding, pour the mixture into a 9” square pan that has been very well sprayed with a non-stick baking release.
      • For individual bread puddings:  Use six 6-ounce ramekins or Texas muffin cups.  Spray very well with a non-stick baking release and divide between the ramekins, filling them all the way to the top.
      • Bake 30 to 35 minutes until set and a tester comes out clean.
      • If using the individual ramekins or muffin pans, cool for about 10 minutes and turn out.
      • Serve warm with the one of the following sauces: The Blueberry Sauce from the Lemonade Cake, the Lemon Soaking Syrup from the Lemon Strawberry Cake or the Lemon Rum soaking syrup from the Lemon Rum Bundt Cake
      • Serves 6 individual bread puddings or 6 to 8 from the 9" pan.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      _____________________________________________________
      The bread used should be stale but not hard or completely dried out. While any bread can be used, Brioche and Challah are often used for their taste.
      The liquid base can be made in a mixer by following the same steps as for the food processor. Make sure the cream cheese is at room temperature so it mixes without lumps. 
      If another type of bread is used, it may require more or less liquid so add ¾ of the half and half first. If the bread is not completely coated, stir in the rest of the half and half. 
      While citric acid powder is listed as an ingredient, it can be omitted.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 6servingsCalories: 481kcalCarbohydrates: 47gProtein: 11gFat: 28gSaturated Fat: 16gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 200mgSodium: 371mgPotassium: 136mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 20gVitamin A: 1054IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 120mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Apricot Pistachio Italian Biscotti Recipe

      Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Oct 24, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 20 Comments

      A round doilie covered tray holds large and mini Apricot Pistachio Biscotti.

      These Apricot Pistachio Biscotti are festive looking with the green pistachio nuts and vibrant orange apricots.  An uncomplicated recipe with easy to obtain ingredients, these biscotti last a long time in an airtight container. They also ship well. I've made them in a large size as well as mini's which are perfect with a cup of coffee or tea on a cookie tray.

      A round doilie covered tray holds large and mini Apricot Pistachio Biscotti.

      The use of olive oil instead of butter or other oil keeps these very Italian. Extra virgin olive oil will give the best taste. The apricots are also soaked in brandy to keep them moist when baking. If brandy isn't an option, water can be substituted.

      By quartering the apricots and using whole and half pistachios, it makes them very visible adding to the appeal of this unique biscotti.

      Be sure to check out the Chocolate Spice Olive Oil Biscotti for another cookie of the same type. The spice mixture comes from the Honey Diamonds which are an unusual cookie in there is no shortening. They are also diametrically opposed in texture to the biscotti as they are very soft. Also, Double Panning the cookies while they bake prevent them from over browning or burning. It is a technique I use for a lot of cookie recipes and one I think you might find interesting.

      Other Italian Cookies you'll love include: Italian Neapolitan Cookies, Baci di Dama, and Cuccidati.

      If you are looking for more holiday baking ideas, check out Kick-Start Your Holiday Spirit: Cookies & Breads to Bake Now.

      Biscotti - What is it?

      The word “biscotti” is derived from the Latin word “bis,” meaning “twice,” and “coctus,” meaning “cooked,” referring to the fact that the dough is baked twice to create a hard, dry texture, according to Bruno of the Biscotti Company.

      Biscotti is an ancient Roman cookie that accompanied soldiers on their missions much like hardtack as they were made with flour, water, and sometimes honey or nuts - a far cry from the modern version - and I daresay a better version.

      In time, the biscotti traveled to varied parts of Europe and came to the town of Prato in Tuscany where their version included almonds and was served with sweet dessert wine like Vin Santo. It is still often served in this manner, especially high end Italian restaurants.

      Fast forward to today where it is a traditional Italian cookie that is crunchy, dry and oblong in shape. To achieve this they are baked twice which dries them out and gives them a long shelf life.

      Modern biscotti have morphed into lightly sweetened cookies with any number of add ins including dried fruits, nuts, chocolate, citrus and can be plain or dipped in chocolate. They can be big or little, chocolate or not and almond flour can be substituted for wheat flour to make them gluten free in some recipes.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love these Biscotti

      • They are super easy to make.
      • This cookie lasts forever because it has been dried out.
      • The variations are endless using easily obtained ingredients such as dried fruit, citrus peel, candied citrus, nuts, chocolate chips as well as white or milk chocolate or even crushed candy.
      • Softer versions can also be made by simply baking them once.

      Variations

      • Any type of dried fruit or nut can be substituted.
      • White chocolate chips can be added for part of the fruit and nuts.
      • Another liqueur such as Amaretti, or Pernod can be used instead of brandy
      • The cookies can be drizzled with or half dipped in melted white chocolate after toasting.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredients for the biscotti include olive oil, all-purpose flour, dried apricots, egggs, granulated sugar, pisacio nuts, baking powder, brandy, and vanilla.

      FRONT ROW: Baking powder, brandy, vanilla

      MIDDLE ROW: Eggs, granulated sugar, pistachio nuts

      BACK ROW: Olive Oil, all-purpose flour and dried apricots.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & Instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      This collages shows the dried apricot being cut with scissors, the apricots being heated with brandy, a bowl with flour and baking powder and the olive oil and sugar in a mixing bowl.

      Step 1. The easiest way to cut dried fruit is with scissors. Cut the apricots into quarters so they remain visable. Step 2. Place the cut apricots in a small saucepan with the brandy or water. Bring to a simmer over medium low heat and simmer until the liquid is gone. Step 3. Combine the flour and baking powder and set aside. Step 4. Combine the olive oil and sugar in a mixing bowl.

      The olive oil and sugar beating in the mixer, eggs are added and beaten in and the flour mixture is added.

      Step 5. Beat the olive oil and sugar until combined. Step 6. Add the eggs and beat to mix completely. Step 7. Mix in the vanilla and brandy or water. Step 8. Add the flour.

      This collage shows the batter mixed, the apricots and pistachios added, the batter completed and  a portion rolled into a log.

      Step 9. Blend in the flour. Step 10. Add the apricots and pistachio nuts. Step 11. Mix the fruit and nuts in on medium low. The dough will be a bit sticky. Refrigerate for several hours to make it more workable. Step 12. Divide the dough into 2 to 4 pieces depending upon if you are making the large or mini size. On a floured surface, roll either of the logs into into 12" logs.

      Flour is being brushed off the flattened roll, the roll is placed on a parchment lined baking sheet, large and small cookie rolls on a tray, and the try is double panned.

      Step 17. Brush the flour off the roll. Step 18. Place the roll on a parchment line baking sheet and flatten it to about ½" deep. Step 19. The large and small flatten rolls are placed on the sheet. Step 20. Double Pan the baking pan by placing a second baking sheet under the one holding the logs.

      The rolls are baked, sliced, on a baking sheet and baked,

      Step 21. Bake the logs as directed. Cool slightly. Step 22. Using a non-serrated sharp knife and a sawing motion cut the logs into about ½" slices. Step 23. Place them on a parchment lined baking sheet. Step 24. Bake as directed for the second time to toast them.

      Recipe FAQS

      How are biscotti served?

      Because they are a dry cookie, in Italy they are served as a dessert with Vin Santo wine into which they are dunked. Outside of Italy they are often served with coffee or tea. For an elegant dessert, serve biscotti alongside fresh fruit, gelato, or a simple drizzle of melted chocolate.

      What is the best way to cut biscotti?

      A serrated knife is essential to cutting the dry biscotti so the edges don't fall off.

      Why are biscotti so dry?

      Originally, they were meant to last on long trips for travelers or soldiers. Romans bragged that their biscotti would last forever - in a way they did. They are still a much loved cookie.

      A tray of biscotti, large and mini sit on a doilie.

      More Cookies to Enjoy

      • A fudgy brownie on the bottom with a chocolate and butterscotch chip cookie on top.
        Brownie+Cookie=Easy Brookie Recipe
      • A wreath of molasses cookies sits on a blue and white plate.
        The Best of All Spiced Molasses Cookies
      • Levain Style Chocolate Chip Cookies is huge and loaded with chips.
        Levain Style Chocolate Chip Cookies
      • Triple Ginger Crisp
        Triple Ginger Crisps

      If you love these Apricot Pistachio Biscotti, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you

      Apricot Pistachio Biscotti

      Helen S. Fletcher
      These Apricot Pistachio Biscotti are festive looking with the green pistachio nuts and vibrant orange apricots.  An uncomplicated recipe with easy to obtain ingredients, these biscotti last a long time in an airtight container. They also ship well.
      4.67 from 3 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 45 minutes mins
      Cook Time 40 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 25 minutes mins
      Course Cookies
      Cuisine Italian
      Servings 40 large cookies
      Calories 107 kcal
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      • ¾ cup dried apricots (140 grams)
      • 3 tablespoons brandy or water
      • 2 ¾ cup all-purpose flour (385 grams)
      • 1 ½ teaspoon baking powder
      • ½ cup olive oil, extra virgin preferred
      • 2 tablespoons vanilla extract
      • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
      • 3 large eggs
      • 1 cup pistachio nuts, whole and halves preferred (114 grams)

      Instructions
       

      • Cut the apricots into quarters with a pair of scissors. Combine them with the brandy or water in a small saucepan. Bring to a simmer and let them simmer until the liquid has been absorbed. Set aside to cool while the rest of the recipe is prepared.
      • Combine the flour and the baking powder. Set aside.
      • Combine the olive oil and sugar in a mixing bowl fitted with the paddle attachment.  Beat to mix.  
      • Add the eggs, one at a time just until just mixed.  Add the vanilla.  Mix well.  
      • Add the flour mixture and mix well; add the pistachios and apricots.   Mix well and then chill for several hours.
      • The dough weighs abut 1120 grams.
      • Preheat oven to 350 degrees.  Line a cookie sheet with parchment paper.  
      • For the larger size biscotti: Divide the dough into 2 pieces (about 560 grams each); roll each piece into a log about 12” inch log.  Place on the baking sheet, spacing well apart.  Flatten the logs to about ½ inch deep.   
      • DOUBLE PAN and bake for 35 to 40 minutes until firm.  
      • Cool slightly; cut into ½” slices, place on baking sheet and toast for 12 to 16 minutes until lightly browned. When cutting the biscotti, use a regular sharp knife and a sawing motion. Do not cut straight down or the cookies may crack.
      • Yield:  Approximately 33 to 40 biscotti or about 2 pounds.
      • For them mini size biscotti: Divide the dough into 4 pieces of about 280 grams each. Roll each into a 12 inch log.  Place on a parchment lined baking sheet well apart. 
      • Flatten to about ½ inch. DOUBLE PAN. Bake for 25 to 28 minutes
      • Cool slightly, cut about ½ " thick and toast for 10 to 14 minutes.
      • Yield:  70 to 80 depending upon how they are cut or about 2 pounds.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
       
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      ____________________________________________________
      • They are super easy to make.
      • This cookie lasts forever because it has been dried out.
      • The variations are endless using easily obtained ingredients such as dried fruit, citrus peel, candied citrus, nuts, chocolate chips as well as white or milk chocolate or even crushed candy. 
      • The biscotti can be drizzled with or half dipped in white chocolate after toasting.
      • A softer versions can also be made by simply baking them once. 
      • Any type of dried fruit or nut can be substituted.
      • White chocolate chips can be added for part of the fruit and nuts.
      • Other liqueurs such as Amaretti, or Pernod can be used instead of brandy.
      • It is easiest to cut the biscotti when they are slightly warm.
      • Always use a non-serrated sharp knife and a sawing motion to cut the cookies. 
      • Toast the cookies until they are lightly browned for the best toasted flavor.
      • These last forever in an airtight tin. 
      • These are good for shipping. 
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 40 cookiesCalories: 107kcalCarbohydrates: 14gProtein: 2gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.002gCholesterol: 14mgSodium: 22mgPotassium: 75mgFiber: 1gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 121IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 17mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins

      Modified: Sep 15, 2025 · Published: Oct 21, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 12 Comments

      Pumpkin Muffins on a cooling rack with a blue and yellow cloth and yellow smiley face tea cup,,

      Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins with pecan streusel couldn't be any easier. Two bowls and a few measuring utensils, a whisk and, a rubber spatula are all that are needed. Combine the dry ingredients in one bowl, the liquid ingredients in another, mix them together, plop them in the cups and into the oven they go. A few minutes later - hot Pumpkin Muffins - perfect for breakfast, brunch or anytime of the day. And they freeze well. What more can you ask of a muffin?

      Pumpkin Muffins on a cooling rack with a blue and yellow cloth and yellow smiley face tea cup,,

      This is the perfect recipe for a beginning baker or to make with a child. And what memories that will create!

      Leftover pumpkin puree

      This is always a question that is asked. Here are some suggestions: Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways where one simple ingredient changes these from a dinner roll to a breakfast roll, super easy, quick and delicious Pumpkin Cake Donuts, and Pumpkin Cheesecake with Salted Caramel Sauce and the ever popular Updated Pumpkin Mousse Torte which removed the uncooked egg yolks in favor of a safer but no less fantastic dessert with the mousse sitting on top of a cheesecake layer.

      For another great muffin recipe, check out my Best Banana Streusel Muffin.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why you'll love these

      • These muffins use pantry ingredients.
      • They can literally be made in 20 minutes or less if you toast the pecans ahead.
      • They are not too sweet and are perfect anytime of the day.
      • I can't even tell you how simple these are to make.
      • Last but not least, they taste incredible.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Pecan Streusel Topping

      Ingredients for the streusel are brown sugar, toasted pecans, all-purpose flour, cinnamon, and unsalted butter.

      FRONT ROW: Cinnamon, unsalted butter

      BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, brown sugar, toasted pecans

      Pumpkin Muffins

      The muffin ingredients include all-purpose flour, granulated sugar, baking powder, salt, cinnamon, nutmeg, cloves, toasted pecans, an egg, milk, pumpkin puree and oil .

      FRONT ROW: Cloves, baking powder, cinnamon, salt,nutmeg

      MIDDLE ROW: Granulated sugar, egg, oil, pumpkin puree

      BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, toasted pecans, milk

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      The first collage shows the streusel processed, transferred to a bowl, the dry ingredients mixed and the  liquid ingredients in a bowl

      Step 1. Place all of the ingredients for the pecan streusel in the bowl of a processor. Pulse until crumbs form. Step 2. Transfer to a bowl and refrigerate while preparing the rest of the recipe. Step 3. Whisk the dry ingredients to combine them and set aside. Step 4. Place the liquid ingredients in a bowl.

      The liquid ingredients have been whisked together, added to the dry ingredients, mixed and the nuts added.

      Step 5. Whisk the liquid ingredients together Step 6. Add them to the flour. Step 7. Mix together with a rubber spatula. The mixture will be on the thicker side. Do not over mix. Step 8. Add the toasted pecans.

      The streusel and mixed muffins together, the muffins in paper cups, the streusel is added to them.

      Step 9. Have the muffin batter and streusel together. Step 10. Fill the paper cups a scant ¾ full. Step 11. Cover the tops of the muffins with the streusel. Step 12. Press it into the muffins lightly to make sure it adheres.

      Recipes FAQS

      What happens if you over mix muffin batter?

      Muffins are part of the family of quick breads such as breads and pancakes made with baking powder or baking soda. The items usually require a couple of bowls and are mixed by hand. If over mixed, the texture can change and they can become dense. Mix the liquid ingredients into the dry ingredients with a rubber spatula and a folding motion only until you can't see any dry flour.

      Common mistakes when making muffins or quick breads.

      1. Over mixing the batter, 2. Over filling the muffin trays causing the muffins to overflow their cups and now rise straight up. 3. Soggy muffin bottoms can be caused by leaving the muffins in the muffin trays to cool. They should be taken out after about 5 minutes of cooling and put on cooling racks to prevent them from sweating in the trays.

      What are the 3 traits of a good muffin?

      1. They should be moist. 2. They can be cakey or have an uneven crumb with holes and tunnels throughout the muffin. 3. The muffins should have a peaked or risen crown.

      Expert Tips

      • Toast the nuts for the maximum flavor. Cool completely before using them. 
      • Don't cut the nuts into really small piece. They can be place in the processor first thing and pulsed to chop them coarsely. Remove them and continue to make the streusel.
      • There will be pumpkin puree left over. What to do with it is always one of the questions I get. See above in the header of the article for some great ideas.
      • Freeze the extra puree for later. Thaw in the refrigerator.
      • Don't over fill the muffin cups.
      • While the muffin cups can be sprayed and the batter added to the without the paper cups, I prefer the paper cups because they help keep the batter from spreading over the top or sticking. 
      • Make sure the butter is cold when making the streusel and refrigerate it while preparing the batter.
      A broken muffin on a white plate with a yellow smile cup and muffins in the background

      More Quick Breads You'll Enjoy

      • Several slices of Chocolate Cranberry Bread sists on a cream colored plate surrounded by Muffins, cranberries, a teal colored napkin, cup and saucer and a miniature pumpkin gourd.
        Chocolate Cranberry Quick Bread Recipe
      • Breakfast Scone
        Breakfast Scones - An Easy Morning Treat
      • Cranberry Orange Muffins in three sizes, mini, regular and Texas on a gray plate with a red napkin.
        A Cranberry Orange Muffin
      • A cut open Double Chocolate Truffled Muffin sits on a plate with a teacup next to it and more muffins in the background.
        Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins

      If you love these Pumpkin Muffins, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

      Pumpkin Muffins on a cooling rack with a blue and yellow cloth and yellow smiley face tea cup,,

      Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins

      Helen S. Fletcher
      Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins with pecan streusel couldn't be any easier. Two bowls and a few measuring utensils are all that are needed making this a perfect recipe for novice bakers or children.
      5 from 2 votes
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 25 minutes mins
      Cook Time 18 minutes mins
      Total Time 43 minutes mins
      Course Muffins
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 regular size
      Calories 284 kcal

      Equipment

      • Regular size muffin tins
      • Jumbo size muffin tins
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Pecan Streusel Topping

      • ⅓ cup brown sugar (65 grams)
      • ⅓ cup pecans (40 grams)
      • 3 tablespoons all-purpose flour (20 grams)
      • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
      • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter, refrigerator cold (28 grams)

      Pumpkin Muffins

      • ½ cup pecans (58 grams)
      • 1 ¼ cups all-purpose flour (175 grams)
      • ⅔ cup granulated sugar (130 grams)
      • 1 ½ teaspoon baking powder
      • ¾ teaspoon salt
      • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
      • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
      • ¼ teaspoon cloves
      • 1 large egg
      • ½ cup milk
      • ½ cup pumpkin puree
      • ½ cup canola oil or vegetable oil

      Instructions
       

      Pecan Streusel Topping

      • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line 12 regular size or 6 jumbo size muffin cups with paper liners. Set aside.
      • Place the pecans on a baking sheet and toast in the oven for about 5 to 7 minutes until fragrant and slightly browner. Cool completely before using.
      • Cut the cold butter into 6 to 8 pieces. Add all the ingredients to a processor bowl. Pulse to form coarse crumbs. Do not over processor a paste will form. Refrigerate until needed.
      • if making by hand, cut the nuts into very small pieces. Combine everything in a bowl and cut the butter in to make coarse crumbs. Refrigerate until needed.

      Pumpkin Muffins

      • Whisk together the flour, sugar, baking powder, salt, cinnamon, nutmeg, cloves in a medium size bowl.  Set aside.
      • Whisk together the egg, milk, pumpkin and oil.  Fold into the flour mixture with a rubber spatula just until no flour is visable. Add the nuts combine with a few strokes. Do not over mix.
      • Spoon into muffin cups a scant ¾ full.  Divide topping among the muffins.  Lightly press the topping into the muffin so that it adheres.  
      • Bake the regular size muffins for about 15 to 18 minutes or until a tester comes out clean.
        Bake the jumbo muffins for about 25 to 27 minutes or until a tester comes out clean.
      • Cool for about 5 minutes in the muffin pans and then remove them to a cooling rack. When removing the muffins, keep them right side up so the topping isn't disturbed.
      • Store, covered at room temperature for several days or freeze, well wrapped for several months. That at room temperature. They can be freshened by heating for 5 to 10 minutes in a 350°F oven.

      Notes

      There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
      As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
      _________________________________________________
      Toast the nuts for the maximum flavor. Cool completely before using them. 
      Don't cut the nuts into really small piece. They can be place in the processor first thing and pulsed to chop them coarsely. Remove them and continue to make the streusel.
      There will be pumpkin puree left over. What to do with it is always one of the questions I get. See above in the header of the article for some great ideas.
      Freeze the extra puree for later. Thaw in the refrigerator. 
      Don't over fill the muffin cups.
      While the muffin cups can be sprayed and the batter added to the without the paper cups, I prefer the paper cups because they help keep the batter from spreading over the top or sticking. 
      Make sure the butter is cold when making the streusel and refrigerate it while preparing the batter.
      Here are some suggestions for the leftover pumpkin puree:  Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways where one simple ingredient changes these from a dinner roll to a breakfast roll, super easy, quick and delicious Pumpkin Cake Donuts, and Pumpkin Cheesecake with Salted Caramel Sauce and the ever popular Updated Pumpkin Mousse Torte which removed the uncooked egg yolks in favor of a safer but no less fantastic dessert with the mousse sitting on top of a cheesecake layer. It can also be frozen for later use.  Thaw in the rerigerator.  

      Nutrition

      Serving: 12regular size muffinsCalories: 284kcalCarbohydrates: 31gProtein: 3gFat: 17gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 22mgSodium: 211mgPotassium: 96mgFiber: 1gSugar: 18gVitamin A: 1690IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 62mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

      Halloween Cookie Recipe

      Modified: Jul 3, 2025 · Published: Oct 10, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

      Four Halloween cookies on a white plate wih a glass of milk and several gourds in the background,

      These Halloween Cookies are easier than they might appear and add that special touch to his popular holiday. The fact the rolls can be made ahead and frozen at your leisure makes these even more appealing. Just slice and bake for a cookie sure to please. An added bonus is there is no colored icing or piping to apply.

      Four Halloween cookies on a white plate wih a glass of milk and several gourds in the background,

      I used my simple shortbread recipe because it's not only buttery but really easy to make. Because this is butter forward, European butter is a good choice here. When I first saw this idea on Smitten Kitchen's site I knew I had to try it. Two doughs are used - a full portion of the outer cookie and a half portion of the inner cookie that makes the design.

      Be sure to check out the Neapolitan Cookies, substituting orange for the red in the cookie and the Almost Oreo's which I made for another Halloween.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love This Recipe

      • It's a stunner of a cookie sure to elicit praise
      • Everyone will wonder how you got the cookie inside of the cookie
      • The cookie isn't difficult to make - it just looks that way
      • It can be made way ahead and frozen, thawed, cut and baked. Or, it can be baked and held in an airtight tin for a week. Either way, it's one less thing to do on Halloween.
      • Besides their interesting look, they really are tasty.

      Variations

      The great thing about this recipe is that it can be used for any holiday by changing out the colors and the inside cookie. For instance, white and a green shamrock for St. Patrick's Day, a red heart inside a pink, white or chocolate outer cookie for Valentine's day, a Christmas tree or Santa for Christmas - you get the idea.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Orange Dough

      Ingredients for the Orange Dough are all-purpose flour, granulated sugar, red and yellow gel colors, and unsalted butter.

      FRONT ROW: Red and yellow gel colors, unsalted butter

      BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, granulated sugar

      Chocolate Dough

      The Chocolate dough consists of Cinnamon, instant coffee, vanilla, black cocoa, Dutch cocoa, unsalted butter/ granulated sugar, all-purpose flour, and semisweet chocolate.

      FRONT ROW: Cinnamon, instant coffee or espresso, vanilla extract

      MIDDLE ROW: Black cocoa, unsalted butter, Dutch cocoa

      BACK ROW: Granulated Sugar, All-purpose flour, semisweet chocolate

      Applying the Sugar

      A bowl of sanding sugar and a smaller bowl of egg white on a marble table.

      Left to Right: Sanding Sugar and beaten egg white

      Key Ingredients

      European Butter is a good choice here for it's added butterfat which makes it more "buttery" and a firmer butter. Regular American butter is fine also. In either case it should be unsalted.

      Instant Coffee or Espresso adds a depth of flavor to chocolate which I almost always include it in chocolate recipes.

      The Vanilla Extract can be McCormick imitation as it is a waste to use pure vanilla in a heavily chocolate or spiced item. See my post on The Making of Vanilla for an indepth discussion of vanilla, the different types, pure or imitation, which imitation and much more.

      Black Cocoa is the most extreme Dutch cocoa there is. It's what makes Oreo cookies so black. However, it's best not to use all black cocoa as it can impart a bitter taste. It is usually used ¼ to ⅓ black to ¾ or ⅔ Dutch cocoa for the best effect. There are several online, I use Black Onyx but any good black cocoa is fine.

      My preferred chocolate is Callebaut #811 Semisweet chocolate callets. It can be found online.

      When using dyes for coloring food, it is best to use Gel Dyes as they are thicker, less runny, and the color are more intense. Also, when using a lot of color such as making the orange which requires both red and yellow, they don't add another liquid to the batter.

      Sanding Sugar is a special type of larger sugar crystals that won't melt in heat or cold. They come in different colors and are used for decoration.Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

      Be sure to see the recipe card below for exact ingredients and instructions.

      Step by Step Instructions

      The photographs show each of the doughs being made. The mini orange pumpkins inside the chocolate dough are shown in the step by step photographs. A whole recipe of chocolate dough is needed + ½ of the orange dough. To make the mini chocolate bats inside the orange dough the doughs are reversed but the same technique is followed. A whole recipe of orange dough + ½ recipe of chocolate dough is needed. The exact amounts are in the recipe card. Each of these combinations makes 45 cookies.

      Orange Dough

      The first collage for the orange dough shows the butter cut, in the processor, processed and the sugar added.

      Step 1. The butter should not be rock hard from the refrigerator but slightly softened to the point that it leaves an indentation when your finger is pressed in. It can be cut before or after it is slightly softened. The easiest way to cut the butter is to cut it in half legnthwise. Then cross cut it 8 or 9 times. Step 2. Add the flour to the processor bowl. Add the cut butter. Step 3. Process until the butter is indistinguishable. Step 4. Add the sugar.

      Red and Yellow gel dye is added to the processor bowl to make orange, the dough is processed, small pumpkins are cut from the rolled out dough, they are stood up and pressed together.

      Step 5. Add red and yellow gel dyes to the ingredients in the processor. Step 6. Process to complete the dough. If it is not orange enough add more dye and reprocess. Step 7. Roll the dough out. The depth doesn't make a difference as long as your cutter is a bit deeper. Cut the mini pumpkins out. Chill the dough in the fridge or freezer. The pumpkins should pop out if you press on them. Step 8. Line them up so they match and press them together so they stick. It is important to do this while they are cold and hard so they don't get out of shape. Press from each end. They should make a solid block of pumpkin shaped dough. Freeze until hard while making the chocolate dough. If using the mini bat cutter, do the same thing.

      The dry ingredients are added to the processor bowl, they are processed, the butter is added and processed until indistinguishable.

      Step 9. Add the dry ingredients to the processor bowl. Step 10. Process to mix. Step 11. Add the slightly softened butter (see above Step 1). Process until it is indistinguishable.

      The chocolate and vanilla mixure is added to the process and the dough is processed, a frozen log of pumpkins is partially enclosed in chocolate dough.

      Step 13. Mix the coffee and vanilla together. Melt the chocolate but do not let it get really hot. Cool it if it does. Add these to the dry ingredients. Step 14. Process until the dough mostly forms a ball. Empty the processor and knead the dough into a solid ball. Step 15. Remove the log of frozen pumpkins. Step 16. Shape a rope of chocolate dough about 1" to 1 ½" round the length of the pumpkin roll. Press it onto the side of the pumpkins. Repeat for the top and other side of the dough, pressing the ropes together to cover the pumpkin log.

      The partially covered orange pumpkin roll is turned over with a rope of dough in front of it, it is place on top of the exposed pumpkin roll and all is pressed together.

      Step 17. Gently turn the chocolate encased pumpkins over. Roll another rope of dough, cutting it to the length of the roll. Step 18. Place the roll on top of the pumpkins. Step 19. Press it down to cover the bottom, pressing the pieces of chocolate dough together. Step 20. Roll the dough back and forth lightly to smooth it out.

      The last collage shows the roll of dough in parchment paper, sanding sugar on parchment, the chocolate roll partially covered in sanding sugar and the cookies sliced on a tray.

      Step 21. Place the shaped dough at the end of a piece of parchment paper. Roll the shaped dough back and forth gently to further smooth out. Place on a baking sheet and chill until hard if baking immediately or wrap well in several pieces of foil and freeze. Step 22. When ready to bake, place sanding sugar on a large piece of parchment paper. Step 3. Beat the egg white with a fork until broken up and frothy. Lightly brush egg white onto all sides of the cold chocolate roll and roll in the sanding sugar. Step 24. Slice the rolls into ¼" to ⅓" cookies and place on a parchment lined baking sheet. If using a half sheet pan place 3 across and 5 deep on the tray. Bake as directed.

      Recipe FAQS

      What does the short in shortbread cookies refer to?

      "Short" refers to the texture of the pastry or cookie - it has a tender, crumbly texture and will break apart into chunks Wbecause a high volume of fat in the pastry keeps the gluten strands short, creating a flaky or crumbly item.

      What is the key ingredient in shortbread?

      Unsalted butter. It provides the fat that coats the gluten strands to keep them from stretching - hence short. The higher the fat content, the more crumbly and tender the cookie.

      What is the formula for shortbreads?

      One, two, three by weight not volume. One part sugar, two parts butter, three parts flour.

      Expert Tips

      • When making the whole batch of dough, it can be a lot for a normal size processor. Be sure to follow the instructions for the butter. Slightly soft but not completely softened. Also, rearrange the dough in the processor if it stalls. It will take several minutes to completely mix it.
      • Make the orange whole and half recipe of dough first and then the chocolate. No need to clean the bowl in between.
      • If you don't have black cocoa, just use all Dutch cocoa for the darkest color.
      • Be sure to work the doughs cold when rolling, cutting and stacking the pumpkins and bats.
      • Make sure the rolls of pumpkins and bats are frozen when wrapping them in the outer dough.
      • When applying the sanding sugar, do not use a lot of egg white. A light brushing should be enough for the sugar to stick.
      • The rolls can be frozen without the sanding sugar, well wrapped, for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight, then slice and finish with the sugar. Bake as called for.
      This photo shows the cookies lined up in rows on a white plate.

      If you love this Halloween Cookie Recipe, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

      Some other Cookies for your Consideration

      • Four Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies on a white plate with a brown rim.
        Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies
      • A platter of brightly Decorated Shortbread Cookies for Easter including ducks, flowers and Easter eggs.
        Easy Decorated Shortbread Cookies
      • Dulche de leche cookies with the five finishes - pecan, pecan and sugar, plain chocolate, plain cookie, with sanding sugar
        Dulce de Leche Cookies - Your Way
      • Almost Oreos with Black Onyx Cocoa
      Four Halloween cookies on a white plate wih a glass of milk and several gourds in the background,

      Halloween Cookies

      Helen S. Fletcher
      These Halloween Cookies are easier than they appear and add that special touch to his popular holiday. The fact the rolls can be made ahead and frozen at your leisure makes these even more appealing. An added bonus is there is no colored icing or piping to apply.
      No ratings yet
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 55 minutes mins
      Cook Time 13 minutes mins
      Chilling Time 30 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 38 minutes mins
      Course Cookies
      Cuisine American
      Servings 45 Cookies
      Calories 146 kcal

      Equipment

      • Food Processor
      • Mini Cookie cutters
      Prevent your screen from going dark

      Ingredients

      Orange Dough - Whole Batch

      • 1 cup unsalted butter (225 grams or 2 sticks)
      • 2 ¼ cups all-purpose flour (315 grams)
      • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
      • Yellow gel food color
      • Red gel food color

      Orange Dough - Half Batch

      • ½ cup unsalted butter (114 grams or 1 stick)
      • 1 ⅛ cup all-purpose flour (155 grams)
      • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
      • Yellow gel food color
      • Red gel food color

      Chocolate Dough - Whole Batch

      • 2 ounces semisweet chocolate (60 grams)
      • ½ teaspoon instant coffee or espresso
      • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
      • 2 cups all-purpose flour (280 grams)
      • ¼ cup Dutch Cocoa (22 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons Black cocoa (11 grams)

      Chocolate Dough - Half Batch

      • 1 ounce semisweet chocolate (30 grams)
      • ¼ teaspoon instant coffee or expresso
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla
      • 1 cup all-purpose flour (140 grams)
      • 2 tablespoons Dutch cocoa
      • 1 tablespoon Black cocoa

      Instructions
       

      Orange Dough

      • Roll the half batch of which dough goes in the center, cut out the mini cookies, form into a roll and freeze first. Make the opposite color dough for the outside of the cookie while it is freezing. The proceed as below.
      • Both the whole and half batch are made the same. The half batch will go together quicker than the whole batch. The whole batch may stall when processing. Break it apart into smaller pieces and re-process. It will take several minutes to completely mix.
      • The butter should be slightly softened but not as much as when creaming. Cut the butter in pieces as shown in the photos.
      • Place the flour in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse 2 or 3 times to mix
      • Add the butter to the processor and process until it is indistinguishable. Add the red and yellow gel food colorings.
      • Process until the dough comes together in a ball or at least large chunks that are evenly colored. The color should be more intense than desired as some of it will lighten when it is baked. Add more color as necessary.

      Chocolate Dough

      • There is no reason to clean the processor between the two doughs. Just wipe it out with a paper towel.
      • Both the full batch and half batch are made the same.
      • The butter should be slightly softened but not as much as when creaming. Cut the butter in pieces as shown in the photos.
      • Place the chocolate in a small bowl and microwave at half power until most of it is melted. Stir and set aside. The rest should melt. If it doesn't in a few minutes, microwave again briefly. The chocolate should be cooled before adding it.
      • Combine the instant coffee and vanilla in a small bowl and set aside.
      • Place the dry ingredients in the bowl of the processor. Pulse several times to mix.
      • Add the butter and process until it is indistinguishable.
      • Add the melted chocolate and vanilla and coffee mixture. Process to form a ball.

      Shaping the Cookies

        You need 1 full recipe of the dough for the outside + ½ recipe of the opposite color for the inside of the cookie. Please refer to the photos which makes this easy to understand. Each of these combinations makes about 45 cookies.

        • Each cookie takes a larger amount of dough for the outside of the cookie and a smaller amount of the opposite color for the inside.
        • Roll the smaller amount of dough out between wax paper. It doesn't matter how thick it is as long as it doesn't come to the top of the cookie cutter. I rolled mine about ¼" to ⅓". Chill the dough if it is really soft, otherwise continue.
        • Cut the mini cookies out. Freeze them. When they are hard they will pop out with a gentle push. Make sure they stay frozen. Stack the up as you go along making sure the match perfectly. Once in a stack, push them together to make a solid cookie roll. Freeze solid before proceeding.
        • Shape a rope of the outside dough about 1" to 1 ½" round the length of the inside frozen cookie roll. Press it onto the side of the frozen cookie roll,. Repeat for the top and other side of the dough using as many ropes as needed to cover it, pressing the ropes together to cover the frozen inside cookie log.
        • Gently turn the whole thing over and cover the bottom with another rope or as necessary. Briefly roll the log to smooth it out.
        • Place it on parchment paper and roll it in the parchment to further smooth it. place it on a baking sheet and chill it if cutting immediately or chill it, wrap it well in foil and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge before preparing for baking.
        • Pour sanding sugar on a piece of parchment paper the length of the log of dough. Beat the egg white until foamy. Very lightly brush it onto the whole of the cookie roll. Roll the log in the sugar.
        • Cut the cookies ¼" thick and place on parchment line baking sheets. If using a half sheet pan place them 3 across the short side and 5 down the long side.
        • Bake at 350°F for 10 to 12 minutes. Cool on the parchment before removing. Store in an air tight container for 7 to 10 days.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        ____________________________________________________
        When making the whole batch of dough, it can be a lot for a normal size processor. Be sure to follow the instructions for the butter. Slightly soft but not completely softened. Also, rearrange the dough in the processor if it stalls. It will take several minutes to completely mix it.
        Make the orange whole and half recipe of dough first and then the chocolate. No need to clean the bowl in between. 
        If you don't have black cocoa, just use all Dutch cocoa for the darkest color.
        Be sure to work the doughs cold when rolling, cutting and stacking the pumpkins and bats.
        Make sure the rolls of pumpkins and bats are frozen when wrapping them in the outer dough.
        When applying the sanding sugar, do not use a lot of egg white. A light brushing should be enough for the sugar to stick.
        The rolls can be frozen without the sanding sugar, well wrapped, for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight, then slice and finish with the sugar. Bake as called for.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 45cookiesCalories: 146kcalCarbohydrates: 18gProtein: 2gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 16mgSodium: 2mgPotassium: 48mgFiber: 1gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 190IUCalcium: 7mgIron: 1mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe

        Modified: Sep 1, 2025 · Published: Oct 3, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 32 Comments

        A plate of turnovers featuring the Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe.

        This truly Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe featuring Fruit Filled Turnovers is a type of easy laminated dough made with sour cream that is a close relative to puff pastry requiring only two turns for a tender, flaky crust enclosing all sorts of goodies sweet and savory. In the past, this has been referred to as Mock Puff Pastry.

        A plate of turnovers featuring the Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe.

        This pastry is not only easy it is flaky but more tender than normal puff pastry. I have filled mine with the easy but really flavorful prune filling from the Gateau Breton and the Solo Apricot Filling. I usually have a couple of different kinds of their pie and pastry fillings in my pantry as they are so much better than jams or preserves which can leak when heated. The Solo Fillings, which come in different flavors are bake-proof. In the professional world we know that means they will not leak when baked.

        The Solo Fillings can be found on Amazon as well a grocery shelves. I haven't used all of them, but those I have I like with the exception of the Almond Filling.

        Apricot and Raspberry Solo Cake and Pastry filling,

        Here are some other laminated pastries you might enjoy: Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries, Pithiviers Made With Blitz Puff Pastry, Apple Caramel Hand Pies, Blitz Cronuts and Mille-Feuille (Napoleon Pastry). For a change of pace pastry that's super easy to make to to Easier "Danish Pastry Recipe.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        What is Laminated Dough

        Laminated dough (think puff pastry, croissant, cronuts, and kouign amann to name a few) consists of very thin layers of dough alternating with butter. The key with lamination is to keep everything really cold. Really cold butter, and sour cream in this case, water in others will keep the layers separated. In addition the butter needs to be in fairly large pieces before adding the sour cream so the butter pieces stay large. My post on Laminated Doughs has a wealth of information. American vs. European Butter is an indepth look at the differences between the two.

        To achieve the desired multi layer of dough and butter, the dough is rolled out and then folded upon itself several times. Usually, the more folds, to a point, the more layers and the flakier the dough.

        In the oven, the heat melts the layers of butter creating steam which then pushes the dough up to make the layers that define this type of pastry.

        Laminated doughs made with water will be crisper than those made with sour cream but both will rise beautifully as long as the butter does not become one with the dough. If at any time it starts to soften when working with it, place it on a pan lined with parchment and refrigerate or freeze to firm.

        This is a fast version that doesn't require butter blocks but still keeps the dough and butter separate. This Sour cream version is a joy to work with, rolls out easily and bakes to many layers as seen in the photo below with only two turns of the dough. Had another one or two been made, there would be even more layers.

        Multi-layer of laminated dough baked for the Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe

        Variations

        There are so many ways to fill these turnovers. The Solo fillings are quick and easy but any of the many fillings used in the Marvelous Variable Kolache will work very well. Almost any filling will work as long as it is thick and bake proof. The turnovers are generously filled with ¼ cup each so jams or preserves won't work here. In addition to those, check out the Apple Carmel Handpies which use Werther caramels and a spiced apple filling.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Ingredients for the pastry include bread flour, sour cream, unsalted butter, baking powder and salt.

        FRONT ROW: Salt, baking powder

        MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

        BACK ROW: Bread flour, sour cream

        Key Ingredients

        Unsalted Butter is called for and and I prefer regular American butter when making laminated doughs. This butter stays harder than the higher fat European butter which softens much faster when rolling out.

        Bread Flour is used for its stregnth and crispness. All things being equal, I find it rises higher than all-purpose flour and produces a crisper, flakier pastry.

        Salt enhances the taste of the baked pastry.

        Sour cream sometimes has liquid in it. Make sure to pour that off and only use the firm part.

        Fillings for Turnovers

        • Prune Filling from Gateau Breton - 2 ½ times for 8 turnovers
        • Pineapple Filling from Kolache - 2 times for 8 turnovers
        • Apricot Filling from Kolache - 2 times for 8 turnovers
        • Cream Cheese Filling from Kolache - 2 times for 8 turnovers (may have some left)
        • Cherry Filling from Kolache - 3 times for 8 turnovers
        • Fig Filling from Kolache - 2 times for 8 turnovers
        • Solo Fillings - 2 cans for 8

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        If at any point the dough begins to soften, chill it in the refrigerator or freezer before moving on

        The first collages shows the butter cut, dry ingredients in the mixing bowl, butter added and the butter cut in.

        Step 1. Cut the very cold butter in about 8 pieces per stick. If prepping the remainder of the recipe, refrigerate the butter. Step 2. Place the dry ingredients in the bowl of a mixer. Step 3. Add the cold butter. Step 4. With the mixer set on low, beat the butter in leaving large pieces.

        Sour cream is added to the mixing bowl, large pieces of butter  are seen, the dough is poured onto the counter, and finally pushed together to make a cohesive dough.

        Step 5. Add the sour cream to the mixer. Step 6. Add 2 tablespoons of water and beat on low to form a large crumbly dough. Step 7. Pour the dough onto a work area. Step 8. Push it together to form a cohesive block of dough.

        The dough is spread out, rolled out, the top and bottom brought to the center and finally folded over.

        Step 9. To make rolling out easier, flatten the dough in about 3 or 4 places with the rolling pin. Step 10. Roll the dough out to about 16" x8". Step 11. Fold the top and bottom to the center, leaving about a ½" gap. Step 12. Fold the top down to make a neat package.

        This collage shows the pastry turned 90°, rolled out into a large square, a 6" cake round used as a guide, 4 6" rounds cut out.

        Step 13. Turn the pastry 90° with the open side to the right and repeat the rolling and folding above one more time. Step 14. Divide the dough in half (about 300 grams each). Roll one half into a 12 ½"x 12 ½" square. Step 15. Using a 6" circle cut 4 rounds out of the dough. Step 16. The cut rounds.

        One 6" round is place on the table, filled in the center, the top brought down to cover and the seam sealed with a fork.

        Step 17. Place a round of dough on the work table. Step 18. Fill with ¼ cup of the desired filling in the center of the dough about ¾" in from the edges. Wet the edges of the pastry with water. Step 19. Bring the top of the dough down to cover the filling and even with the bottom of the pastry. Step 20. Seal the turnover with the tines of a fork. Chill until cold throughout. When throughly cold, cut vents in the top of the dough and brush with egg wash as seen below.

        Pastry rolled to 12"x14",divided into 4, filling placed on one piece and the dough brought down to cover the filling.

        Step 21. Roll the second half of the pastry into a 14 ½ x12 ½ inch rectangle. Trim to 14 x 12. Step 22. Divide the dough into four 7"x6" rectangles. Step 23. Place ¼ cup filling, just below the center of the pastry. Wet the edges with water. Step 24. Bring the top of the pastry down, making sure there is at least ½" without filling all around the four sides.

        The last collages, shows the filled pastry edges sealed with a fork, brushed with egg wash, vents slit and a baked turnover to illustrate the flaky layers.

        Step 25. Seal the seams with the tines of a fork and refrigerate until very cold throughout. Step 26. Remove from the fridge and brush with a beaten egg. Step 27. Cut 2 vents in the top of the turnover. Bake as directed. Step 28. After the turnovers are baked, the rise of the laminated dough can be seen.

        Recipe FAQS

        Why are these pastries called turnovers?

        Because the top of the dough is turned over the filling.

        Can this pastry be frozen?

        Yes, either just as the pastry, well wrapped in foil and placed in a freezer bag for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight to use.

        What is the French term for laminated dough?

        This French laminated dough is also known as pâte feuilletée which means “dough of leaves”. This technique of laminated dough got its start in Vienna, possibly with a little help from the ancient pastries of Morocco.

        Expert Tips

        • Cold and clean are two of the most important points when making laminated doughs. If the butter softens at any time, refrigerate or freeze briefly to get it cold again. Make sure if any dough sticks to the rolling pin, to clean it off with a paper towel immediately. If you continue to roll, more pastry will stick to the pin and the pastry can tear.
        • Refrigerate the filled pastries before cutting the vents on top and egg washing. This will make cleaner cuts for a better looking pastry. This should be done just before baking.
        • The fillings are given for 8 pastries. Reduce the amount if using more than one filling.
        • These keep well at room temperature, uncovered for a day or two.
        • The pastry can be made in its entirety and frozen well wrapped for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight to use.
        • The completed pastries can also be frozen well wrapped for up to 3 months without the egg wash. Egg wash them just before baking. Either thaw them overnight and bake cold or bake them from the freezer adding additional time.
        This photo shows the turnovers on a baking sheet with one opened to see the apricot filling.

        More Laminated Pastry Recipes you might enjoy

        • Croissant
          Croissants - Queen of Breads in France
        • Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries
          Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries
        • Pithiviers made with Blitz Puff Pastry
          Pithiviers made with Blitz Puff Pastry
        • Three Apple Caramel Handpies on a white plate.
          Apple Caramel Hand Pies

        If you love this Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

        A plate of turnovers featuring the Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe.

        Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe

        Helen S. Fletcher
        This truly Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe is a type of easy laminated dough made with sour cream that is a close relative to puff pastry requiring only two turns for a tender, flaky crust enclosing all sorts of goodies sweet and savory
        5 from 4 votes
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 45 minutes mins
        Cook Time 25 minutes mins
        Chilling time 1 hour hr
        Total Time 2 hours hrs 10 minutes mins
        Course Pastry
        Cuisine American
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 340 kcal
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe

        • 1 cup unsalted butter (225 grams or 2 sticks)
        • 1 ¾ cups bread flour (245 grams)
        • ¾ teaspoon table salt
        • ½ teaspoon baking powder
        • ½ cup sour cream, cold (114 grams)
        • 2 tablespoons water
        • 1 large egg, well beaten

        SEE THE POST FOR FILLINGS AND AMOUNTS

        Instructions
         

        Amazing Pastry Dough Recipe

        • Cut the butter into about ¾" pieces. Keep in the refrigerator until needed. The butter needs to be very cold.
        • Place the dry ingredients in the bowl of a mixer fitted with the paddle attachment. Mix briefly to combine.
        • Add the chunks of cold butter. Mix on low to break the butter up but keep it in large pieces.
        • Add the sour cream and mix to bring it together. Add the water and mix to form large crumbs.
        • Pour the crumbs onto a work surface. Push the crumbs together to form a block of dough. Knead 3 or 4 times to smooth it out, keeping the butter in large pieces.
        • Press a rolling pin into the dough about 3 or 4 times several inches apart from top to bottom. These "hills and valleys" will help roll out the dough more evenly,
        • Sprinkle the surface lightly with flour. Roll the dough to about a 16" x 8" rectangle. If the pastry begins to soften, chill it until firm.
        • Brush off any flour and fold the top and bottom to the center of the pastry, leaving a ½" channel.
        • Fold the top over the bottom, creating a book like pastry. Turn the pastry 90° with the fold to the right.
        • Lightly sprinkle the surface with flour and repeat the rolling and folding. Wrap in plastic wrap and chill until cold through out, overnight or up to 3 days.

        For the half moon pastries

        • With the pastry parallel to the edge of the surface divide the pastry in half (approximately 300 grams). Refrigerate ½ half of the pastry.
        • Roll ½ of the pastry into a 12 ½" x 12 ½" square. With a 6" round guide (a saucer or cake round is fine) cut 4 rounds out of the pastry. Refrigerate. Repeat with the second half of the pastry. Chilling it also.
        • Place one round in front of you and fill with ¼ cup of filling of your choice. Wet the edges of the pastry with water and bring the top over the filling matching the edges. Seal with a fork. Refrigerate. Repeat for the other 4 rounds.
        • When ready to bake, preheat the oven to 375°F. Place 4 cold pastries on a parchment lined baking sheet and brush them with the beaten egg. Cut two vents in each pastry.
        • It is best to bake one sheet at a time for about 20 to 25 minutes until medium brown. Refrigerate the second tray until baking.
        • Serve lukewarm or room temperature. These reheat in the microwave for 20 seconds.
        • Store at room temperature uncovered for a day or two. Do not cover or they will become soggy.

        Rectanglar Turnovers

        • Roll one half of the dough into a 12 ½" x 14 ½" rectangle. Trim to 12" x 14". cut the 12" side into 12" x 6" pieces. Cross cut to 7" x 6". You will have 4 pieces of pastry that are 7"x 6". Refrigerate.
        • Place ¼ cup filling of your choice slightly below the middle of the pastry. Wet the edges and bring the top of the pastry down over the filling making sure there is about ½" without any filling round the 4 sides. Using the tines of a fork, seal the crust all the way around. Refrigerate.
        • When ready to bake preheat the oven to 375°F. Place 4 pastries on two parchment lined baking sheets. Brush with the beaten egg and cut 2 vents in each pastry. Bake for 20 to 25 minutes until medium brown. It is best to bake one tray at a time. Refrigerate the second tray until bakiog.
        • Cool to luke warm . Serve lukewarm or room temperature. These reheat in the microwave for 20 seconds.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        ____________________________________________________
        Cold and clean are two of the most important points when making laminated doughs. If the butter softens at any time, refrigerate or freeze briefly to get it cold again. Make sure if any dough sticks to the rolling pin, to clean it off with a paper towel immediately. If you continue to roll, more pastry will stick to the pin and the pastry can tear.
        Refrigerate the filled pastries before cutting the vents on top and egg washing. This will make cleaner cuts for a better looking pastry. This should be done just before baking.
        The fillings are given for 8 pastries. Reduce the amount if using more than one filling.
        These keep well at room temperature, uncovered for a day or two.
        The pastry can be made in its entirety and frozen well wrapped for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight to use.
        The completed pastries can also be frozen well wrapped for up to 3 months without the egg wash. Egg wash them just before baking. Either thaw them overnight and bake cold or bake them from the freezer adding additional time. 
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 13servingsCalories: 340kcalCarbohydrates: 21gProtein: 5gFat: 27gSaturated Fat: 16gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 93mgSodium: 262mgPotassium: 61mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 833IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 44mgIron: 0.4mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Outback Steakhouse Bread

        Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Sep 23, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 25 Comments

        Different ways to shape the Outback Steakhouse Bread are shown.

        This incredibly easy Outback Steakhouse Bread dark with honey, molasses, whole wheat and bread flour has become a staple in my house due to its fantastic flavor and soft texture.

        So often bread has a reputation of being finicky or difficult and this is anything but. In my experience, this bread is like no other and a great place to start if bread isn't your thing. Basically you just put everything in the mixing bowl, mix for 3 to 4 minutes and it's done. Bread doesn't get much easier.

        Different ways to shape the Outback Steakhouse Bread are shown.

        While I free formed the rolls and buns, I used small individual pans to shape the twisted bread and the triple roll bread. Individual bread loaves are a great accompaniment and who doesn't like their own loaf of bread? Before you ask, the pans are made by Tiawudi 6 Pack Mini Loaf Pans, Non-Stick Baking Bread Pan, Carbon Steel Bakeware and can be found online.

        Some other favorite yeast breads include: Wine and Cheese Baguettes with their silky texture tasting of both wine and cheese, Sweet and Hot Red Pepper Bread, No Knead Bread, No Knead Sicilian Olive Bread, and Garlic Oregano Cracker Bread which is positively addictive and the Homemade Breakfast Stromboli which is a perfect stuffed bread as well as the Muffaletta Bread which includes a layered sandwich. For one of the fastest and most delicious breads around see English Muffin Bread. Another must try is Brazilian Cheese Bread Recipe.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Perfect for Experienced or Novice Bread Bakers

        • This is an uncomplicated mix, rise, shape and bake recipe.
        • The dough is flexible and can rest in the fridge for up to 3 days after rising before shaping and baking.
        • Honey and molasses while imparting phenomenal flavor guarantee a soft dough that rises easily.
        • Shaping it is easy and quick.
        • Run out of time before shaping and baking? Simply freeze the dough after the first rise. Thaw in the refrigerator, shape and bake as desired.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Ingredients for the bread are whole wheat flour, bread flour, water, butter, molasses, honey, cocoa ,yeast and salt.

        FRONT ROW: Cocoa, instant yeast, salt

        MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, molasses, honey

        BACK ROW: Whole wheat flour, bread flour, water

        Key Ingredients

        Cocoa can be natural or Dutch process. While it is only used to deepen the color of the dough, it can omitted but the bread won't look as good. Dutch process cocoa will yield a darker color. 

        Whole Wheat Flour - Either regular or white whole wheat flour can be used. I prefer the regular for its stronger taste. If using the white cocoa is a must to color it. 

        Bread Flour is used with its higher gluten percentage that gives more lift to yeasted breads both sweet and non sweet.

        Instant yeast is preferable but active dry may be substituted. The rising time will increase.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        The first collage shows the yeast on top of the water, the molasses and honey added ,the dry ingredients in a mixing bowl and the butter and liquds added.

        Step 1. Add the yeast to lukewarm water. I do this whether the yeast is instant or active dry yeast because I have found it incorporates better. There have been times I have seen the little yeast granules unincorporated. Step 2. Stir in the honey and molasses. Step 3. Add both flours, cocoa and salt to the mixing bowl. Step 4. Add the softened butter.

        This collage shows the bread dough beaten, shaped into a ball, put in a container to rise and a log of dough.

        Step 5. Fit the mixer with a dough hook if possible. Mix on low until everything is moistened. Raise the speed of the mixer as recommended by your machine and mix for 3 or 4 minutes until the dough forms. It will be soft and a bit sticky. That is how it should be. Step 6. Shape it into a ball. Step 7. Spray a container at least three times as big as the dough with a non-stick baking release and place the dough in the container. Cover directly with plastic wrap and place the lid on. Mark the time on the lid. Allow it to rise and either shape it at once or deflate the dough, recover and refrigerate for up to 3 days. Step 8. Divide the dough into 8 140 gram pieces if using the small individual pans. Shape 140 grams of dough into a log.

        Shapes for the bread dough include a single loaf and two ropes of dough forming a twisted loaf

        Step 9. Place the log of dough into a sprayed mini pan. Step 10. Divide another 140 gram piece of dough into two pieces of of dough (about 70 grams each) into ropes slightly longer than the pan ou are using. . Step 11. Pinch the ends together at the top. Step 12. Twist them together.

        The final collage shows the twisted bread  in an individual pan, three pieces of dough and the baked loaves in their pans.

        Step 13. Place the twisted loaf in an individual pan that has been sprayed with a non-stick baking release, tucking the ends underneath. Step 14. Divide the called for amount of dough into 3 equal pieces. Step 15. Shape them into balls and place them in a sprayed pan. Press them down to fill the pan. Step 16. Let the baked bread cool for about 10 minutes and then turn out of the pans onto a cooling rack.

        Recipe FAQS

        Why is my bread dense?

        There are several things that can cause this. Not enough liquid. Tacky or slightly sticky doughs make a softer crumb. The second reason is the dough has not be beaten or kneaded enough resulting in under developed gluten in which the dough cannot rise enough. Last, old yeast that has lost some of it's power.

        How can I tell if my yeast is good?

        Stir a teaspoon of yeast and a pinch of sugar into ¼ cup lukewarm water. Let it sit for about 10 minutes. It should have lots of bubbles on top look foamy and frothy and smell a bit of wheat or beer.

        How should yeast be stored?

        After opening, keep yeast in the refrigerator for 4 to 6 months. It can also be kept in the freezer indefinitely.

        Expert Tips

        • This is a somewhat sticky dough. Don't add additional flour which will make it dense and not soft.
        • Beat the dough at least 3 to 4 minutes if using a mixer. Do not under beat or the gluten won't be developed enough and the dough will not be as soft.
        • I have started adding instant yeast to my water or liquid even though I know most people don't. I notice every once in a while, small granules of instant yeast were showing in risen dough.
        • I use Grandma's Molasses because it isn't sulphured. If using another, use the dark molasses but not blackstrap.
        • To make it even tastier, refrigerate the dough at least overnight or up to 3 days. The cold dough is also easier to shape.
        • Double Pan the rolls when baking to prevent over browning of the bottoms.
        Another photo of the finished breads including the twisted, plain, 3 roll, a dinner roll and a bun,

        Sweet and Savory Yeast Breads

        • Different finishes on breads yielding different looking rolls.
          Glazes for Baked Goods
        • This photo shows a variety of round pizza crusts and a flatbread crust with a tomato and sauteed veggies in the background.
          Homemade Pizza Dough
        • Two Brioche Rolls are on a plate with a jar of jam.
          Super Fast and Easy Brioche Rolls
        • A dark chocolate German Chocolate roll intertwined with a coconut pecan fillig sits on a white, green and yellow plate.
          German Chocolate Sweet Rolls
        Different ways to shape the Outback Steakhouse Bread are shown.

        Outback Steakhouse Bread

        Helen S. Fletcher
        This incredibly easy Outback Steakhouse Bread dark with honey, molasses, whole wheat and bread flour has become a staple in my house due to its fantastic flavor and soft texture. This is an uncomplicated mix, rise, shape and bake recipe. Great for experienced as well as novice bread bakers.
        4.84 from 6 votes
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 20 minutes mins
        Rising and shaping 3 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
        Total Time 3 hours hrs 40 minutes mins
        Course Bread
        Cuisine American
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 335 kcal
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        • 1 ⅓ cups water, warm
        • 2 ½ teaspoons instant yeast
        • ¼ cup dark molasses
        • ¼ cup honey
        • 2 ⅓ cups bread flour (330 grams)
        • 1 ½ cups whole wheat flour (220 grams)
        • 1 tablespoon Dutch-process cocoa
        • 2 teaspoons salt
        • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter, softened (60 grams)

        Instructions
         

        • Spray pans or mold if using.
        • Stir the yeast into the warm water. Add the molasses and honey, stir well. Let sit while you assemble the rest of the ingredients.
        • Add the bread flour, whole wheat flour, cocoa and salt to a mixing bowl.
        • Pour the liquid ingredients over the dry ingredients.
        • Add the softened butter and mix on low until everything is moistened. Raise the speed of the mixer to whatever your machine calls for when kneading and beat for 3 to 4 minutes until the dough is completely mixed. It will be soft and a bit sticky.
        • Spray a container at least twice the volume of the dough and place the dough in it. Cover directly with plastic wrap and put a lid on it if there is one. Mark the time. Let it rise for about 2 hours until doubled in bulk. Either use it immediately or refrigerate for up to 3 days. It will be easier to shape if cold.
        • To shape the dough into a plain loaf, weigh out 140 grams of dough and form it into a log shape. Roll it back and forth under you hands until it is smooth and slightly longer than the pan you are using. Place it in a sprayed pan and flatten it slightly.
        • To shape the dough into a twist. Weight 140 grams of dough and divide it in half (70 grams each). Roll each piece into a rope, slightly longer than the pan. Pinch the two pieces of dough together at the top and twist the ropes together. Place in a sprayed pan, tucking the top and bottom under. Flatten slightly.
        • To Shape the triple roll bread, divide the 140 grams into three balls (about 45 grams each). Roll each piece into a smooth ball and place them in a sprayed pan touching each other. Flatten slightly.
        • If making plain rolls, divide the dough into 12 pieces of 85 grams each. Shape them into round rolls. Place them on a parchment lined baking sheet and let them rise for about 2 hours.
        • Place the pans on a sheet pan and cover with a cloth. Allow to rise until doubled, about 2 hours. About 15 minutes before they are done, preheat the oven to 350°F. Bake about 20 to 25 minutes until lightly colored. A digital thermometer will read 200°F when done. The rolls should be double panned to prevent the bottoms from over browning.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        ________________________________________________
        This is a somewhat sticky dough. Don't add additional flour which will make it dense and not soft.
        Beat the dough at least 3 to 4 minutes if using a mixer after the initial mix. Do not under beat or the gluten won't be developed enough and the dough will not be as soft.
        I have started adding instant yeast to my water or liquid even though I know most people don't. I notice every once in a while small granules of instant yeast that were undissolved.   
        I use Grandma's Molasses because it isn't sulphured. If using another, use the dark molasses but not blackstrap. 
        To make it even tastier, refrigerate the dough at least overnight or up to 3 days. The cold dough is also easier to shape.
        This is an uncomplicated mix, rise, shape and bake recipe.
        The dough is flexible and can rest in the fridge for up to 3 days after rising before shaping and baking.
        Honey and molasses while imparting phenomenal flavor guarantee a soft dough that rises easily.
        Shaping it is easy and quick. 
        Double Pan the rolls when baking to prevent over browning of the bottoms.
        Run out of time before shaping and baking? Simply freeze the dough after the first rise. Thaw in the refrigerator, shape and bake as desired.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 8servingsCalories: 335kcalCarbohydrates: 61gProtein: 9gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 15mgSodium: 592mgPotassium: 325mgFiber: 5gSugar: 17gVitamin A: 178IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 40mgIron: 2mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins

        Modified: May 12, 2026 · Published: Sep 16, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 18 Comments

        A cut open Double Chocolate Truffled Muffin sits on a plate with a teacup next to it and more muffins in the background.

        Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins are a riff on the Olympic Chocolate Muffin recipe that took Paris by storm during the Paris Games. The recipe has been printed in several venues but it is in grams which is a problem for many in America - unfortunately. I have translated the weights into volume and omitted several of the ingredients in favor of my interpretation.

        Having said that the cakey part of the muffin is outstanding and so, so easy to make. No mixer is needed and it comes together in literally minutes.

        A cut open Double Chocolate Truffled Muffin sits on a plate with a teacup next to it and more muffins in the background.

        Just look at that truffle filling in the middle of the muffin. This is not only one of the easiest recipes in my muffin repertoire but is child friendly and a great (but possibly messy) project to make with young ones.

        If the muffins are frozen, which they certainly may be, the truffle filling will be more set than it is if eaten fresh. In either case, it is outstanding.

        Coffee and vanilla have an affinity for chocolate either separately or together. You can see it used in my Chocolate Raspberry Truffle Cake, German Chocolate Sweet Rolls, Gluten Free Turtle Cake with Salted Caramel, Mocha Kahlua Brownies and my Chocolate Cake to name a few. You'll also enjoy the collection of recipes in 7 Quick Wins for Mother's Day. And if you love muffins, you need to check out The Only Muffin Recipes You'll Ever Need.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        So What's Different

        I omitted the additional chocolate chips and chunks in the batter because after baking, they mostly melted and I couldn't find them. I did add the chocolate chunks on top. They are a great topping and look fantastic.

        The 1 tablespoon + 1 teaspoon of dry milk powder was omitted because it didn't add anything significant to the recipe and I didn't want everyone to be stuck with a box of milk powder they probably wouldn't use again.

        I also used the truffle filling we used at the bakery to make our Chocolate Chocolate Truffles. What could be a better filling and it's a snap to make.

        Due to converting to volume there are minor differences in some of the ingredients but they are insignificant and make no difference in the finished muffin.

        My muffins did not sit for 30 minutes as did the original ones since they use baking powder. Today's baking powder is double acting. That simply means that half of it starts acting when moisture is added to it and the remainder when it goes into the oven which is why it needs to bake immediately to get the maximum effect. If it sits for any length of time the first half dissipates so half of the rising power is gone.

        The muffin on the left was baked immediately, the one on the right waited for 30 minutes before baking. The one on the left will be lighter, the one on the right more dense.

        Muffins or Cupcakes?

        It's easy to confuse the two when, like this one, it seems more like a cupcake than a muffin. So what's the difference?

        Not much! Muffins are sometimes savory or less sweet than a cupcake. They can be topped with crumbs, streusel, powdered or other sugar. The main difference is how they are made. Muffins are the easiest baked items to put together and get into the oven with very little effort.

        In most, but not all, cases muffins require no mixer - just a bowl and a whisk. It is referred to as the muffin mix. Even cakes that are referred to as blended use the "muffin mix" method.

        How to Fill Muffins or Cupcakes

        Cut a hole out of the center of the muffins. Save the removed part. I like to hollow mine out further using a spoon to get more filling into the muffin or cupcake. Spoon or pipe in the filling and replace the top. This is the method I use below.

        With a Piping Bag. Fit a piping bag with a plain tip about ½" wide. Fill the piping bag and push the tip into the center of the muffin or cupcake and pipe in the filling. In this case, you don't cut out the center. The downside of this method is you generally don't get as much filling.

        Ingredients

        Chocolate Truffle Filling

        Ingredients for the truffle fillng are chocolate, heavy cream, sugar, butter and vanilla.

        FRONT ROW: Granulated sugar, butter, vanilla

        BACK ROW: Semisweet or bittersweet chocolate, heavy cream

        Double Chocolate Muffins

        Ingredients for the Double Chocolate Muffins include all-purpose flour, Dutch cocoa, baking powder, baking soda, instant coffee, salt, brown sugar, milk, oil, eggs, sour cream vanilla extract and chocolate chunks.

        FRONT ROW: Baking soda, baking powder, instant coffee, salt

        SECOND ROW: Vanilla extract, eggs, chocolate chunks

        THIRD ROW: Dutch cocoa, sour cream, whole milk

        FOURTH ROW: All-purpose flour, canola oil, brown sugar

        Key Ingredients

        • The chocolate I use is Callebaut Calets #811. While it looks like chocolate chips it is made like that so it melts easily without any chopping. There are no additives it is pure chocolate. Prior to the calets we used to have to chop 10# blocks. Sometimes at the bakery we would chop 10 blocks at a time. Not fun!
        • Dutch processed cocoa is important in this recipe for its dark, rich flavor. Switching it out for anything else can adversely effect the outcome since the leavening agents are different for natural cocoa and will not be effective.
        • Dark or light brown sugar may be used interchangeably. I used dark for this recipe.
        • Whole milk was also used per the original recipe. I didn't test with any other milk.
        • Sour cream and oil add to the richness and moistness of the muffin.
        • Either instant coffee or instant espresso may be used. Both enhance the flavor of the chocolate.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients and instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        Truffle Filling

        For step by step photographs see my post on Chocolate Chocolate Truffles

        Double Chocolate Muffins

        This collage shows the flour being sifted, the cocoa sifted on top, the brown sugar added and the dry ingredients whisked together.

        Step 1. Sift the flour into a large bowl. Step 2. Sift the cocoa, salt, baking powder and baking soda over the flour. Step 3. Add the brown sugar to the dry ingredients and mix in completely. I find this easiest to do with my hands. I can squish the lumps of brown sugar that sometimes don't want to blend in. Step 4. Whisk the dry ingredients together.

        The coffee and vanilla mixed in a small bowl, the liquid ingredients in a bowl,mixed together and the batter completed.

        Step 5. Stir the instant coffee and vanilla together to dissolve the coffee. Step 6. Place the milk, oil, eggs, sour cream and coffee mixture in a separate bowl. Step 7. Whisk to combine. Step 8. Add to the dry ingredients and stir or fold together with a rubber spatula until the batter is completely mixed.

        This collage shows the unbaked muffins in a muffin pan, then topped with chocolate chunks, baked and the center being cut out.

        Step 9. Drop the batter into paper lined jumbo muffin cups with a #8 disher/scooper or ½ cup of batter into each paper. Setp 10. Top with chocolate chunks. Step 11. Baked muffins in the tins. Step 12. Using a small paring knife, cut down at an angle towards the center about ½" from the edge of the muffin. Go completely around the muffin. Lift out and set aside in tact.

        This last collages shows the spoon enlarging the hole for the filling, the hole, the filling in the hole and the top put back on the muffin.

        Step 13. Enlarge the hole by scooping out more of the muffin with a spoon. Step 14. The hole as it is completed. Step 15. Pipe the truffle filling into the hole almost to the top. Step 16. Replace the top on the muffin and press it down into the truffle filling so it is even on the top.

        Recipe FAQS

        What is the worst thing to do when making muffins?

        It depends upon the muffin. If using the muffin mix method which is made up of two bowls - one to hold the dry ingredients and one to hold the liquid ones, over mixing can be a problem. The dry and liquid ingredients are whisked in different bowls. They are then combined by stirring together. Just stir or fold together until all the ingredients are mixed. Don't over mix. However, some muffins are made using the creaming method and a mixer. Follow the instructions for whatever one you are making.

        Does the cocoa used make a difference?

        Absolutely. Dutch cocoa gives makes a darker colored and deeper flavored muffin than natural cocoa. Black cocoa gives even more but the cocoa has to be reduced if subbing for another cocoa as it can produce a bitter flavor.

        Are muffins better for you than cupcakes

        It depends upon the muffin or cupcake but in general they are since they aren't frosted as are cupcakes.

        Storage and Freezing

        These muffins keep well at room temperature for a couple of days, covered.

        To freeze, wrap each muffin well and freeze up to three months. Thaw at room temperature for about 1 ½ to 2 hours. The texture of the truffle center will be more firm but just as delicious.

        Expert Tips

        • Don't over mix the batter. Use a spoon or rubber spatula and just mix until everything is combined.
        • Get the muffins in the oven as soon as the pans are filled. Modern baking powder releases its power in two stages - as soon as liquid is added to it during mixing and when heat hits it. You can see it working if you walk away from the batter for a few minutes. When you come back it will be airy. That's the baking powder working.
        • This muffin starts with very high heat which is reduced after a few minutes and baking continues. Stick with the times given for a very moist muffin.
        • Use the chunk chocolate for the best finish to the top of the muffins.
        • Spoon out the cupcake after cutting out the center to get the maximum amount of filling in the muffin.
        • Regular size muffins can be made following the same instructions only in the smaller pans yielding about 15 muffins.
        This picture shows the the muffin cut in half with a cup of tea next to it and more muffins in the background.

        More Marvelous Muffins

        • Four Blueberry Crumb Muffins sit on a white lattice plate with colored napkins and a yellow placemat.
          Blueberry Crumb Muffins
        • Basic muffins are shown plain and with sanding sugar glistening on top.
          A Perfectly Easy Basic Muffin Mix
        • Cranberry Orange Muffins in three sizes, mini, regular and Texas on a gray plate with a red napkin.
          A Cranberry Orange Muffin
        • Strawberry Muffins
          Best of All Strawberry Muffins

        If you love these Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

        A cut open Double Chocolate Truffled Muffin sits on a plate with a teacup next to it and more muffins in the background.

        Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins

        Helen S. Fletcher
        Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins is a riff on the Olympic Chocolate Muffin recipe that took Paris by storm during the Paris Games. The original recipe is in grams so I translated the weights into volume and omitted several of the ingredients in favor of my interpretation. This recipe needs no mixer and it comes together in literally minutes.
        5 from 4 votes
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 20 minutes mins
        Cook Time 35 minutes mins
        Total Time 55 minutes mins
        Course Muffins
        Cuisine American
        Servings 9 Jumbo muffins
        Calories 745 kcal

        Equipment

        • 2 Jumbo or Texas Muffin Tins
        • Muffin liners
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Chocolate Truffle Filling

        • ½ cup heavy cream
        • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter (30 grams)
        • 2 tablespoons granulated sugar (25 grams)
        • 5 ounces semisweet or bittersweet chocolate (140 grams)
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

        Double Chocolate Muffins

        • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour (210 grams)
        • 1 cup Dutch cocoa (85 grams)
        • ¼ teaspoon baking powder
        • ¾ teaspoon baking soda
        • 1 teaspoon salt (I use table salt)
        • 1 ⅓ cups brown sugar, either dark or light (265 grams)
        • ½ cup whole milk
        • ¾ cup canola or vegetable oil
        • 2 large eggs
        • 1 cup sour cream (225 grams)
        • 1 tablespoon vanilla
        • 1 teaspoon instant coffee or espresso powder
        • 1 cup chocolate chunks (114 grams)

        Instructions
         

        Truffle Filling

        • Heat the cream, butter and sugar together in a small saucepan just until steamy. Do not let it come to a boil.
        • Submerge the chocolate under the cream mixture and let it sit for 3 or 4 minutes. Whisk until smooth, making sure to get into the corners. Using a rubber spatula, go around the edges of the pan and bottom to make sure all of the chocolate is incorporated.
        • Add the vanilla. Cover the surface with plastic wrap and set aside to cool. This can be made days ahead if desired. Refrigerate. When ready to use, bring to room temperature or microwave briefly - just until pipeable. Don't turn it into liquid.

        Double Chocolate Muffins

        • Line 9 jumbo muffin holes or 15 regular size with the paper liners. Set aside. Preheat the oven to 425°F.
        • Sift the flour into a large bowl.
        • Sift the cocoa, baking soda, baking powder and salt on top of the flour. Whisk together to mix well. Add the brown sugar and stir together or simply use your hands to mix it all together.
        • In a very small bowl stir together the coffee or espresso and vanilla until the coffee or espresso is dissolved.
        • In a third smaller bowl, whisk together the milk, canola oil, eggs, sour cream, and coffee mixture.
        • Pour the liquid ingredients over the dry ingredients and stir with a spoon or fold together with a rubber spatula just until everything is mixed well. Do not over mix.
        • With a #8 disher/scooper or a ½ cup measure, drop the batter into the paper lined muffin cups for the jumbo muffins. For the smaller ones, fill to abut ½" from the top of the paper.
        • Top generously with the chocolate chunks.
        • Bake at 425°F for exactly 6 minutes for the jumbo or 5 minutes for the regular size. Lower the temperature to 350°F and continue to bake for about 20 minutes for the jumbo or about 13 minutes or until a tester comes out clean. Don't over bake the muffins.
        • Cool the muffins.
        • Starting about ½" from the edge of a muffin, insert a paring knife slanted towards the middle of the muffin and go all the way around the muffin. Remove the wedge shaped cake and set aside intact.
        • To enlarge the hole for more filling (why wouldn't you?), use a small spoon and scoop out additional cake.
        • Fit a piping bag with a ½" tip, fill with the truffle filling and pipe into the hole almost up to the top. Alternately, spoon the filling in. Replace the wedge shape piece pushing it into the filling.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        _____________________________________________________
        Don't over mix the batter. Use a spoon or rubber spatula and just mix until everythingis combined.
        Get the muffins into the oven as soon as the pans are filled. Modern baking powder releases its power in two stages - as soon as liquid is added to it during mixing and when heat hits it. You can see it working if you walk away from the batter for a few minutes. When you come back it will be airy. That's the baking powder working.
        This muffin starts with very high heat which is reduced after a few minutes and baking continues. Stick with the times given for a very moist muffin.
        Use the chunk chocolate for the best finish to the top of the muffins.
        Spoon out the cupcake after cutting out the center to get the maximum amount of filling in the muffin.
        Coffee and vanilla have an affinity for chocolate either separately or together. You can see it used in my Chocolate Raspberry Truffle Cake, German Chocolate Sweet Rolls, Gluten Free Turtle Cake with Salted Caramel, Mocha Kahlua Brownies and my Chocolate Cake to name a few.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 9muffinsCalories: 745kcalCarbohydrates: 77gProtein: 9gFat: 47gSaturated Fat: 18gPolyunsaturated Fat: 7gMonounsaturated Fat: 20gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 82mgSodium: 409mgPotassium: 495mgFiber: 7gSugar: 49gVitamin A: 531IUVitamin C: 0.3mgCalcium: 129mgIron: 5mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Carrot Cake Baked Doughnuts

        Modified: Apr 23, 2026 · Published: Sep 9, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

        Four finishes on the Carrot Cake Dougnuts are plain, pecan topped, sugared and filled with cream cheese.

        These Carrot Cake Baked Doughnuts are a quick treat for anytime of the day. Light, moist doughnuts are loaded with flavor and have three different finishes or none to choose from. You can serve them as is, with a pecan topping, dipped in cinnamon sugar or fill the hole with cream cheese - your choice.

        Four finishes on the Carrot Cake Dougnuts are plain, pecan topped, sugared and filled with cream cheese.

        Top doughnuts: Plain and with pecan topping. Bottom: Dipped in cinnamon sugar and a plain doughnut filled with cream cheese.

        Completely made in the processor, you don't even have to grate the carrots. Just whiz it all together, fill the pans, bake and you're ready to finish them as you choose or not.

        Here are a few other quick treats: Pumpkin Cake Doughnuts, Apple Fritters with Speculaas Spice, Apple Cake Doughnuts, A Perfectly Easy Basic Muffin Mix, Crumb Topped Orange Date Muffins, the always popular, Easy PBJ Muffins and the Crumbed Baked Cake Donut Recipe.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Two Types of Doughnuts

        There are basically two types of doughnuts although fritters are sometimes considered doughnuts.

        Cake Doughnuts are just that. They are often miniature cakes made in doughnut pans as is this recipe. I simply cut down the carrot cake my bakery made and baked it in the doughnut pans. We used the same recipe to make adorable little carrot cake petit fours that people loved.

        Yeast Doughnuts use yeast to rise and are generally fried quickly in oil but can also be baked. They are lighter in texture but take longer due to having to rise. There is an interesting article, Baked or Fried Doughnuts which is based on my Fresh as a Daisy Doughnuts.

        The doughnut pan or not

        There is a special pan for cake doughnuts made by Wilton. It has six doughnut cavities and comes 2 tins to a package. They are most reasonably priced on Amazon. However, if you don't have these or there is extra batter, I just put it in standard size muffin pans and it works fine. See the bottom photo.

        The doughnut pan consists of 6 cavaties that makes cake doughnut with a hole in the middle.

        What makes these so appealing

        • Easy is the word made for this recipe.
        • Flavor packed and fun to make.
        • Great for beginners to baking.
        • Fun for children to help with (they can grate the carrots)

        Recipe Ingredients

        Pecan Filling

        The pecan topping for the carrot cake doughnuts is made of granulated sugar, pecans, flour, melted butter and vanilla.

        FRONT ROW: Melted unsalted butter, vanilla

        BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, pecans, all-purpose flour

        Carrot Cake Doughnuts

        The doughnuts consist of carrots, all-purpose flour, cinnamon, salt, baking soda, eggs, oil, buttermilk, honey and brown sugar.

        FRONT ROW: Cinnamon, baking soda, honey, salt

        MIDDLE ROW: Vegetable oil, buttermilk, eggs

        BACK ROW: Carrots, all-purpose flour, brown sugar

        Cream Cheese Filling

        The cream cheese filling uses unsalted butter, vanilla, cream cheese and powdered sugar.

        FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, vanilla

        BACK ROW: Cream cheese, powdered sugar

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        Pecan Topping

        The first collage shows the pecans, flour, and sugar in the processor bowl, processed, the melted butter added and the topping made.

        Step 1. Place the pecans, sugar and flour in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Process until very fine. Step 3. Transfer to a bowl and add the melted butter. Step 4. Toss the butter and pecan mixture together to make small crumbs. Refrigerate while preparing the remainder of the recipe.

        This collages shows the carrots  in the ofod processor, processed, the dry ingredients for the doughnuts in the food processor and processed.

        Step 5. Place the cut carrots in the food processor. Step 6. Process until finely cut. Step 7. Without cleaning the processor bowl, add the dry ingredients. Step 8. Process until completely mixed.

        The eggs, oil, buttermilk, honey, brown sugar, and flour are added and processed to a smooth batter, the mixture is spooned into the pans and baked.

        Step 9. The eggs, oil, buttermilk, and honey are added to the bowl. Step 10. Process to form the batter. Remove to a bowl and stir in the carrots. Step 11. Spoon the batter into the cups filling almost to the top. If you aren't using the pans, these can be made in standard muffin cups. They just won't have the doughnut shape. Step 12. Bake until set. Cool for 5 to 10 minutes and turn out of the pans.

        The last collage shows the cream cheese frosting ingredients in a mixing bowl, beaten, pipied into the well of a doughnut and a doughnut finished with cinnamon sugar.

        Step 13. Combine the ingredients for the cream cheese filling in a mixing bowl. Step 14. Beat until light and completely combined. Step 15. Fit a bag with a # 3 or 4 star tip and pipe the filling into the hole of a plain doughnut. Step 16. Or roll the outside of the doughnut in cinnamon sugar.

        Recipe FAQS

        Why are they called cake doughnuts?

        They are often small version of cakes or have a cake like texture when baked.

        Are cake doughnuts or yeast doughnuts easier to make?

        Cake doughnuts are generally easier and faster to make and go from mixer to pan to oven very fast. Yeast doughnuts require rising, rolling out and cutting before frying.

        Is a cake doughnut better for you than a yeast doughnut?

        It depends upon the batter for the cake doughnut and how it is finished. While the yeast doughnut is usually lighter in texture, it is fried which adds a lot of calories. It can also be finished and filled added more calories.

        This photo shows three carrot cake baked doughnuts in muffin tins finished with swirls of  cream cheese frosting.

        These were made in standard muffin tins.

        Other Quick Recipes for You

        • Two slices of Chocolate Orange Raisin bread on a white plate with a cup of tea next to it and lavender flowers.
          Chocolate Orange Raisin Bread-A Favorite Homemade Bread
        • Four Blueberry Crumb Muffins sit on a white lattice plate with colored napkins and a yellow placemat.
          Blueberry Crumb Muffins
        Four finishes on the Carrot Cake Dougnuts are plain, pecan topped, sugared and filled with cream cheese.

        Carrot Cake Baked Doughnuts

        Helen S. Fletcher
        These Carrot Cake Baked Doughnuts are light, moist doughnuts loaded with flavor and have three different finishes or none to choose from. You can serve them as is, with a pecan topping, dipped in cinnamon sugar or fill the hole with cream cheese - your choice.
        No ratings yet
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 20 minutes mins
        Cook Time 15 minutes mins
        Course Doughnuts
        Cuisine American
        Servings 17 doughnuts
        Calories 273 kcal

        Equipment

        • 2 baked doughnut pans
        • 1 or 2 regular size muffin tin if not using doughnut pans.
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Pecan Topping

        • ½ cup pecans (58 grams)
        • ¼ cup all-purpose flour (35 grams)
        • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
        • 2 to 3 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (30 grams)
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

        Carrot Cake Baked Doughnuts

        • ½ pound carrots, peeled
        • 1 ¼ cup all-purpose flour (175 grams)
        • 1 ¼ cup brown sugar (250 grams)
        • 2 ½ teaspoons cinnamon
        • ⅓ teaspoon salt
        • ¾ teaspoon baking soda
        • 2 large eggs
        • ¼ cup + 1 T vegetable oil
        • ¼ cup + 1T buttermilk
        • 2 tablespoons honey

        Cream Cheese Frosting

        • 2 tablespons butter, softened (60 grams)
        • 4 ounces cream cheese, softened (114 grams)
        • 1 ¾ cup powdered sugar (225 grams)
        • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

        Instructions
         

        Pecan Topping

        • Place the pecans, flour, and sugar in the bowl of a food processor. Process until everything is finely cut together.
        • Remove from the processor bowl and add 2 tablespoons melted butter. Mix with a fork until it forms crumbs. Add a bit more butter if necessary.

        Carrot Cake Baked Doughnuts

        • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
        • Cut the carrots into ½" pieces. Without cleaning the bowl of the processor place them in the food processor and process until very finely cut into very small pieces. Remove from the processor.
        • Without cleaning the bowl, place the flour, brown sugar, cinnamon, salt and baking soda in the processor bowl. Pulse several times to mix.
        • Add the eggs, oil, buttermilk, and honey to the bowl. Process to mix everything well.
        • Return the carrots to the processor and pulse several times to mix everything completely.
        • Spray the baked doughnut pans with a non-stick baking release. Spray 5 muffin cups. If using the pecan topping, add it to the pans first. Make sure the pans are well sprayed or the topping will stick. Spoon the carrot cake mixture almost to the top of the doughnut pans. Fill the muffin tins about ¾ full.
        • Bake the doughnut pans 13 to 15 minutes until they are set and spring back when lightly touched. Bake the cupcake pans for 15 to 17 minutes.
        • Cool for about 5 minutes. Remove from the molds, turning the doughnuts upside down.
        • This makes about 17 doughnuts.

        Cream Cheese Frosting

        • Combine all in the bowl of a mixer. Beat on low until combined. Raise to medium speed and beat until smooth and the volume increases.

        Finishing the Doughnuts

        • If finishing with cinnamon sugar (combine sugar and cinnamon to taste), coat them immediately while the doughnuts are warm. After a few minutes, repeat the cinnamon sugar.
        • For the cream cheese frosting, fit a pastry bag with a #4 open star tip. Fill the bag with the cream cheese frosting and pipe a swirl into the hole of the doughnut or on top of the ones baked in the muffin cups.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        _____________________________________________________
        The pans for cake muffins are from Wilton.  They come packed 2 tins (12 muffins) together. Amazon. has the best price I saw.
        The batter should cover the top of the pan enclosing the hole in the center.  I love this because it allows me to put something delicious in the hole instead of glazing them. 
        Standard size muffin tins can also be used.  The yield will be less.
        Cut the peeled carrots into about ½ inch slices before processing.
        This seems like a lot of cinnamon, but the doughnut is very balanced in flavor. 
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 17doughnutsCalories: 273kcalCarbohydrates: 44gProtein: 3gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 33mgSodium: 142mgPotassium: 113mgFiber: 1gSugar: 34gVitamin A: 2402IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 39mgIron: 1mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Orange Almond Tea Cake

        Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Aug 14, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 24 Comments

        A slice of the Orange Almond Tea Cake sits on a white plate with 2 strawberries and the rest of the cut cake is behind it.

        This Orange Almond Tea Cake is one of the simplest, easiest cake you'll ever make. Redolent of almond paste and orange rind with few other ingredients, this cake has incredible flavor like no other.

        This marvelously moist and flavorful cake was inspired by a recipe from the late Flo Braker’s book, The Simple Art of Perfect Baking - one of the earliest and best books on baking to be found.  

        A slice of the Orange Almond Tea Cake sits on a white plate with 2 strawberries and the rest of the cut cake is behind it.

        Oranges and almonds have an affinity for each other.  I first used this flavor combination in my first book, The New Pastry Cook and it remains one of my favorites.  I have included a processor version and a mixer version – both work equally well.  

        Be sure to take a look at How to Make Almond Paste to make your own. There are two recipes. My favorite is the one with the simple syrup.

        If you are a lover of almond paste, be sure to check out: Apricot Crumb Coffee Cake, Orange Almond Petit Fours, Almond Macaroons, Blueberry Crumb Muffins, Caramelized Peach Tart, Brandied Chocolate Cherry Almond Garmish, A Quick and Easy Summer Teacake, Twice Baked Brioche, Amaretti Cookies.

        And if you're a lover of orange cakes, check out my Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Why is it called a Tea Cake

        A Tea Cake is what it sounds like. In the olden days when the pace of life was a lot slower, afternoon tea was often served. While English tea cakes include buns of some kind, the cake version is usually a single layer of a straight forward cake simply finished which is why it needs to be perfectly balanced and packed with flavor, which this cake is. Now it is, most likely, a snack or dessert cake.

        Why You'll Love This Tea Cake

        • It is super simple and fast to make, especially in the food processor.
        • The depth of flavor is amazing.
        • It stays moist for days and days if it lasts that long due to the almond paste
        • It has only a few ingredients.
        • It makes a great gift sure to please.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Ingredients for the Orange Almond Tea Cake include almond paste, granulatedsugar, unsalted butter, eggs, all-purpose flour, baking powder, and orange zest.

        FRONT ROW: Baking Powder, unsalted butter

        MIDDLE ROW: Almond Paste, orange zest

        BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, eggs, granulated sugar

        Key Ingredients

        The almond paste can be purchased or easily made at home. My post on How to Make Almond Paste - or Not shows you two ways to make it. My preference is the simple syrup method.

        Finely grated zest of an orange gives this tea cake a deeply satisfying flavor.

        Unsalted butter gives the purest taste and is recommended.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        This collage shows the center of the pan being sprayed, lined with parchment, the almond paste, sugar and orange rind in the processor bowl, then processed.

        Step 1. Spray the center only of a 9" round cake pan with a non-stick baking release. Step 2. Line it with parchment paper and spray the center of the paper. For a complete explanation of how to bake flat cake layers, please see my post on How to Bake a Flat Cake. Step 3. Tear the almond paste in pieces and place it along with the sugar and orange zest in the bowl of a processor. Step 4. Process until it is very fine.

        The second collage shows the butter added to the processor, processed, the eggs added and then processed.

        Step 5. Cut the butter into pieces and add it to the processor. Step 6. Process until the butter is completely mixed in. Step 7. Add the eggs. Step 8. Process to incorporate.

        The pictures in this collage show the flour added to the processor,mixed in, the cake in the baking tin and the processor with batter  still in it.

        Step 9. Add all of the flour and baking powder to the processor bowl. Step 10. Process to combine. Step 11. Pour the batter into the prepared pan. Step 12. Some of the batter will want to remain in the bowl.

        The last collage shows the batter slung off the processor blade, a spatula loosening the edge of the baked cake, a cake stencil and the stencil powdered sugar on top of the cake.

        Step 13. To easily remove the batter, place the top back on the processor and pulse several times. The batter will be slung off the blade. Remove the blade and add the remaining batter to the cake pan. For more really useful information see my post on Food Processor Tips When Baking. Step 14. Using a small, flexible metal spatula go around the edge of the baked cake being careful to keep the spatula to the edge of the pan so it doesn't tear the cake. Release the cake onto a serving dish keeping it upside down. Step 15. For a pretty finish to the top of the cake, a cake stencil can be used. I have a set of Kaiser stencils that can be found on Amazon. Step 16. Place the stencil on top of the cake, dust powdered sugar fairly heavily covering the stencil. Carefully, lift the stencil, leaving only the design on top. A paper doily can also be used. No stencil? Just dust it with powdered sugar.

        Recipe FAQS

        When were Tea Cakes served?

        In the 1840's simple cakes known as tea cakes which were served with tea, hence the name, were served in the afternoons to keep hunger at bay until the dinner meal.

        What's the difference between Tea Cakes and regular cake?

        Tea cakes are generally more dense than regular cakes and made in single layers.

        What are some other versions of Tea Cakes?

        The name tea cake is also given to cookies, small cakes, buns or simple sweet rolls.

        Storage and Freezing

        The cake, without the powdered sugar, can be frozen, wrapped well and kept frozen for several months. Thaw at room temperature, then apply the powdered sugar.

        The cake can also be held, covered, for several days at room temperature.

        Expert Tips

        • The cake can be made in a food processor or a mixer.
        • For the mixer version, follow the same directions as for the processor but in a mixer.
        • Either purchased or homemade almond paste can be used.
        • The cake can be served as is or with fresh fruit.
        This phots is a down shot of the tart on a lace edged white plate with 2 red strawberries.

        More simple but delicious cakes

        • A warm brown Lemon Rum Bundt Cake on a clear glass plate with petals of a yellow flower.
          Lemon Rum Bundt Cake
        • Deep Butter Cake
          Deep Butter Cake
        • A slice of chocolate cake, peanut butter mousse glazed in chocolate on a marble plate
          Chocolate Peanut Butter Mousse Cake
        • Lemonade Cake with blueberry sauce on a green plate wiht a yellow napkin.
          Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce

        If you love this Orange Almond Tea Cake, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

        A slice of the Orange Almond Tea Cake sits on a white plate with 2 strawberries and the rest of the cut cake is behind it.

        Orange Almond Tea Cake

        Helen S. Fletcher
        This Orange Almond Tea Cake is probably the simplest, easiest cake you'll ever make. Redolent of almond paste and orange rind, this cake has incredible flavor like no other.
        4.86 from 7 votes
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 20 minutes mins
        Cook Time 45 minutes mins
        Total Time 1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
        Course Cake
        Cuisine American
        Servings 10 servings
        Calories 358 kcal
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup +2 T almond paste (290 grams)
        • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
        • 10 tablespoons unsalted butter, room temperature (140 grams)
        • 4 large eggs
        • ½ cup +2T all-purpose flour (85 grams)
        • ½ teaspoon baking powder
        • 1 orange zest

        Instructions
         

        • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.  Spray the center bottom of a 9x2 inch round cake pan. Line the bottom with parchment; spray the center only and set aside.

        Processor Method

        • Place the almond paste, sugar and orange rind in the processor bowl.  Process until mealy.  Add the butter; process until mixed.  Add all the eggs at once and process until smooth.  Lastly add the flour mixture and process until completely combined.  Pour into the prepared pan, level and smooth the top.

        Mixer Method

        • Place the almond paste and sugar in a mixing bowl fitted with the paddle.  Beat until large crumbs form.  Add the butter and orange rind beating until well combined.  Add the eggs, one at a time and beat until smooth.  Combine the flour and baking powder whisking to mix.  Add all at once to the above and mix on low just until completely combined.  Pour into the prepared pan, level and smooth the top.
        • Bake for 35 to 40 minutes until a tester comes out clean. 
        • Cool for 15 minutes, release edges and remove from the pan.  Place on a rack, bottom side up to cool completely.  
        • Place a stencil or doily on top of the cake and sprinkle with powdered sugar fairly heavily.  Carefully remove the stencil or doily to retain the design.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        ____________________________________________________
        The cake can be made in a food processor or a mixer.
        For the mixer version, follow the same directions as for the processor but in a mixer.
        Either purchased or homemade almond paste can be used.
        The cake can be served as is or with fresh fruit.
        This cake will keep well at room temperature if covered for 30 or 4 days.  
        It can also be frozen and then wrapped without the powdered sugar for several months.
        If you don't have a stencil or doilie for the powdered sugar decoration, just sprinkle it  lightly with powdered sugar.  This is a simple, unfussy cake.

        Nutrition

        Serving: 10servingsCalories: 358kcalCarbohydrates: 40gProtein: 6gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 105mgSodium: 54mgPotassium: 119mgFiber: 1gSugar: 29gVitamin A: 458IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 69mgIron: 1mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        How to Make A S'mores Tart

        Modified: Apr 30, 2025 · Published: Aug 5, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

        A slice of the S'more Tart with it's browned marshmallow topping sits on a brown rimmed plate with a fork and napkin in the background.

        How to Make S'mores Tart is more than just one more no bake recipe. It comprises some basic baking elements that you can use over and over. The graham cracker crust and the marshmallow cream (creme or fluff whatever you call it) is so simple to make from scratch you'll wonder why you haven't done it before.

        The crust can be used in many no bake or baked options, think cheesecake, as a base for mousse cakes or as a part of cold desserts. The marshmallow cream can be sandwiched between cookies, added to hot chocolate and used as a finished on other cakes and pie. It can be spoon on or piped on. In any case it will hold its shape.

        A slice of the S'more Tart with it's browned marshmallow topping sits on a brown rimmed plate with a fork and napkin in the background.

        As one of the favorites of summer, especially when camping, this easy tart is one you'll want to put on your dessert menu over and over. It's a great way to start getting children interested in the kitchen. Let them try their hand at piping - I can guarantee it will be interesting.

        Amazingly, this S'mores Tart is not too sweet which allows all the flavors to come through.

        Here are a few cookies that would be fantastic with marshmallow cream sandwiched between them: Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies (sub for the filling or add it as a second filling), Fudgy Chocolate Cookies with Variations, Very Lemon Butter Crisps, Best of All Spiced Molasses Cookies, Base Recipe for Cookies with 8 variations, Flourless Chocolate Raspberry Cookies with or without the raspberry, Oatmeal Cookies, and while we're at it why not the really fast Cocoa Brownies. And as they say wait there's one more The Café au Lait Tart.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        What's Not to Like About this Recipe

        • It's another no bake recipe that is quick and easy.
        • Simple ingredients are used so there's no chasing something down.
        • It's super kid friendly as long as the sugar syrup is supervised.
        • How neat would it be to make your own marshmallow?
        • Because it is not overly sweet all the flavors of the milk chocolate, graham cracker crust and marshmallow cream come through.

        Variations

        I know traditional S'mores don't include nuts but I think they are perfect in this tart. Don't like peanuts? Use toasted pecans....or a nut you do like.

        Stir rice krispies into the marshmallow cream as soon as it is finished for a quick, low fat version of Rice Krispy Treats. Add nuts, chips, dried fruit, etc. as desired.

        Thin the marshmallow cream with a little water and use it to top ice cream.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Graham Cracker Crust

        The ingredients for the graham cracker crust are graham crackers, powdered sugar and butter.

        FRONT ROW: Unsalted Butter

        BACK ROW: Graham crackers, powdered sugar

        Milk Chocolate Filling

        Three ingredients make up the milk chocolate filling.  Milk chocolate, heavy cream and peanuts.

        FRONT ROW: Honey roasted peanuts

        BACK ROW: Milk chocolate, heavy cream

        Marshmallow Cream

        Ingredients for the marshmallow cream include granulated sugar, water, corn syrup, egg whites and vanilla.

        FRONT ROW: Water, vanilla extract

        BACK ROW: Granulated Sugar, egg whites, corn syrup.

        Key Ingredients

        Any plain graham cracker will due but be aware that different brands may take more or less butter to bind them. So start off with ¾ of the butter and if the crumbs don't stick together well when a small amount is pressed between your fingers, add the rest.

        Powdered sugar is used to avoid a grainy textured crust.

        Milk Chocolate is the traditional choice for S'mores. I use Trader Joe's Pound Plus Milk Chocolate for it's depth of flavor and caramel overtones. Any good milk chocolate will due though. I don't recommend milk chocolate chips or Hershey's milk chocolate.

        Honey Roasted Peanuts are a great addition as I believe any nut would be - salted or unsalted. Other nuts such as toasted pecans would be great or use the nut of your choice or omit it.

        Corn Syrup seems to be a problem with some people. There is some confusion between corn syrup and high fructose corn syrup.  Karo Corn syrup as found on grocers' shelves, either clear or dark, is 100% glucose (sugar) and is not the same as the high fructose variety used in commercial products. Years ago Karo changed their formula for consumer corn syrup to no longer include the offending high fructose corn syrup. I don't know about other brands.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        Graham Cracker Crust

        Graham crackers and powdered sugar are in a processor bowl, processed to crumbs, butter is added and the crust is ready to press in.

        Step 1. Crush the graham crackers between your hands and place them and the powdered sugar in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Process to make fine crumbs. (If you aren't using a processor, place the crackers in a plastic bag and roll over them with a rolling pin to crush them. Put them in a bowl with the powdered sugar and continue as in the directions.) Step 3. Add ¾ of the melted butter to the processor. Step 4. Pulse the machine until all the crumbs are uniformly moistened. Take a small amount crumbs and squeeze them between your fingers. If they hold firmly together you're done. If they don't add the additional butter.

        This collage shows the tart pan, the loose crumbs around the inside edge of the pan, the crumbs being pressed into the side of the pan and the sides completed.

        Step 5. Spray a 9x1" tart pan with a removable bottom with a non-stick baking release. Steo 6. Arrange ⅔ if the crumbs around the inside edge of the tart pan. Step 7. With your hand or a measuring cup, press the crumbs very firmly against the side of the pan. Step 8. Go around a second time to make sure they are evenly pressed in.

        The final crust collages shows the remainder of the crumbs evenly distributed on the bottom of the pan, pressed in solidly, peanuts in a processor, then placed on top of the crust.

        Step 9. Distribute the remainder of the crumbs evenly over the bottom of the pan. Step 10. Press them firmly into the shell. Step 11. Place the nuts in the processor (no need to clean it) and pulse to coarsely chop them. Step 12. Spread the nuts evenly over the crust.

        Milk Chocolate Filling

        This collage shows the milk chocolate cut into small pieces, the filling ingredients in a sauce pan, melted together and poured into the crust.

        Step 13. Chop the chocolate so it will melt uniformly. Step 14. Heat the cream until steaming hot but not boiling. Add the chocolate and submerge it under the cream. Let it sit for a few minutes to melt the chocolate. Step 15. Whisk the mixture until it is smooth and no lumps remain. Be sure to get into the edges of the pan. Step 16. Pour it into the crust. Set aside for the chocolate to firm up. To speed it along, place it in the refrigerator.

        Marshmallow Cream

        Marshmallow cream shows the liquid ingredients in a saucepan, the egg whites and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer, the egg whites ready for the sugar syrup, the sugar syrup boiling.

        Step 17. Place the egg whites and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer. Step 18. Beat just until very soft peaks form. Then start adding the sugar as called for a little at a time. When the whites form soft peaks, reduce the speed of the mixer to it's lowest point and keep moving them around. Do not turn the machine off while making the syrup or the texture of the whites will change and they could become unusable. Step 19. In the meantime as the whites are beating, put the water, corn syrup and sugar in a smallish saucepan. Bring it to a boil and continue cooking until the temperature reaches 245°F.

        The last collage shows the marshmallow cream beaten stiff, piped onto the tart, browned with a blow torch or mini torch and removed from the shell and transferred to a serving plate.

        Step 21. Increase the egg whites to medium low. Pour the syrup slowly into the whites. After all the syrup is in, increase the speed of the mixer to medium and then medium high and beat until it is very stiff and holds sharp peaks. Allow it to cool. Step 22. Fit a piping bag with a ½" or ¾" plain tip and pipe "kisses" all the way around the outer edge. Keep moving inward until the tart is completely covered. Don't want to pipe? Spoon it on and make pretty swirls with the back of the spoon. Step 23. Using a small blow torch or propane tank, lightly toast the marshmallow to color them. Step 24. Remove the side of the tart pan. To take it off the bottom, slide a metal spatula between the bottom of the tart and the tart pan. Go all around the tart. Slide it off onto a serving dish.

        Recipe FAQS

        Why are they called S'Mores?

        The first recipe was found in the Girl Scouts of America Handbook published in 1927. The term s'more is first found the 1938 guide “Recreational Programs for Summer Camps,” by William Henry Gibson. It is a contraction of "some more".

        Where did marshmallows come from?

        Ancient Egyptians. It was only eaten by gods and royalty because it was deemed so special as early as 2000 BC.

        How did marshmallow get its name?

        The marshmallow was originally made from the mallow plant (Athaea officinalis) that grows wild in marshes....hence marsh mallow.

        Expert Tips

        • When adding the butter to the crumbs withhold about a quarter of it. Different graham crackers absorb more or less butter. More can always be added. If it does become too wet, add more crumbs.
        • Press the crumbs into the pan very firmly or it will crumble when cut.
        • For the best cuts as seen in the photos of the completed tart, use a hot, dry knife. Run the knife under really hot water and quickly wipe it dry. Cut straight down on the tart, do not use a sawing motion.
        • When making the syrup for the marshmallows, use a saucepan that holds about 6 cups. The mixture rises up as it boils. However, do not use a large pan or the ingredients will spread out too much making it difficult to use the thermometer.
        • Chopping the chocolate helps to melt it quickly and evenly. Whisk it smooth but don't be too enthusiastic or there will be a lot of air bubbles.
        This photo shows the S'Mores Tart partially eaten with the fork on the plate.

        More Lucious Tarts

        • Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart
          Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart
        • Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart
          Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart
        • Cinnamon Whiskey Apple Tart
          Cinnamon Whiskey Apple Tart
        • Honey Thyme Apple Tart
          Honey Thyme Apple Tart

        If you love this S'Mores Tart, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

        A slice of the S'more Tart with it's browned marshmallow topping sits on a brown rimmed plate with a fork and napkin in the background.

        How to Make A S'mores Tart

        Helen S. Fletcher
        As one of the favorites of summer, especially when camping, this easy tart is one you'll want to put on your dessert menu over and over. It's a great way to start getting children interested in the kitchen. Let them try their hand at piping - I can guarantee it will be interesting.
        No ratings yet
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 1 hour hr
        Total Time 1 hour hr
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Servings 12 servings
        Calories 464 kcal

        Equipment

        • 9x1" tart pan with removable bottom
        • Thermometer
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Graham Cracker Crust

        • 1 ⅓ cups graham cracker crumbs (170 grams)
        • ⅓ cup powdered sugar (34 grams)
        • 10 tablespoons unsalted butter (140 grams)

        Milk Chocolate Filling

        • 12 ounces milk chocolate (340 grams)
        • 1 cup heavy cream
        • ½ cup peanuts or other nuts, optional (60 grams)

        Marshmallow Cream

        • 3 tablespoons water
        • ⅔ cup corn syrup
        • ⅓ cup granulated sugar (65 grams)
        • 2 large egg whites (64 grams)
        • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract

        Instructions
         

        Graham Cracker Crust

        • Place the graham crackers and powdered sugar in the processor bowl and process to make crumbs. If not using a processor, put the crumbs in a plastic bag and roll over them with a rolling pin to make the crumbs. Continue as below.
        • Add ¾ of the butter and pulse until the crumbs are evenly coated. Press a small amount of crumbs between your fingers to make sure it will stick together firmly. If not, add the remainder of the butter.
        • Spray the 9x1" tart tin with a non-stick baking release. Arrange ⅔ of the crumbs evenly along the inside edge of the pan. Using your hand or a measuring cup, press the crumbs firmly into the side of the pan.
        • Place the remainder of the crumbs evenly on the bottom of the pan and press in firmly. Set aside.

        Milk Chocolate Filling

        • Without cleaning the processor bowl, add the nuts and pulse to chop coarsely. Distribute evenly over the crust. Set aside.
        • Put the cream in a saucepan and bring to a simmer. Do not boil. Remove it from the heat. Submerge the chocolate under the cream for a few minutes.
        • Stir, or gently whisk the mixture together until the chocolate is completely melted and the mixture is combined. Make sure to get into the edges of the pan.
        • Pour it into the shell and let it set up at room temperature or speed it along by refrigerating it.

        Marshmallow Cream

        • In a small saucepan, bring the water, cornsyrup and ¼ cup (50 grams) of sugar to a boil. Continue to boil hard until a candy thermometer reaches 245°F.
        • In the meantime, place the egg whites and vanilla in a clean mixing bowl fitted with a whisk. Beat the egg whites to the soft peak stage.  
        • Slowly add the remaining sugar and return to the soft peak stage.  If the whites get done before the syrup, reduce the speed to the lowest and keep mixing.  Do not turn the mixer off.
        • When the syrup comes to temperature, raise the speed of the mixer to medium and slowly drizzle it into the whites.  Turn the mixer to high and beat until thick and lukewarm.   
        • Fit a piping bag with a ½" to ¾" plain tip and pipe "kisses" around the outer edge of the tart. Continue piping moving in towards the center until it is completely covered. Not into piping? Spoon on the marshmallow cream and make pretty swirls with the back of a spoon.
        • With a small blow torch or a propane tank, lightly toast the topping.
        • To make perfect slices, heat the knife under really hot water, dry it quickly and slice straight down. Do not use a sawing motion.
        • Store the tart in the refrigerator. But serve it at or near room temperature.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        ___________________________________________________
        When adding the butter to the crumbs withhold about a quarter of it. Different graham crackers absorb more or less butter. More can always be added. If it does become too wet, add more crumbs.
        Press the crumbs into the pan very firmly or it will crumble when cut.
        For the best cuts as seen in the photos of the completed tart, use a hot, dry knife. Run the knife under really hot water and quickly wipe it dry. Cut straight down on the tart, do not use a sawing motion.
        When making the syrup for the marshmallows, use a saucepan that holds about 6 cups. The mixture rises up as it boils. However, do not use a large pan or the ingredients will spread out too much making it difficult to use the thermometer.
        Chopping the chocolate helps to melt it quickly and evenly. Whisk it smooth but don't be too enthusiastic or there will be a lot of air bubbles.
        Store in the refrigerator but serve at or near room temperature.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 12servingsCalories: 464kcalCarbohydrates: 50gProtein: 5gFat: 30gSaturated Fat: 17gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 47mgSodium: 120mgPotassium: 170mgFiber: 2gSugar: 41gVitamin A: 583IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 37mgIron: 1mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        Homemade Ice Cream Sandwiches

        Modified: Apr 30, 2026 · Published: Jul 29, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

        Three Ice Cream Sandwiches on a white plate with multi colored glasses and napkins behind.

        So here is the promised Homemade Ice Cream Sandwich that will take you through a hot summer and almost make you forget about it. Two chocolate cookies sandwich a filling of Caramel Brickle Ice Cream dripping of caramel and crunchy from the brickle.

        The cookies can be made ahead and stored for several days in an airtight container as can the ice cream. Leaving only sandwiching and freezing them.

        Three Ice Cream Sandwiches on a white plate with multi colored glasses and napkins behind.

        Hopefully the ice cream in the freezer just waiting for the chocolate cookies. These cookies are amazing. Deeply chocolate and buttery they stay firm but edible when frozen or as the ice cream begins to soften.

        While I have suggested filling these with a home made ice cream, purchased ice cream of your choice can also be used. Just soften the ice cream by microwaving it for 10 to 15 seconds until spreadable (do not liquify it). Line a 9x9" pan as below, spread the ice cream into a smooth layer and proceed as in the directions.

        Other no churn ice creams from this site, include: No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream, Double Chocolate No Churn Ice Cream, and No Churn Nutella Ice Cream omitting the vodka.

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Recipe Ingredients

        The ingredients for the chocolate cookies are flour, cocoa, powered sugar, unsalted butter salt and vanilla extract.

        FRONT ROW: Salt, vanilla extract

        MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

        BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, powdered sugar, Dutch cocoa

        Key Ingredients

        Powdered sugar makes a more tender cookie than granulated sugar. The lack of eggs further intensifies the taste.

        Dutch cocoa is preferred for its deeper taste and darker color. However, natural cocoa may be used also. My post Cocoa Fundamentals discusses everything cocoa.

        All-purpose flour gives strength to the cookie without making it hard.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients and instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        The first collage for the Ice Cream Sandwiches is a bowl of dry ingredients whisked, butter, sugar and powdered sugar in the bowl of a   mixer, mixed and flour added to bowl.

        Step 1. Whisk together the flour, cocoa, powdered sugar and salt. Set aside. Step 2. Combine the butter and vanilla in a mixing bowl. Step 3. Beat until creamy. Step 4. Add the flour mixture.

        This collage shows the cookie dough made, formed into a rectangle, placed between waxed paper and rolled out.

        Step 5 Beat the mixture on low at first then on medium until completely brought together. Chill if the dough is too soft to roll out. Divide the dough in half (about 375 grams each piece) Step 6. Shape the dough into a rectangle. The size doesn't matter. Step 7. Place between two large pieces of waxed paper. Cut Out Cookies using the Wax Paper Technique Step gives you the ins and outs of why I prefer wax paper over anything else. Step 8. Roll into a 10x10" square. Remove the top piece of paper but keep it on the bottom piece. I rolled one piece of dough at a time and took it through to the end before I rolled the second piece.

        This collage shows the edges of the dough being trimmed, the trimmed dough, the dough being marked into squares and a bamboo skewer.

        Step 9. Use a ruler to trim the edges of the dough. Step 10. Trim the dough on all 4 sides into a 9x9" square. Step 11. Using a ruler mark the dough into 3" squares. Press the ruler down through the dough but do not go through it. Step 12. A bamboo skewer is perfect for making the holes.

        The fourth collage shows the cookies marked and the holes made in them, on a baking sheet, baked and the Caramel Brickle Ice Cream in a pan.

        Step 13. After the square has been marked, make a series of holes in the cookies as shown. This will keep the cookies flat while baking. Freeze until hard. Step 14. Remove from the freezer and break the cookies apart. Place the cookies on a baking sheet. Double Pan them before baking so the bottoms don't get over baked. Step 15. Cool the cookies on the pan before baking. They will seem soft but will firm up as they cool. The cookies can be stored in an airtight container for several days if desired. Step 16. When the cookies are cooled, pair them. Pull the ice cream from the freezer at this point.

        The last collage shows the foil been turned down from the edges, it is cut into 9 squares, one square is place on the bottom of the cookie, the top cookie is added.

        Step 17. Pull down the foil from around the edges of the ice cream. Step18. Cut it into 9 squares. Step 19. Place an ice cream square on top of the cookie. Step 20. Place the top cookie on. Freeze the cookies at this point.

        Recipe FAQS

        Why do ice cream sandwiches get soggy?

        The cookie absorbs the liquid from the melting ice cream. However, if a firm but not hard recipe for the cookie is used, it is less likely to happen.

        How do you cut ice cream for ice cream sandwiches?

        If using bought ice cream, soften it enough to spread it into a 9x9" square pan that has been lined with foil. Microwaving it briefly (about 10 to 15 seconds) in the paper container will do it. Don't liquify it or it will change the texture. Freeze hard. Pull down the sides of the foil and cut it into the desired number of portions or use a round cookie cutter if using round cookies.

        Do I have to use chocolate cookies?

        No. Any cookie, chocolate chip, oatmeal, pecan cookies, etc. will all do.

        Storage

        After the cookies are sandwiched, freeze hard. Wrap each cookie individually in foil. They can be stored for a month or so. Eat directly from the freezer, allow a few minutes for the ice cream to soften if too hard.

        This picture features 3 completed ice cream sandwiches on a table.

        More Homemade Ice Creams

        • No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream
          No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream
        • A bowl of vanilla ice cream covered with the Hot Hot Fudge Sundae Sauce.
          Hot Hot Fudge Sauce
        • Caramel Cone Ice Cream
          Caramel Cone Ice Cream ala Häagen-Dazs®
        • Magic Shell
          Magic Shell for Ice Cream

        If you love these Homemade Ice Cream Sandwiches, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

        Three Ice Cream Sandwiches on a white plate with multi colored glasses and napkins behind.

        Homemade Ice Cream Sandwiches

        Helen S. Fletcher
        Homemade Ice Cream Sandwiches feature 2 Chocolate cookies sandwiched with a filling of Caramel Brickle Ice Cream dripping of caramel and crunchy from the brickle for this ice cream treat.
        No ratings yet
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 55 minutes mins
        Freezing time 1 hour hr
        Total Time 1 hour hr 55 minutes mins
        Course Ice Cream
        Cuisine American
        Servings 9 sandwiches
        Calories 450 kcal
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        • 2 ½ cups all-purpose flour (350 grams)
        • ½ cup cocoa (45 grams)
        • ¾ cup powdered sugar (90 grams)
        • ¾ teaspoon salt
        • 1 ½ cups unsalted butter (285 grams)
        • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract (McCormick's if fine)
        • Caramel Brickle Ice Cream

        Instructions
         

        Chocolate Cookies

        • Preheat oven to 350°F / 175°C. Line baking sheets with parchment paper and set aside.
        • Sift together the flour, cocoa, sugar, and salt.  Set aside.
        • Beat the butter and vanilla until creamy.  Add the flour mixture, beating until combined.  Chill the dough if it is too soft to roll.  
        • Roll half the dough (about 390 grams each) into a 10x10 inch rectangle about ¼” thick between wax paper (see why I prefer wax paper in Cut Out Cookies Wax Paper Technique)
        • Trim the edges to make a 9x9 inch square. With a ruler mark 3 across and 3 down for 9 squares. Press the ruler to the bottom of the markings but do not go through the dough. Prick each cookie as shown to keep it from baking unevenly. Freeze hard. Repeat with the second half of the dough.
        • Remove from the freezer and break the squares apart.  Place on the prepared baking sheets. There will be 18 squares.
        • Double pan to prevent over browning of the bottom of the cookies and bake 14 to 16 minutes very firm. They will continue to firm up as they cool. Cool completely. At this point they can be stored in an airtight container for days until needed.

        Assembly

        • Pair the cookies for size. Turn the bottom cookie upside down. Set aside.
        • Remove the ice cream from the freezer. Pull down the foil from around the edges.
        • Cut into 9 equal portions - about 2 ¾" each.
        • Place one square of ice cream on the bottom cookie. Place the second cookie on top.
        • Freeze hard. Wrap each one in foil and store in the freezer for up to a month.

        Notes

        There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
        As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
        _______________________________________________________
        If you're using the Caramel Brickle Ice Cream,  have it in the freezer if you want to eat these right away.
        The chocolate cookies, being shortbreads, are great by themselves and will hold in an airtight container for a week ready to use when you are.  
        Dutch cocoa is preferred as it gives a deeper color and taste.  Natural will also work.
        Powdered sugar used in cookies makes a more tender cookie than granulated sugar.
         

        Nutrition

        Serving: 9sandwichesCalories: 450kcalCarbohydrates: 39gProtein: 5gFat: 32gSaturated Fat: 20gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 81mgSodium: 200mgPotassium: 120mgFiber: 3gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 945IUCalcium: 21mgIron: 2mg
        Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

        No Churn Caramel Brickle Ice Cream

        Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Jul 26, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 8 Comments

        Scoops of Caramel Brickle ice cream in a white dish on a gray plate.

        No Churn Caramel Brickle Ice Cream is one of those unbelievably fast and fantastic recipes that comes together in minutes. Four ingredients make up this ice cream treat that no one will believe you whipped up.

        Scoops of Caramel Brickle ice cream in a white dish on a gray plate.

        This is the first part of two recipes that will make up the Ice Cream Sandwiches next week. So get a head start make this and store it in the freezer in the 9x9" pan ready for the chocolate cookies that will sandwich it.

        Don't be afraid of making the caramel sauce. It is super easy and once you taste it, it will be hard to go back to bought. The fact you need to make it ahead is one less thing to do for the ice cream.

        Other quick ice creams to consider are: Individual Baked Alaskas, Caramel Hot Fudge Sundae, and the Double Chocolate No Machine Ice Cream,

        [feast_advanced_jump_to]

        Why This Recipe Works

        • It's easy. Don't be intimidated by making the caramel sauce. It's super easy and so much better than the bought stuff.
        • It's delicious.
        • No one will believe you made this.
        • Perfect by itself or in the Ice Cream Sandwiches.
        • It's a make ahead recipe and who doesn't love those during the summer?
        • It won't heat up the kitchen.

        Variations

        By omitting the caramel and brickle you will have a very basic ice cream. Add vanilla or another flavor as desired.

        Add ½ to ¾ cup of nuts, chips, fruit, etc that you like. Swirl fruit purees though out. Broken up cookies and candy work well also.

        Recipe Ingredients

        Caramel

        Caramel ingredients are water, granulated sugar, cream, butter, water and vanilla extract.

        FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, corn syrup, vanilla extract

        BACK ROW: Water, granulated sugar, heavy cream

        Caramel Brickle Ice Cream

        Ingredients for the Caramel Brickle Ice Cream are condensed milk, heavy cream, caramel, brickle.

        FRONT ROW: Caramel, brickle

        BACK ROW: Condensed Milk, heavy cream

        Key Ingredients

        Condensed Milk should be used. Do not confuse it with evaporated milk, they are two different things.

        Heavy Cream should be used for its higher fat content. Regular whipping cream will not whip up as thick so the texture of the ice cream will be lighter.

        Brickle is the toffee inside of a Heath bar and can be purchased in the baking aisle with chocolate chips. Heath English Toffee Bits and Skor makes them. You can also make your own with my Salted Macadamia Rum Toffee.

        Homemade Caramel Sauce is in a league by itself. Very easy to make and so much better than a bought one.

        Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients and instructions.

        Step by Step Instructions

        The first collage shows a 9x9 inch square pan being covered on the bottom with foil, the foil is then put inside the pan, the cream whipped and the condensed milk added to it.

        Step 1. Turn a 9x9 inch pan upside down and shape a large piece of foil around it. Turn the corners in to square the foil. Step 2. Carefully remove the pan shaped foil and turn the pan over. Place the foil inside the pan and seat it well into the corners. Step 3. Whip the cream to medium stiff peaks. Step 4. Add the condensed milk to the cream. Fold the two together.

        The last collage shows the brickle being added to the cream.

        Step 5. Add the brickle to the cream mixture. Step 6. Fold the brickle in and spread it evenly into the prepared pan. Step 7. if the caramel is made ahead and cold, microwave very briefly to return to a syrup stage and pour it over the ice cream. Step 8. Swirl the caramel in. Do not over swirl as you want the caramel to be obvious.

        Recipe FAQS

        What does "no churn" mean?

        It simply means no ice cream machine is need to make it. It is very easy and can be made in minutes.

        How can no churn ice cream be made softer.

        Several things can be done so it doesn't freeze like a block of ice. First, don't beat the cream to really stiff peaks. Secondly, a tablespoon or two of alcohol such as vodka or any flavor you desire can be added to deter the freezing.

        Can you use something besides condensed milk.

        No, the recipe will not work without it. All condensed milk is sweetened. In addition to adding sweetness to the ice cream, it is a substitute for the custard often used in regular ice cream.

        Expert Tips

        • When whipping the cream, do not take it to the stiffest point. By whipping it to the medium stage, it will help prevent the ice cream from becoming rock hard in the freezer.
        • However, if you have taken the cream too far, simply let the frozen ice cream sit on the counter for 5 or so minutes to soften.
        • A tablespoon or two of vodka or any other alcohol will help keep the ice cream soft.
        The photo is of the ice cream in a white bowl on two gray plates.

        Other Summer Desserts to Tempt You

        • Strawberry Granita sists in a white bowl on a blue and white background with a yellow napkin and spoon .
          Strawberry Balsamic Granita Recipe
        • Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart
          Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart
        • A slice of the Chocolate Strawberry Pie on a white plate.
          Chocolate Strawberry Pie
        • Chocolate Creamsicle Cake
          All American Chocolate Creamsicle Cake

        If you love these Buttermilk Flatbreads, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

        Scoops of Caramel Brickle ice cream in a white dish on a gray plate.

        No Churn Caramel Brickle Ice Cream

        Helen S. Fletcher
        No Churn Caramel Brickle Ice Cream is one of those unbelievably fast and fantastic recipes that comes together in minutes. Four ingredients make up this ice cream treat that no one will believe you whipped up.
        4.50 from 2 votes
        Print Recipe Pin Recipe
        Prep Time 30 minutes mins
        Chilling Time 2 hours hrs
        Total Time 2 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
        Course Ice Cream, No Churn Ice Cream
        Cuisine American
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 499 kcal

        Equipment

        • Candy Thermometer
        Prevent your screen from going dark

        Ingredients

        Caramel Sauce

        • ½ cup water
        • ¼ cup corn syrup
        • ⅔ cup granulated sugar (130 grams)
        • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter (30 grms)
        • ½ cup heavy cream
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

        Caramel Brickle Ice Cream

        • 1 ⅓ cups heavy cream
        • ⅔ cup condensed milk
        • ⅔ cup toffee bits or brickle
        • ½ cup caramel from above

        Instructions
         

        Caramel

        • Using the ingredients listed below, please go to Caramel for step by step pbotos.
        • In a heavy saucepan that is at least 4 times as big as the ingredients, place the water, sugar and corn syrup, stirring until combined.  
        • When it begins to boil, wash down the sides of the pan with a brush dipped in cold water
        • Boil until it becomes a deep golden color, swirling the pan so the color is even.
        • Remove from the heat immediately and add the butter, stirring until it is melted.  Stir in the cream and vanilla carefully as it may boil up.  Return the pan to the heat and boil, without stirring, to 218°F. This will happen very quickly after returning to the heat.
        • Pour into a container and let it come to room temperature undisturbed.  

        Store at room temperature for several days or refrigerate if holding longer.    

          Caramel Brickle No Churn Ice Cream

          • Turn a 9x9"square pan upside down. Using a large piece of foil, press it to the shape of the pan. Carefully remove the foil, turn the pan right side up and place the square foil inside the pan, pressing it against the sides and into the corners. Set aside.
          • Whip the cream to medium stiff peaks.  
          • Pour the condensed milk over the cream and fold together.
          • Fold in the brickle and pour into the prepared pan.
          • If the caramel has been refrigerated, microwave very briefly to soften. Do not liquify it. It should remain as a thick sauce.
          • Spread ½ cup or more over the the ice cream and fold it in. Don't over fold because you want the caramel to be visable. There will be some sauce left over. Store in the refrigerator or eat it by the spoonful. Your choice.
          • Freeze. This will keep covered in the freezer for a couple of weeks.

          Notes

          When whipping the cream, do not take it to the stiffest point. By whipping it to the medium stage, it will help prevent the ice cream from becoming rock hard in the freezer.
          However, if you have taken the cream too far, simply let the frozen ice cream sit on the counter for 5 or so minutes to soften.
          A tablespoon or two of vodka or any other alcohol will help keep the ice cream soft. It can mixed with the condensed milk.  
          All condensed milk is sweetened.  There is also a low fat version but I haven't tried it.  
          The brickle can be sold with or without chocolate.  It really doesn't matter which you use.
          There will be a bit of caramel left over.  It is impossible to reduce it any further.   Just refrigerate it to use elsewhere or drizzle it on the ice cream  when eating it.
          Don't forget this will be used next week in the ice cream sandwiches.  Just sayin'. 
           

          Nutrition

          Serving: 8servingsCalories: 499kcalCarbohydrates: 53gProtein: 4gFat: 31gSaturated Fat: 20gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 98mgSodium: 82mgPotassium: 158mgSugar: 53gVitamin A: 1184IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 118mgIron: 0.1mg
          Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

          Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake

          Modified: Apr 22, 2026 · Published: Jul 20, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

          A slice of Pina Colada cheesecake with caramelized pineapple sits on a tan plate.

          What if I told you this cool, creamy Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake can be made with no water bath, sour cream, eggs or condensed milk. Well, it can! It has all the flavors of a pina colada in a smooth, velvety dessert that can quickly be whipped up in the processor in a matter of minutes.

          The Caramelized Pineapple Sauce that goes along with it is the final touch to a quick and easy dessert. This sauce can also go on pound cake, ice cream, or just eat it by te spoonful.

          Ever wonder where they come from? The first cheesecakes are thought to be from Samos in Ancient Greece where they were served at weddings. A far cry from modern cheesecakes, these consisted of wheat flour, pounded cheese and honey. Along the years, it has been refined and remade and today it's at the top of the list of favorite desserts.

          The graham cracker-coconut crust can be used without baking but I highly recommend that you bake it so it stays firm even if refrigerated for several days.

          If you've always wanted to know how to make a cheesecake, this is the easiest and best around. If you're looking for more summer recipes go to my post Summer Roundup of Sweet and Savory. Another incredible cheesecake is the Easy Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding.

          [feast_advanced_jump_to]

          Why You'll Love this Recipe

          • It's super easy for little effort.
          • It's an easy dessert that's perfect when you don't want the oven on for hours.
          • It tastes incredible and like you have spent the day making it.
          • It's rich flavor is very balanced both sweet and a bit tart from the sauce.
          • It's simple but elegantly sophisticated.
          • Perfect after barbecue.

          Substitutions

          If you don't wish to use alcohol, add the gelatin to ¼ cup water and increase the coconut extract to 1 tablespoon.

          Recipe Ingredients

          Coconut Graham Cracker Crust

          The ingredients for the cheesecake crust are powdered sugar, unsweetened coconut, unsalted butter and graham crackers.

          BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, unsweetened coconut

          FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, graham crackers

          Cheesecake Filling

          The filling ingredients include powdered sugar,coco lopez, heavy cream, coconut extract, cream cheese, crushed pinapple, Malibu Rum, and gelatin.

          BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, coco lopez, heavy cream

          MIDDLE ROW: Coconut extract, cream cheese, crushed pineapple

          FRONT ROW: Malibu rum, gelatin

          Caramelized Pineapple Sauce

          For the caramelized pineapple, fresh pineapple chunks, golden syrup, brown sugar and unsalted butter are used.

          BACK ROW: Fresh Pineapple chunks, golden syrup

          FRONT ROW: Brown sugar (light or dark), unsalted butter

          Cream of Coconut

          Do not confuse this with coconut milk – they are vastly different. One cannot be substituted for the other. There are several brands and the one above it the one I use.

          I have seen it have a heavy white semisolid mixture at the top of the can with a dark, translucent liquid at the bottom.  When whisked together it becomes an off white liquid.  There might even be a few shreds of coconut.  It can also be just the translucent liquid. Either is fine as long as it is cream of coconut.

          Golden Syrup

          Lyle's Golden Syrup is a staple in English Baking and I can tell you it’s amazing. I can literally eat it by the spoonful.  It can be used where ever corn syrup or honey is used and it's great on pancakes and waffles.  It can be easily found online or stores that sell international items and brings a taste that substitutes simply can’t.  However, if you have to substitute I have seen clear corn syrup used.

          Malibu Rum

          This is a popular, combination of Caribbean rum with coconut liqueur.  It can be bought in small airline or single serve bottles that can be found in some grocery stores or liquor stores for sure.  The bottle contains ¼ cup which is perfect for this recipe. If you can't find it, use 3 tablespoons light rum, 1 tablespoon water and 2 teaspoons coconut extract.

          The Coconut

          Unsweetened coconut, also known as dessicated coconut is important in this crust. Without the sweetening it is just pure coconut that has a more impactful flavor.

          Powdered Sugar

          Powdered sugar is used because it will dissolve instantly into the other ingredients. Granulated sugar has the chance of remaining grainy.

          Cream Cheese

          Low fat cream cheese can be substituted if desired. Either should be room temperature when used.

          Crushed Pineapple

          Canned crushed pineapple is used in the filling of the cheesecake. It should be drained and squeezed dry before adding to the rest of the ingredients.

          Fresh pineapple should not be used because there is an enzyme in it that prevents gelatin from setting.

          Whipped Heavy Cream

          Heavy cream refers to cream that has at least 35% fat as opposed to regular whipping cream that has about 30%. The heavier fat content makes a thicker whipped cream that doesn't water out after beating and needs no stabalization.

          While I don't normally like to whip cream in the processor because it doesn't become very light, it is perfect in this application. The lack of air in the whipped cream adds to the smooth, velvet, dense texture of the cheesecake.

          Caramelized Pineapple

          For this, fresh pineapple is used for it's taste. It is important to use somewhat under ripe pineapple so it doesn’t turn to mush when caramelizing.

          Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!

          Step by Step Instructions

          Coconut Graham Cracker Crust

          A cheesecake pan consisting of a rim and a removable bottom.

          Step 1. Spray a 9x3 inch a cheesecake pan with a removable bottom with non-stick baking spray. A springform pan can also be used. Set aside.

          Unsweetened coconut is spread in a single layer on a baking sheet.

          Step. Preheat the oven to 350°F. Spread the unsweetened coconut in a single layer on a baking sheet. Keep it together so stray strands don't burn.

          Step 3. Toast the coconut for about 5 minutes, stir and toast until the coconut is a golden brown. Cool.

          The graham crackers and powdered sugar are in the bowl of a processor.

          Step 4. Process the graham crackers and powdered sugar to make crumbs.

          The coconut has been processed with the graham crackers to make crumbs.

          Step 5. Add the toasted coconut to the processor and pulse several times to combine them. Remove to a bowl.

          Butter added to the crumbs to make the crust.

          Step 6. Add the melted butter to the crumbs and mix with a fork to form larger crumbs.

          The crumb crust is pressed evenly in the pan.

          Step 7. Press the crumbs evenly into the bottom of the pan and bake for 10 to 12 minutes until lightly browned.

          The edge of the crust has pulled away slightly from the pan.

          Step 8. The edge of the crust will, most likely, pull away slightly from the pan which can allow the liquid cheesecake to run down it.

          A spoon is used to seal the crust back to the edge of the pan after baking.

          Step 9. Press the crust that has pulled away back to the edge of the pan with the back of a soup spoon. At the bakery, we referred to this as "spooning the crust".

          The crust is sealed to the edge of the pan.

          Step 10. The edge is sealed tightly again so no liquid can slip down the opening.

          Cheesecake Filling

          The gelatin is placed in water to soften or bloom.

          Step 1. Place the gelatin in Malibu rum or water to bloom or soften.

          The water has been absorbed by the gelatin and is a solid mass.

          Step 2. Stir immediately to make sure all of the gelatin is wet making a gelatinous blob.

          The cream of coconut has been whisked to bring it together in a bowl.

          Step 3. Whisk the coco lopez together to make sure it is completely combined. Measure 1 cup.

          The heavy cream has been whipped in a processor bowl.

          Step 4. Add the cream to the processor bowl and process until whipped and thick. Remove to a large bowl.

          The cream cheese and powdered sugar are in the processor bowl.

          Step 5. Without cleaning the processor bowl, add the cream cheese and powdered sugar. Process until smooth, scraping to make sure there are no lumps left.

          The remaining ingredients have been added to the processor and processed until smooth.

          Step 6. Heat the gelatin (either in the water or Malibu rum) in the microwave just long enough to liquify it. Add this, the cream of coconut, and coconut extract. Process until smooth, scraping several times.

          The pineapple is added to the filling and the whipped cream in a bowl.

          Step 7. Add the cream cheese mixture and pineapple which has been squeezed dry to the whipped cream and fold everything together.

          The filling has been poured over the crust.

          Step 8. Pour the mixture over the coconut-graham cracker crust and refrigerate at least 6 hours or overnight.

          Caramelized Pineapple Sauce

          The butter, golden or corn syrup and brown sugar are in a saute pan.

          Step 1. Place the butter, brown sugar and golden or corn syrup in a saute pan large enough to hold the pineapple.

          The sauce is brought to a rolling boil.

          Step 2. Bring the mixture to a rolling boil. Skim the foam from the sauce.

          The fresh pineapple is added to the syrup.

          Step 3. Add the fresh pineapple to the syrup and continue cooking at a boil until the sauce reduces and coats the pineapple.

          The caramelized pineapple is in a serving glass with a spoon beside it.

          Step 4. Serve slightly warm along side the cheesecake.

          Recipe FAQ's

          Is cheesecake best baked or unbaked?

          They are two different desserts. The former is denser due to added ingredients such as sour cream and eggs and is usually baked in a water bath. The unbaked cheesecake is usually lighter in texture with fewer ingredients and depends upon gelatin to set it. Neither is better than the other. They are both delicious.

          Should I leave the cheesecake in its pan?

          Yes, since either baked or unbaked the cheesecake needs to chill in the refrigerator to firm it up. It should be released after setting up.

          Why do baked cheesecakes crack in them middle?

          There can be several reasons. It could be the recipe. It could be baked too long. Normally, they are taken out of the oven when they are slightly jiggly and then cooled to room temperature before being refrigerated to set up competely. If they are put directly into the refrigerator, they may also crack.

          Expert Tips

          • When adding gelatin to anything, the mixture to which it is added should be room temperature to ensure it combines smoothly. If a mixture is cold and the gelatin is introduced, it can become stringy and not set up.
          • Two kinds of pineapple are used. Fresh pineapple for the sauce and canned crushed pineapple for the filling. Fresh pineapple has an enzyme that prevents gelatin from setting up.
          • Under ripened fresh pineapple should be used for the sauce to keep it from becoming mushy when cooked.
          • The Malibu Rum can be bought in small airline or single serve bottles in grocery or liquor stores which are perfect for this cake.
          • 5 whole graham crackers can be processed to make the crumbs.
          Finished cheesecake on a round plate edged in gold.

          More Inviting Cheesecakes

          • This Chocolate Coffee No Bake Cheesecake sits on a drizzle of caramel sauce
            Chocolate Coffee No-Bake Cheesecake
          • Unbelievable Cheesecake
            Unbelievable Cheesecake Update!
          • Carrot Cake Cheesecake slice
            Carrot Cake Cheesecake

          If you love this Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake or any other recipe on my website, please please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the 📝 comments below. I appreciate you reading this post!

          A slice of Pina Colada cheesecake with caramelized pineapple sits on a tan plate.

          Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake

          Helen S. Fletcher
          What if I told you this cool, creamy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake can be made with no water bath, sour cream, eggs or condensed milk. Well, it can! It has all the flavors of a pina colada in a smooth, velvety dessert that can be whipped up in the processor in a matter of minutes.
          No ratings yet
          Print Recipe Pin Recipe
          Prep Time 45 minutes mins
          Chilling time 6 hours hrs
          Total Time 6 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
          Course Dessert
          Cuisine American
          Servings 14 servings
          Calories 515 kcal
          Prevent your screen from going dark

          Ingredients

          Coconut Graham Cracker Crust

          • 1 cup unsweetened coconut (40 grams)
          • ⅔ cup graham cracker crumbs (85 grams)
          • ½ cup powdered sugar (65 grams)
          • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (85 grams)

          Cheesecake Filling

          • 1 cup cream of coconut
          • 1 tablespoon gelatin
          • ¼ cup Malibu Rum or water
          • 1 cup heavy cream
          • 16 oz. cream cheese (454 grams)
          • 1 cup powdered sugar (130 grams)
          • 2 teaspoons coconut extract
          • 8 oz can crushed pineapple

          Caramelized Pineapple

          • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter (45 grams)
          • ⅓ cup golden or corn syrup
          • 3 tablespoons brown sugar, packed (25 grams))
          • 3 cups fresh pineapple chunks

          Instructions
           

          Coconut Graham Cracker Crust

          • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Spray a 9x3 inch cheesecake pan (or springform pan) with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
          • Spread the coconut on a baking sheet, making sure to push the eges together so there are no stray pieces of coconut that can burn. Toast for about 5 minutes until medium brown. Stir and toast briefly if needed. Cool.
          • If using whole graham crackers, break them into pieces and process them to make crumbs.
          • Add the toasted coconut and powdered sugar to the processor bowl and process to make crumbs. Remove to a bowl.
          • Add the melted butter to the crumbs and mix with a fork until completely combined. Press evenly into the bottom of the pan.
          • Bake for 10 to 12 minutes until lightly browned. If the crust has pulled away from the side of the pan, using a soup spoon, press it against the side of the pan so there is no gap. Set aside.

          Cheesecake Filling

          • Have all the ingredients except the cream at room temperature.
          • If you don't wish to use alcohol, add the gelatin to ¼ cup water and increase the coconut extract to 1 tablespoon.
          • Pour the contents of the cream of coconut into a bowl and whisk to combine completely. Measure 1 cup for the recipe.
          • Stir the gelatin into the Malibu rum or water. Set aside.
          • Whip the cream in the processor fitted with the S blade until fairly stiff. Remove to a large bowl.
          • Without cleaning the processor bowl, add the cream cheese and powdered sugar. Process until smooth, scraping down as necessary.
          • Micowave the gelatin briefly to liquify it completely. Pour this along with the cream of coconut and coconut extract into the processor. Process to mix.
          • Pour the contents of the processor over the whipped cream in the bowl.. Squeeze all of the liquid from the crushed pineapple and add it to the bowl. Fold all together and pour it over the crust. Smooth it out. Refrigerate to set, about 6 hours or overnight.
          • Release by heating the sides of the pan with a hair dryer on high. See my Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce. for complete instructions and photos. Keep the cake refrigerated until serving.

          Caramelized Pineapple Sauce

          • Place the butter, golden syrup or corn syrup and brown sugar in a skillet large enough to hold the pineapple.
          • Bring the mixture to a rolling boil. Skim off the foam. Add the pineapple chunks and return to a boil. Continue to cook until the sauces reduces and coats the pineapple.
          • Serve warm over the cheesecake. The sauce can be made ahead and refrigerated for up to a week. Warm when serving.

          Notes

          Lyle's Golden Syrup is a staple in English baking and I can tell you  it’s amazing.  It can be used wherever corn syrup or honey are used and it's great on pancakes and waffes.  It can be easily found online or stores that sell international items and brings a taste that substitutes simply can’t.  However, if you have to substitute I have seen clear corn syrup used.
          When adding gelatin to anything, the mixture to which it is added should be room temperature to ensure it combines smoothly. If a mixture is cold and the gelatin is introduced, it can become stringy and not set up.
          Two kinds of pineapple are used. Fresh pineapple for the sauce and canned crushed pineapple for the filling. Fresh pineapple has an enzyme that prevents gelatin from setting up. 
          Under ripened fresh pineapple should be used for the sauce to keep it from becoming mushy when cooked.
          The Malibu Rum can be bought in small airline or single serve bottles in grocery or liquor stores which are perfect for this cake.
          Five whole graham crackers can be processed into crumbs if not using purchased crumbs. 
          If you don't wish to use alcohol, add the gelatin to ¼ cup water and increase the coconut extract to 1 tablespoon.

          Nutrition

          Serving: 14servingsCalories: 515kcalCarbohydrates: 51gProtein: 4gFat: 33gSaturated Fat: 22gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 71mgSodium: 154mgPotassium: 172mgFiber: 3gSugar: 46gVitamin A: 935IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 61mgIron: 1mg
          Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

           

          Hot Hot Fudge Sauce

          Modified: Jul 28, 2025 · Published: Jul 18, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 5 Comments

          A bowl of vanilla ice cream covered with the Hot Hot Fudge Sundae Sauce.

          This shiny, luxurious, midnight dark Hot Hot Fudge Sauce is just in time to make the easiest dessert around list. While the basic hot fudge sauce is always welcome, I upped the ante by adding a touch of coffee and cayenne pepper, two ingredients that always give a boost to chocolate. I almost forgot to tell you this can be made in about 20 minutes including measuring, cooking and clean up.

          A bowl of vanilla ice cream covered with the Hot Hot Fudge Sundae Sauce.

          The coffee is subtle and the cayenne is not noticeable until you swallow. Then a tingle hits the back of your mouth. Of course if you are into more heat, double the amount.

          And don't stop at serving it with ice cream. Think, chocolate fondue with fresh fruit or cubes of cake, as a topping for a brownie sundae, dress up a plain pound cake with this liquid black gold sauce.....or do what I do, eat a spoonful all by itself. When cold or room temperature, it's like the best chocolate truffle you'll ever eat.

          There are other recipes on my site that use pepper of some kind to add flavor and a surprise. Chocolate Spice Olive Oil Biscotti uses coffee. black pepper and cayenne to add a kick to this cookie, Strawberry Balsamic Black Pepper Granita is another really quick summer pick up as well as Strawberry Balsamic Jam or try the Caramel Hot Fudge Brownie Sundae for and easy treat.

          [feast_advanced_jump_to]

          Why You'll Want to Make This Sauce

          • Just a few ingredients and minutes of your time for the best sauce around.
          • It's thick like caramel and richer than chocolate sauce.
          • It tastes exactly like liquid fudge.
          • It's the perfect sauce for vanilla ice cream, topped with whipped cream.

          Recipe Ingredients

          Ingredients for the Hot Hot Fudge Sauce are heavy cream, Golden syrup, brown sugar, Dutch cocoa, semisweet chocolate, unsalted butter, vanilla extract, instant coffee and cayenne pepper.

          FRONT ROW: Cayenne pepper, instant coffee, vanilla extract

          MIDDLE ROW: Dutch Cocoa, Lyle's Golden syrup, unsalted butter

          BACK ROW: Brown sugar, semisweet chocolate, heavy cream

          Key Ingredients

          Brown Sugar is used for depth of flavor. Granulated can be substituted in the same amount if desired.

          Lyle's Golden Syrup from England has so much more flavor that corn syrup. It imparts a carmel flavor and is one of my favorite ingredients. It can often be found in shops that sell European ingredients and online. It comes in squeeze bottles or tins.

          Dutch Cocoa is preferred for the dark, rich flavor is brings. The cocoa helps thicken the sauce. It will not be it's typical really thick sauce without it.

          Heavy Cream is best. I've seen the recipes using condensed milk or evaporated milk but I encourage you to use heavy cream for the cleanest most chocolaty, fudgey taste. It makes all the difference.

          Callebaut SemiSweet Callets #811 is my chocolate of choice. Although they look like chocolate chips they are pure chocolate.

          Using McCormick's Imitation Vanilla Extract is perfect here. An expensive pure vanilla will be a waste here due to the intensity of the final taste. For an in depth look at vanilla in all it's forms see my post The Making of Vanilla.

          Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

          Step by Step Instructions

          Step 1. Place all the ingredients except the vanilla in a 2 quart saucepan. Step 2. Place over low heat and, stirring constantly, bring the ingredients together. Step 3. Raise the heat to medium low, bring the hot fudge sauce to a boil, stirring all the time. Boil for 3 minutes. It will be very thick. Stir in the vanilla and pour it into a container. Cool completely, cover and refrigerate where it will keep for weeks.

          Recipe FAQS

          How is Hot Fudge Sauce different from chocolate sauce?

          It is thicker and much richer. At room temperature it will be firm. It needs to be warmed to use.

          Can chocolate chips be used for the chocolate?

          Yes, but pure chocolate yields the best taste.

          Should I use pure vanilla extract?

          No, McCormick's Imitation vanilla is perfect here. The expense of the pure vanilla will be lost in the intensity of the finished sauce.

          Expert Tips

          • The most important thing is to keep the heat on low and keep stirring. There is a lot of chocolate and cocoa which can easily burn if left unattended. Be sure to stir into the edges of the pan.
          • Once everything is in liquid form, the heat can be raised to medium low to get it to boil.
          The bottom pictures shows the vanilla ice cream covered with the hot hot fudge sauce in a bowl on a beige plate with a brown napkin and spoon.

          A Few Summer Desserts

          • Skillet Brownies with vanilla ice cream on white and orange plates.
            Easy Skillet Turtle Brownies
          • A slice of Dutch Peach Pie on a white lace plate with a fork beside it.
            Dutch Peach Pie
          • Blueberry Crumb Coffee Cake
            Blueberry Crumb Coffeecake
          • Caramel Cone Ice Cream
            Caramel Cone Ice Cream ala Häagen-Dazs®

          If you love this Hot Hot Fudge Sauce, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

          A bowl of vanilla ice cream covered with the Hot Hot Fudge Sundae Sauce.

          Hot Hot Fudge Sauce

          Helen S. Fletcher
          This luxurious, midnight dark Hot Hot Fudge Sauce takes about 20 minutes from start to clean up. I upped the ante by adding a touch of coffee and cayenne pepper, two ingredients that always give a boost to chocolate.
          5 from 2 votes
          Print Recipe Pin Recipe
          Prep Time 20 minutes mins
          Total Time 20 minutes mins
          Course Ice Cream
          Cuisine American
          Servings 8 servings
          Calories 253 kcal
          Prevent your screen from going dark

          Ingredients

          • ½ cup heavy cream
          • ¼ cup Lyle's Golden Syrup or corn syrup
          • ⅓ cup dark brown sugar (65 grams)
          • ¼ cup Dutch cocoa (22 grams)
          • 5 ounces semisweet chocoalte (140 grams)
          • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter (30 grams)
          • ½ teaspoon instant coffee
          • ⅛ teaspoon cayenne pepper
          • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

          Instructions
           

          • Combine all but the vanilla in a 2 quart saucepan. Place over medium low heat and, stirring constantly, bring to a boil. Boil for 3 minutes.
          • Remove from the heat and stir in the vanilla. Cool to room temperature.
          • Store in the refrigerator for a couple of weeks.
          • To use: Microwave on half power just until pourable, stirring often. Use as desired.

          Notes

          There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
          As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
          ________________________________________________
          • The most important thing is to keep the heat on low and keep stirring. There is a lot of chocolate and cocoa which can easily burn if left unattended. Be sure to stir into the edges of the pan.
          • Once everything is in liquid form, the heat can be raised to medium low to get it to boil.
          • Brown Sugar is used for depth of flavor. Granulated can be substituted in the same amount if desired.
          • Lyle's Golden Syrup from England has so much more flavor that corn syrup. It imparts a carmel flavor and is one of my favorite ingredients. It can often be found in shops that sell European ingredients and online. It comes in squeeze bottles or tins. Regular Corn syrup can be substituted.
          • Dutch Cocoa is preferred for the dark, rich flavor is brings. The cocoa helps thicken the sauce. It will not be it's typical really thick sauce without it. Natural cocoa can be subbed.
          • Heavy Cream is best. I've seen the recipes using condensed milk or evaporated milk but I encourage you to use heavy cream for the cleanest most chocolaty, fudgey taste. It makes all the difference.
          • Callebaut SemiSweet Callets #811 is my chocolate of choice. Although they look like chocolate chips they are pure chocolate.
          • Using McCormick's Imitation Vanilla Extract is perfect here. An expensive pure vanilla will be a waste  due to the intensity of the final taste. For an in depth look at vanilla in all it's forms see my post The Making of Vanilla. 
           

          Nutrition

          Serving: 8servingsCalories: 253kcalCarbohydrates: 29gProtein: 2gFat: 16gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 25mgSodium: 16mgPotassium: 186mgFiber: 3gSugar: 24gVitamin A: 328IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 35mgIron: 2mg
          Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

          Blueberry Crumb Muffins

          Modified: May 12, 2026 · Published: Jul 10, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 10 Comments

          Four Blueberry Crumb Muffins sit on a white lattice plate with colored napkins and a yellow placemat.

          These Blueberry Crumb Muffins are topped with a Brown Sugar Almond Crumb that make them irresistible. Tender cake-like muffins, loaded with blueberries and crumbs, they are easily one of the best muffins you'll ever make and one of the easiest.

          Four Blueberry Crumb Muffins sit on a white lattice plate with colored napkins and a yellow placemat.

          There are two types of blueberries, each being high in antioxidents: Wild and cultivated. The wild blueberries flourish by themselves and survive high in the glacial soils of Maine and Eastern Canada. They are about half the size of the cultivated ones. They are mostly sold frozen. I was lucky enough to find them at Sam's recently and snatched them up on sight. They are my preferred blueberry.

          Cultivated blueberries are bred, planted and harvested around the world. They are sold fresh and frozen and are about twice as big as the wild ones.

          In any case, the blueberries should be used frozen for ease of folding in as well as avoiding that dreaded gray look when baked.

          Other Blueberry recipes for your enjoyment include: An easy Blueberry Crumb Coffee Cake, an intensely flavored Lemon Blueberry Cake, and a surprise dessert the Blueberry Lemon Pizza in a Brioche Crust. For more great muffin recipes, check out Best Banana Streusel Muffin and The Only Muffin Recipes You'll Ever Need.

          [feast_advanced_jump_to]

          Why You Want to Make this Recipe

          • It's super simple to make and will have you out of the kitchen in no time.
          • Most of the ingredients can probably be found in your pantry.
          • They are packed with flavor and taste incredible.

          Recipe Ingredients

          Brown Sugar Almond Crumble

          Ingredients for the Brown Sugar Almond Cumb are cake flour, brown sugar,almond paste, salt and unsalted butter.

          FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter

          MIDDLE ROW: Almond paste, salt

          BACK ROW: Cake Flour, Brown Sugar

          Blueberry Muffins

          Muffin ingredients include, all-purpose flour, wheat flour, unsalted butter, sugar, eggs, baking powder, salt, vanill, cardamom, milk and blueberries.

          FRONT ROW: Vanilla, baking powder, cardamom, salt

          SECOND ROW: Unsalted butter

          THIRD ROW: Granulated sugar, eggs, white whole wheat flour

          BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, blueberries, milk

          • I use cake flour for the crumbs as they make a softer, more tender crumb. If using all-purpose flour, the measurement becomes 1 ⅓ cups.
          • An easily made Almond Paste can be made in a jiffy. There are two ways of making it. Either one is fine for this recipe.
          • I used a bit of white whole wheat flour to add to the taste of the muffins. Regular whole wheat flour, with its stronger taste, can be substituted. Additionally, 240 grams or 1 ¾ cups of all-purpose flour can be used omitting the whole wheat flour.
          • I prefer dark brown sugar for this recipe for its more robust taste.

          Be sure the see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients and instructions.

          Step by Step Photos

          The first collage shows the dry ingredients for the brown sugar almond crumble in the processor.

          Step 1. Place the brown sugar, cake flour and salt in the processor. Step 2. Process briefly to mix. Step 3. Cut the butter and almond paste into small pieces and place over the dry ingredients. Step 4. Using long pulses at the start and short pulses as it comes together in crumbs, process until the crumbs form. So not over process or it will form a paste. Refrigerate while making the muffins.

          This collage shows the butter, sugar and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer, mixed, first egg added and batter formed.

          Step 5. Add the butter, sugar and vanilla to a mixing bowl. Step 6. Mix until completely blended. It will not be light or fluffy. Mix 7. Add the first egg. Step 8. Beat on medium until mixed.

          This collages shows the last egg has left the batter curdled, the dry ingredients blended, part of the flour in the mixer, part of the milk added to the batter.

          Step 9. After adding the second egg the batter, most likely, will be curdled. See my post How to Avoid Curdled Cake Batters for more information. Step 10. Whisk together the dry ingredients. Step 11. Starting and ending with the flour, alternate the flour.... Step 12. ...and milk, beating each time to combine on low. Three additions of flour and 2 of milk work well here. Scrape often.

          The last collages shows the finished batter, the blueberries folded in and the  muffins on a topped with crumbs.

          Step 13. Beat the batter on low until mixed. Step 14. Remove the bowl from the mixer and fold in the frozen blueberries. Step 15. I made these in Texas muffin cups and dropped them with a #8 disher/scooper, about ½ cup each. Because them came out rounded, I flattened them with a spoon. Step 16. Apply as much crumbs as you can, pressing then into the batter. Bake as directed. Cool in the pans for 5 to 10 minutes and then remove them to a cooling rack to prevent them from sweating in the pans as they cool.

          Baked Crumb Topping

          To bake any leftover crumbs please see my post on Crumb Topping. These are perfect over ice cream, or anywhere a crumb topping is needed but baked first.

          Recipe FAQS

          Why are blueberries good for you?

          They are loaded with antioxidents.

          What should you not do when making muffins?

          Over mixing can make a tough muffin. If using a mixer, it is best to lower the speed of the mixer when adding the flour.

          Can blueberry muffins be frozen

          These certainly can for up to 3 months. Freeze them, then place in freezer bags or wrap individually in foil. Thaw at room temperature. Freshen them by placing in a 350°F oven for about 10 minutes after thawing. They taste just baked.

          Expert Tips

          • Use frozen blueberries for a more attractive baked muffin.
          • Add them while frozen. Do not add them to the mixer.
          • Use wild blueberries if possible. There will be twice as many berries as those found in the produce department or most frozen blueberries. They are usually sweeter.
          • The muffins can be be made any size. Fill to about ¾ of the cup and add the crumbs. Just adjust the baking time.
          • Using disher/scoopers help make muffins the same size.
          • Home made almond paste is easy to make and is perfect for the Brown Sugar Almond Crumbs.
          • Dark brown sugar yields a deeper flavored crumb.
          • Cake flour is used in the crumbs for a lighter crumb.
          • Lining the muffin tins with paper liners helps keep the crumbs in place.
          This photo shows a muffin, topped with powdered sugar broken open in its paper liner.

          Other Irresistible Muffins and Quick Breads

          • Basic muffins are shown plain and with sanding sugar glistening on top.
            A Perfectly Easy Basic Muffin Mix
          • Slices of Banana Bread in a circle with strawberries in the middle on a blue and white plate.
            Best Two Step Banana Nut Bread
          • Strawberry Muffins
            Best of All Strawberry Muffins
          • Peach Pecan Quick Bread
            Peach Pecan Quick Bread
          Four Blueberry Crumb Muffins sit on a white lattice plate with colored napkins and a yellow placemat.

          Blueberry Crumb Muffins

          Helen S. Fletcher
          These tender Blueberry Crumb Muffins are topped with a Brown Sugar Almond Crumb that make them irresistible. Loaded with blueberries and crumbs, they are easily e one of the best muffins you'll ever make.
          5 from 2 votes
          Print Recipe Pin Recipe
          Prep Time 30 minutes mins
          Cook Time 35 minutes mins
          Total Time 1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
          Course Muffins
          Cuisine American
          Servings 8 muffins
          Calories 675 kcal

          Equipment

          • Texas Muffin Tins or another size if preferred.
          Prevent your screen from going dark

          Ingredients

          Brown Sugar Almond Crumble

          • 1 ½ cups cake flour (180 grams)
          • ⅔ cup dark brown sugar (130 grams)
          • 4 ounces unsalted butter, cold (114 grams or 1 stick)
          • 3 ounces almond paste (85 grams)
          • ¼ teaspoon salt

          Blueberry Crumb Muffins - please note the *substitutions at the end of the ingredient list

          • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened (114 grams or 1 stick)
          • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
          • 2 large eggs
          • 2 teaspoons baking powder
          • ½ teaspoon salt
          • ½ teaspoon cardamom, optional
          • 1 teaspoon vailla extract
          • 1 ⅓ cup all-purpose flour* (180 grams)
          • ½ cup white whole wheat flour** (60 grams)
          • ½ cup milk, whole or 2%
          • 2 ½ cups blueberries, frozen preferred
          • *1 ¾ cups all-purpose flour can be substituted (240 grams)
          • ** ½ cup regular whole wheat flour can be used (60 grams)

          Instructions
           

          Brown Sugar Almond Crumble

          • Place the dry ingredients in the processor bowl and pulse several times to mix.
          • Cut the cold butter and almond paste into small pieces. Add to the processor bowl and pulse to form large crumbs starting with long pulses and then short as the crumbs come together. Do not over process or a paste will form. Refrigerate while preparing the muffins. These can also be made days in advance and refrigerated or stored in the freezer.

          Blueberry Crumb Muffins

          • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line the muffin tins with paper liners. The tins can be sprayed with a non-stick baking release also, but the liners do a better job of keeping the crumbs in place. Set aside.
          • Place the butter, sugar, and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer. Beat until well combined.
          • Add the eggs, one at a time, beating until completely incorporated. After the second egg is added the mixture will probably curdle. Scape well after each addition. The next step will take care of that.
          • Whisk the flours, baking powder, and salt together.
          • Add the flour and milk alternately on low speed, starting and ending with the flour. Three additions of flour and 2 of milk work well here.
          • Remove the bowl from the mixer and fold the frozen blueberries into the batter. Use immediately. The batter will be stiff from the frozen blueberries.
          • Fill the Texas muffin cups: Use a #8 disher/scooper or about ½ cup for each muffin. They should be about ¾ full.
          • Generously top with the Brown Sugar Almond Crumbs, pressing them into the batter. There will probably be left over crumbs. Freeze them for another use.
          • Bake about 35 to 38 minutes for the Texas muffin cups or until a tester comes out cleanly.

          Notes

          There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
          As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
          ________________________________________________
          If using regular muffin pans, use a #16 disher scooper or about ¼ cup, top with crumbs and bake for about 25 to 30 minutes until a tester comes out clean.  There will be about 15 muffins.
          Use frozen blueberries for a more attractive baked muffin.
          Fold the blueberries in while frozen. Do not add them to the mixer. The batter will be very stiff.
          Use wild blueberries if possible. There will be twice as many berries as those found in the produce department or most frozen blueberries. They are usually sweeter.
          The muffins can be made any size. Just adjust the baking time.
          Using disher/scoopers help make muffins the same size.
          Home made almond paste is easy to make and is perfect for the Brown Sugar Almond Crumbs.
          Dark brown sugar yields a deeper flavored crumb.
          Cake flour is used in the crumbs for a lighter crumb. 

          Nutrition

          Serving: 8muffinsCalories: 675kcalCarbohydrates: 96gProtein: 10gFat: 30gSaturated Fat: 16gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 109mgSodium: 359mgPotassium: 207mgFiber: 4gSugar: 53gVitamin A: 826IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 146mgIron: 2mg
          Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

          (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie

          Modified: Apr 22, 2026 · Published: Jul 1, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 8 Comments

          A slice of No Bake Strawberry Pie finished with whipped cream, sits on a white plate with a yellow gingham background.

          The only baking needed for this No Bake Strawberry Pie is about 13 minutes for the crust. The really wonderful thing about this recipe is the fresh strawberry filling thickened with Instant Clear Jel. If you've never used it, it's a game changer. It keeps the fruit fresh without cooking which alters the flavor.....and it's super easy to use.

          It's important to use Instant ClearJel and not just plain ClearJel which requires cooking to set.

          A slice of No Bake Strawberry Pie finished with whipped cream, sits on a white plate with a yellow gingham background.

          Fresh strawberries are cut into bite size pieces and combined with sugar, instant ClearJel, water and lemon juice, then poured into a vanilla wafer crust for that easy summer dessert you've been looking for. For more information on thickeners see my post, Thickeners as Used in Baking and Pastry.

          Other Strawberry desserts you might enjoy include: the elegant Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte, Strawberry Verrines, Unbelievable Cheesecake, and the really quick Strawberry Bread. And if your lookin for more recipes like this see my Summer Roundup of Sweet and Savory.

          [feast_advanced_jump_to]

          What is ClearJel

          I have found Instant ClearJel on Amazon but many companies are saying it can be used to can with. This is incorrect. It should not be used this way. I buy my Instant ClearJel from Nuts.com where it is more reasonably priced and I know it is the right one. This is not an affiliate link, just information.

          Types of ClearJel

          There are two types of ClearJel and each has it's own special uses.

          ClearJel (sometimes referred to as Cook Type) is activated by heat and liquid. It works well with acidic ingredients, tolerates high temperatures, and doesn't cause pie fillings to weep" during storage. It is especially good if canning pie fillings and is the only thickener recommended by the USDA for home canning. You can also use ClearJel to thicken sauces, stews, pot pies, etc. One downside is that recipes thickened with ClearJel break down if they're frozen and thawed.  ClearJel can be substituted in equal parts with tapioca starch, corn starch or arrowroot. Products using ClearJel can be heated twice.

          Instant ClearJel is often referred to as the secret ingredient in uncooked recipes. It requires no heat, sets up as soon as it comes in contact with liquid, and is not adjustable. Instant ClearJel is used in uncooked fillings, such as mousses or creamy cake or pie fillings. It needs to be mixed with sugar, then with the wet ingredients, and added to the rest of the filling at once. It is particularly good when used with fresh fruit for pie fillings. While Instant ClearJel can be heated, it is not primarily used this way and can only be heated once. One of its best properties is that it can be used when freezing and thawing.

          Why You'll Want to Make this Pie

          • It's sooo easy to make and beautiful.
          • Fresh strawberries come through in every bite.
          • It uses simple ingredients for the most part.
          • It uses minimal ingredients for maximum flavor.

          Recipe Ingredients

          Vanilla Wafer Crust

          The vanilla wafer crust uses vanilla wafers, powdered sugar and unsalted butter.

          FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter

          BACK ROW: Vanilla Wafers (Nilla wafers suggested), powdered sugar

          Strawberry Filling

          Ingredients for the filling are fresh strawberries, water, granulated sugar, instant clear jel and lemon juice.

          FRONT ROW: Granulated sugar, Instant ClearJel, lemon juice

          BACK ROW: Fresh strawberries, water

          Waterproofing the Crust

          Semisweet chocolate and butter to waterproof the crust.

          LEFT TO RIGHT: Semisweet chocolate, unsalted butter (white chocolate may be substitued for the dark).

          Whipped Cream Finish

          Powdered sugar in a small bowl and heavy cream make up the whipped cream wreath.

          LEFT TO RIGHT: Powdered sugar, heavy cream.

          Variations

          Blueberries can be substituted for the strawberries.

          Mixed berries such as blueberries, red raspberries, strawberries and blackberries can be used.

          Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients and instruction.

          Step by Step Instructions

          Vanilla Wafer Crust

          I recommend using Nabisco Nilla Wafers because not all vanilla wafers absorb the same amount of butter. If using another brand, withhold part of the butter and add as needed. You may need more or less.

          The crust collage shows the vanilla wafers in the processor bowl, processed, the powdered sugar added and processed.

          Step 1. Add the wafers to the processor bowl. Step 2. Process to form crumbs. Step 3. Add the powdered sugar. Step 4. Pulse to blend completely.

          The second collage shows the butter added to the crumbs, mixed, in the pie plate and pressed in.

          Step 5. Add the butter to the crumbs. Step 6. Toss the crumbs and butter with a fork until the crumbs are uniformly coated. Step 7. Pour them into the pie pan, evening them out. Push the crumbs up the side of the pie plate as well as the bottom. Step 8. Press the crumbs firmly in place by hand or using a measuring cup. Bake as noted.

          This collage shows the pie crust on a baking sheet, the dry ingredients mixed and the wet ingredients whisked.

          Step 9. Place the pie crust on a baking sheet and bake as directed. This makes it easier and safer to remove from the oven. When it is cool, waterproof the shell with either semisweet or white chocolate melted with a bit of butter and spreading it over the bottom particularly and sides of the shell. This keeps the bottom of the crust from becoming soggy. Chill the shell briefly to set the chocolate while preparing the rest of the recipe. Step 10. Add the Instant ClearJel to the sugar. Step 11. Whisk together. Step 12. Whisk together the lemon juice, water and red food coloring if using.

          The final collage shows the strawberry filling in the pie shell, the powdered sugar and cream in a mixing bowl, whipped and piped onto the edge of the strawberry pie.

          Step 13. Add the liquid mixture to the dry ingredients for the filling and mix well. Immediately pour over the strawberries making sure all of them are well coated. Pour the strawberry filling into the crust, evening it out. Step 14. Add the powdered sugar to the cream in a mixing bowl. Step 15. Whip the cream until stiff. Step 16. Fit a piping bag with a #5 open star, fill the bag with the cream and pipe a wreath around the edge of the strawberry pie, leaving the center exposed. Chill the pie until serving.

          Why is using Instant ClearJel better than cornstarch?

          First, there is no need to puree strawberries or cook them with the cornstarch. It's one less step. Also, the ClearJel is just that - a see through clear, shiny mixture that envelopes the strawberries for their best look and taste.

          Can cornstarch be used instead of Instant ClearJel.

          It can, but that's not this recipe and it won't result in the same clean taste as will ClearJel.

          Why use red food coloring?

          Using red food coloring enhances the looks of the strawberries. The Instant ClearJel is transparent and can sometimes be seen surrounding the fruit. However, it is completely optional and the pie looks fine without it.

          Storage

          While it's true that recipes made with Instant ClearJel can be frozen, I don't suggest freezing this strawberry pie. The texture and looks of the pie can be altered when thawed. It is best to eat this pie the day it is made.

          Expert Tips

          • If a food processor isn't available, place the wafers in a plastic bag and crush them with a rolling pin. You may need to do this several times for the amount of the crumbs.
          • Simply stir in sifted powdered sugar, then add the butter as called for.
          • Be sure to waterproof the crust. It can become soggy from the filling which is off-putting.
          • Use either semisweet or white chocolate for the waterproofing.
          • Make sure the pie plate is sprayed with a non-stick baking release or the crust can stick making it difficult to remove.
          • Do not use regular ClearJel which is sometimes referred to as Cook Type to differentiate it from the Instant version.
          • I used Nabisco Nilla Wafers as they are readily available. The amount of butter is geared towards these cookies. Other brands may need more or less butter so I would start with less if using a different brand and increase as needed.
          The finished No Bake Strawberry Pie is pictured from above showing off the wreath of whipped cream.

          More Easy Summer desserts

          • L'Opera Ice Cream Cake
            L'Opera Ice Cream Cake
          • Individual Meringue
            Meringue Shells
          • A slice of the Chocolate Strawberry Pie on a white plate.
            Chocolate Strawberry Pie
          • Slice on trivet
            Peach Pizza

          If you love this No Bake Strawberry Pie, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

          A slice of No Bake Strawberry Pie finished with whipped cream, sits on a white plate with a yellow gingham background.

          (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie

          Helen S. Fletcher
          Looking for that spectacular summer pie with practically no work?  Well, this No Bake Strawberry Pie is it! Easy, delectable and made in minutes, this will have you out of the kitchen in no time.
          5 from 4 votes
          Print Recipe Pin Recipe
          Prep Time 45 minutes mins
          Total Time 45 minutes mins
          Course Pie
          Cuisine American
          Servings 10 servings
          Calories 474 kcal
          Prevent your screen from going dark

          Ingredients

          Vanilla Wafer Crust

          • 60 vanilla wafers (215 grams)
          • ¼ cup powdered sugar (30 grams)
          • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (90 grams)

          Waterproofing the Crust

          • 4 ounces semisweet or white chocolate (114 grams)
          • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or shortening

          No Bake Strawberry Filling

          • 6 cups fresh strawberries (2 poundds or 910 grams)
          • 3 tablespoons Instant ClearJel
          • ½ to ¾ cup granulated sugar (100 to 150 grams)
          • ⅔ cup water
          • ⅓ cup lemon juice
          • Red food coloring, optional

          Whipped Cream Wreath

          • 1 cup heavy cream
          • ¼ cup powdered sugar (35 grams)

          Instructions
           

          Vanilla Wafer Crust

          • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Spray a 9" standard pie plate with a non stick baking release. Set aside.
          • Place the vanilla wafers in the bowl of a food processor. Process to make crumbs. There should be 2 cups. Add the powdered sugar and pulse to mix in.
          • Remove to a bowl and add the butter tossing with a fork to coat all of the crumbs.
          • Pour into the pie plate and press the crumbs up the side of the plate as well as the bottom. The sides should be a bit thicker than the bottom. Bake for 13 minutes. It will be lightly browned and firm up when cooled. Cool completely.

          Waterproofing the Crust

          • Combine the white or semisweet chocolate and butter or shortening. Microwave briefly to melt or place over simmering water to melt.
          • Coat the sides and bottom of the crust with the chocolate. Refrigerate until needed.

          No Bake Strawberry Filling

          • Wash and pat the strawberries dry. Remove the tops and cut into bite size pieces.
          • Whisk together the Instant ClearJel and sugar in a large bowl.
          • Mix the water and lemon juice together and add it to the dry ingredients. Add the red food coloring at this point if using. Whisk together and immediately pour over the strawberries. Stir to coat all the strawberries and distribute the liquid ingredients.
          • Pour into the prepared shell and even the filling out. Set aside.

          Whipped Cream Wreath

          • Combine the cream and powdered sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Whip until stiff peaks form.
          • Fit a piping bag with a #5 open star tip and add the cream. Pipe a wreath around the edge of the pie.
          • Refrigerate until serving. This is best served the day it is made.

          Notes

          There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
          As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
          ___________________________________________________
          If a food processor isn't available, place the wafers in a plastic bag and crush them with a rolling pin. You may need to do this several times for the amount of the crumbs.  Simply stir in sifted powdered sugar, then add the butter as called for.
          Be sure to waterproof the crust. It can become soggy from the filling which is off-putting.
          Use either semisweet or white chocolate for the waterproofing.
          Make sure the pie plate is sprayed with a non-stick baking release or the crust can stick making it difficult to remove.
          Do not use regular ClearJel which is sometimes referred to as Cook Type to differentiate it from the Instant version.
          I used Nabisco Nilla Wafers as they are readily available. The amount of butter is geared towards these cookies. Other brands may need more or less butter so I would start with less if using a different brand and increase as needed.
          Place the pie crust on a rimmed baking sheet to make it easier to remove from the oven when hot.
           

          Nutrition

          Serving: 10servingsCalories: 474kcalCarbohydrates: 56gProtein: 4gFat: 27gSaturated Fat: 15gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 49mgSodium: 155mgPotassium: 260mgFiber: 3gSugar: 37gVitamin A: 611IUVitamin C: 54mgCalcium: 40mgIron: 1mg
          Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

          Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies

          Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Jun 24, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

          Four Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies on a white plate with a brown rim.

          These Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies are loaded with peanuts used three ways for the most peanuty cookie ever! A peanut butter cookie is rolled in peanut sugar and filled with a Reeses type peanut butter filling. These are the perfect end to any meal or as a snack.

          Four Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies on a white plate with a brown rim.

          This easy to make cookie dough makes great cookies by themselves also. The peanut sugar adds a crunch not usually found in peanut butter cookies. In any case, these are a not-to-be-missed cookie.

          Two more not to be missed sweet treat is the Mexican Chocolate Brownies and the Irresistible White Chocolate Pistachio Cookies.

          [feast_advanced_jump_to]

          What Kind of Peanut Butter to Use

          While chunky can be used, a better choice is smooth, commercial peanut butter for both the filling and the cookie. Regular or low fat can be used. Natural or homemade is not the preferred choice here.

          Why use Bread Flour in the Cookies

          Bread flour is a stronger flour than all purpose. As, such is makes a chewier cookie. The other thing that helps a lot is to put the prepared dough in the fridge overnight. That allows the cookies to more evenly absorb the liquid. All purpose can be used but bread flour is my preferred choice. To learn more about flours see my post Flour as Used in Baking and The Frustrating Facts about Measuring Flour.

          Butter, Shortening or Both

          Unsalted butter is used for flavor. Shortening (think crisco) is used to stop the cookies from spreading too much which is what will happen when all butter is used. There is some controversy over using shortening.

          Historically Crisco was used as a replacement for. It used partially hydrogenated cottonseed oil which was high in trans fats. Trans fats — also called trans-fatty acids raises bad cholesterol and lowers good cholesterol.

          From January 24, 2007, all Crisco shortening products were reformulated to contain less than one gram of trans fat per serving.  It no longer uses partially hydrogenated oils which were the problem and now uses only hydrogenated oils which are what gives shortening its semisolid consistency and high performance cooking attributes without the trans fats.

          While the company touts no trans fats, there is actually .05 grams per serving which allows it to claim there is none.  But it is a much better product than was the original.

          Used judiciously and in small amounts, I think the benefit is great and use it where no other product is suitable. 

          Why You'll Love This Recipe

          • This recipe is really easy. Basically the dry ingredients are combined with the wet ingredients, then shaped.
          • These sandwich cookies are the most peanut laden cookies around.
          • The ingredients are probably in your pantry now.
          • Chocolate is added to the filling to intensify the flavor.
          • If there are children around, let them help roll the dough into balls.

          Recipe Ingredients

          Peanut Butter Cookie Dough

          Ingredients for the peanut butter cookie are bread flour, baking soda, salt, peanut butter, butter, shortening, granulated sugar, brown sugar, vanilla and eggs.

          FRONT ROW: Salt, unsalted butter, vanilla, baking soda

          MIDDLE ROW: Eggs, peanut butter, shortening

          BACK ROW: Brown sugar, bread flour, granulated sugar

          Peanut Sugar

          The ingredients for the peanut sugar are peanuts and granulated sugar.

          LEFT TO RIGHT: Salted peanuts, granulated sugar.

          Chocolate Peanut Butter Filling

          Filling ingredients powdered sugar, chocolate peanut butter, butter, vanilla, milk.

          FRONT ROW: Milk, unsalted butter, vanilla

          MIDDLE ROW: Peanut butter

          BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, semisweet chocolate

          Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients and instructions.

          Step by Step Instructions

          The first collages shows a bowl holds the dry ingredients, the sugar, butter, shorting and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer.

          Step 1. Whisk together the flour, baking soda and salt in a bowl. Set aside. Step 2. Add the peanut butter, shortening, butter, both sugars and vanilla to the bowl of a mixer. Step 3. Beat until well combined. Step 4. Add the eggs and beat until blended. It may curdle at this point. If it does, raise the speed of the mixer and continue beating. If that doesn't take care of it, the next step will.

          The second collage shows the flour added to the wet ingredients, the completed batter, peanuts and sugar in the processor bowl, then processed.

          Step 5. Add the dry ingredients and mix completely . Step 6. Beat on low until the dough is completely mixed. If resting in the fridge overnight, transfer to a storage container. Step 7. Place the peanuts and granulated sugar in the bowl of a processor. Step 8. Process until the peanuts are finely chopped. Do not over process and turn it to a paste.

          A cookie is rolled in the peanut sugar, the cookies on a sheet tray, double panned and sorted into pairs.

          Step 9. Place the peanut sugar in a bowl. Add a rounded cookie, scoop up some of the peanut sugar and a peanut butter cookie and roll them around in your hands so the sugar attaches. Step 10. Here are the steps to the final shaping of the cookie. From left to right, the cookie dropped from a #40 disher/scooper (about 1 ½ tablespoons each). The cookies rolled into balls between your hands. The balls covered in the peanut sugar and finally placed on the parchment then flatted to about ½ " thick or about 1 ½" in diameter. Bake as called for. Step 11. Place the cookies, 3 apart and 4 down on a half sheet pan. Double pan the cookies to prevent the bottoms from over browning. Step 12. Pair the cookies and arrange them bottom side up.

          The fina collage shows
the ingrediets for the filling in the mixing bowl, the filling mixed, the filling piped on and the cookies sandwiched.

          Step 13. Place all of the filling ingredients except the milk in the bowl of a mixer. Step 14. Beat until smooth, adding the milk a bit at a time until the filling pipeable. Step 15. With a 3 5 open star, pipe or spoon the filling onto the bottom of the cookies to within about ¼"of the edge. Step 16. Place the top cookie on the filling and press down lightly to bring the filling to the edge of the cookies.

          Recipe FAQS

          What peanut butter should I use?

          Commercial creamy works best for these cookies. Natural or homemade not so much.

          What if I don't have bread flour?

          All purpose flour can be substituted.

          Do I have to use the peanut sugar?

          No, but the cookies will lack the texture of the crunchy peanut sugar.

          Expert Tips

          • The bread flour is important, but all-purpose can be subbed if necessary.
          • Chilling the dough overnight makes a better cookie.
          • The shortening is important to keep the cookies from spreading excessively when baked.
          • Make sure to pair the cookies before filling for the best looking sandwich cookies.
          • Use salted peanuts for the peanut sugar to give an extra flavor boost.
          • These keep well for days in a covered tin.
          This picture features several Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies on a plate with one of them half eaten.

          Cookies You're Sure to Like

          • A plate of Viennese Whirls with strawberry and chocolate filling in front of gift boxes.
            Viennese Whirl Cookies
          • Dulche de leche cookies with the five finishes - pecan, pecan and sugar, plain chocolate, plain cookie, with sanding sugar
            Dulce de Leche Cookies - Your Way
          • Finished photo
            S'Mores Revisited
          • Almost Oreos with Black Onyx Cocoa

          If you love these Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

          Four Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies on a white plate with a brown rim.

          Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies

          Helen S. Fletcher
          These Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies are loaded with peanuts used three ways for the most peanuty cookie ever and are the perfect end to an all American barbecue.
          No ratings yet
          Print Recipe Pin Recipe
          Prep Time 55 minutes mins
          Baking time 16 minutes mins
          Total Time 1 hour hr 11 minutes mins
          Course Cookies
          Cuisine American
          Servings 20 sandwiched cookies
          Calories 507 kcal
          Prevent your screen from going dark

          Ingredients

          Peanut Butter Cookies

          • 2 ½ cups bread flour (350 grams)
          • 1 teaspoon baking soda
          • ½ teaspoon salt
          • 1 cup peanut butter (225 grams)
          • ½ cup unsalted butter (114 grams)
          • ½ cup shortening (114 grams)
          • ¾ cup granulated sugar (150 grams)
          • ¾ cup brown sugar, light or dark (150 grams)
          • 2 teaspoons vanilla
          • 2 large eggs

          Peanut Sugar

          • ¾ cup salted peanuts (100 grams)
          • ⅓ cup granulated sugar (65 grams)

          Chocolate Peanut Butter Filling

          • 1 cup peanut butter (225 grams)
          • ⅓ cup unsalted butter (75 grams)
          • 2 cups powdered sugar (260 grams)
          • 5 ounces semisweet chocolate (150 grams)
          • 2 teaspoons vanilla
          • 4 to 5 tablespoons milk as needed

          Instructions
           

          Peanut Butter Cookies

          • Preheat the oven to 350°F if baking immediately.  Line several baking sheets with parchment.  Set aside.
          • Whisk the flour, baking soda, and salt together in a bowl.  Set aside.  
          • Beat the peanut butter, butter, shortening, sugars, and vanilla in a mixing bowl until well combined.  
          • Add the eggs and beat well.  It may curdle at some point.  If it does, raise the speed of the mixer and continue beating.  
          • Add the flour and beat until everything is completely combined.
          • Place in a container and refrigerate overnight.
          • When ready to bake, remove from the refrigerator and room temp for about 20 minutes to make the cookies easier to shape.
          • Drop the cookies with a #40 disher/scooper (about 1 ½ tablespoons). Roll the cookie between your hands into a smooth ball. Roll in the peanut sugar by scooping some of the sugar and the ball and roll between your hands so the sugar adheres to the cookie.
          • Place the balls 3 across and 4 down on a parchment lined baking sheet. These will spread quite a bit. Press the balls down lightly with the palm of your hand to about ½" thick or 1 ½" in diameter.
          • Bake for 13 minutes, turn the sheet and bake for 3 to 4minutes more. They will be puffy but will fall as they cool. Don't over bake them. They will be crisp after cooling but will soften after filling.

          Peanut Sugar

          • Combine the peanuts and sugar in the bowl of a processor. Process until the peanuts are finely chopped. Remove to a bowl.

          Chocolate Peanut Butter Filling

          • Combine all but the milk in the bowl of a mixer. Mix until it come together. If too stiff to pipe, add the milk a little at a time.
          • Pair the cookies for size and shape. Place the cookies, bottom side up, keeping the pairs together. With a #5 open star tip, pipe the filling onto the bottom cookie to within about ¼" of the edge. Place the top cookie on the filling and gently press down to take the filling to the edge.
          • Let the cookies set up and dry for several hours then place them in an airtight tin where they will last for days.

          Notes

          There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
          As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
          _________________________________________________
          The bread flour is important, but all-purpose can be subbed if necessary.
          Chilling the dough overnight makes a better cookie.
          The shortening is important to keep the cookies from spreading excessively when baked.
          Make sure to pair the cookies before filling for the best looking sandwich cookies.
          Use salted peanuts for the peanut sugar to give an extra flavor boost.
          These keep well for days in a covered tin.
          These can be made smaller by using a smaller disher/scooper.  Reduce the baking time.
          The cookies can be made without filling and stored in an airtight container for a week before filling.
          The peanut butter cookies great by themselves.

          Nutrition

          Serving: 20cookiesCalories: 507kcalCarbohydrates: 56gProtein: 11gFat: 28gSaturated Fat: 10gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 40mgSodium: 289mgPotassium: 296mgFiber: 3gSugar: 36gVitamin A: 271IUCalcium: 36mgIron: 1mg
          Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

          Lemon Strawberry Cake

          Modified: May 17, 2026 · Published: May 5, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

          A slice of the gluten free Lemon Strawberry Cake sits on a white plate with daisies on the table.

          This make ahead, amazingly easy Lemon Strawberry Cake is naturally gluten free which makes it a treat for almost anyone. Despite it's sophisticated look it's really doable. The cake takes minutes in the processor, is liberally soaked in a lemon syrup and the shiny strawberry filling is a juicy, no cook recipe that will enlarge your idea about thickeners.

          A slice of the gluten free Lemon Strawberry Cake sits on a white plate with daisies on the table.

          This cake started out as a simple lemon cake soaked in lots of lemon syrup for my gluten free son. When I needed a quick birthday cake, I simply added whipped cream and fresh strawberries set with Instant Clearjel. If you haven't used this before, I can almost guarantee you will use again and again. It is so simple and so much better than cooking them down to hold their shape. I'll show you how in the step-by-step photos.

          Ingredients that make this gluten free cake

          Almond flour is the substitute for flour. My favorite brand of almond flour is Blue Diamond Almond Flour which I buy from Amazon. It comes in 3 pound bags which I keep frozen. What I like is that is is finely ground and scoopable. If yours isn't, just run it through a food processor.

          The xanthan gum provides body and structure in baking to gluten free recipes. I have seen this product in my grocery store. Bob's Red Mill has it as well as other brands. Without it cakes tend to cave in from lack of structure and the overall texture is not the same as with flour.

          Instant Clearjel is pure magic. There are two kinds of Clearjel. The regular one requires heat to jel but the instant does not. It is mixed with the sugar, water is added and it thickens instantly. Just add the strawberries or other fruit and use as directed. I love using it because fresh fruit retains all of its flavor and color, unlike cooking it to reduce the juices. Products made the instant clearjel can also be frozen.

          The last ingredient that adds texture to the cake is yellow cornmeal which can be found on grocery shelves.

          Other strawberry recipes to add to your collection include: Chocolate Strawberry Ruffle Cake, Strawberry Bread, and the simple as can be Chocolate Strawberry Pie.

          [feast_advanced_jump_to]

          What Makes This So Interesting

          • It's so easy. Yes, there are several parts but each one is simple.
          • For something so easy, it has tons of flavor.
          • The cake can be made ahead including being soaked and frozen to be finished later.
          • The cake, in its entirety can be made a day ahead.
          • A no cook, fresh strawberry topping over whipped cream makes this Lemon Strawberry Cake full fresh flavor.

          Recipe Ingredients

          Gluten Free Lemon Cake

          The ingredients for the Lemon Cake are almond flour, cornmeal. lemon zest, butter, egggs, sugar, baking soda, salt and xanthum gum.

          FRONT ROW: Baking powder, salt, xanthun gum

          MIDDLE ROW: Butter, eggs, cornmeal

          BACK ROW: Almond flour, sugar and lemons

          Lemon Soak

          The ingredients for the lemon soak are lemon juice, sugar and butter.

          FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter

          BACK ROW: Lemon juice, granulated sugar

          Strawberries and Cream Topping

          Ingredients to finish the cake include, fresh strawberries, water, heav cream, sugar, instant clear jel, food coloring and powdered sugar.

          FRONT ROW: Granulated sugar, Instant Clearjel, red food coloring (optional) and powdered sugar.

          BACK ROW: Strawberries, water, heavy cream

          NOTE: Please follow the ingredients on the recipe card as some in the photo are different.

          Please be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients and instructions.

          Step by Step Instructions

          The first collage for the Lemon Strawberry Cake  show teh dry ingredients in the food processor,, processed, butter added and all processed.

          Step 1. Add the dry ingredients to the bowl of the processor. Step 2. Process to combine them. Step 3. Add the softened butter. Step 4. Process until it comes it comes together.

          This collage shows the eggs being added, the batter processed, batter left on the processor blade and then flung to the side of the bowl.

          Step 5. Add the eggs to the processor bowl. Step 6. Process until it is completely mixed and forms a ring around the blade. Step 7. Remove as much of the batter as possible with a hard plastic spatula to the prepared pan. Step 8. Put the top back o the processor and process briefly. The remainder of the batter stuck to the blade will be flung to the side of the bowl by centrifugal force of the blade going around at high speed. Remove the blade and scrape out the remainder of the batter. For more tips when using the food processor see my post on Food Processor Tips When Baking.

          The third collage shows the batter smoothed int he baking pan, the cake baked and turned upside down, the lemon juice and sugar in a small pan and the butter added.

          Step 9. Spread the batter evenly in the pan. Using a small offset spatula makes this easier. Step 10. Bake the cake as called for and turn upside down after briefly cooling. Step 11. Place the lemon juice and sugar for the lemon soak in a small saucepan. Step 12. Add the butter.

          This collages hows the lemon soak boiling, then finished int he pan,being brushed on the cake and the cake totally soaked.

          Step 13. Bring the soaking syrup to a hard boil. Step 14. Remove it from the heat and let the bubbling subside.Step 15. Brush it on the cake using it all. It will seem like a lot but it's important. Brush the outer sides of the cake also. Step 16. The cake after all of the the lemon soak has been brushed on.

          Instant clearjel and sugar in a bowl, whisked with water, red food coloring added and strawberries mixed in.

          Step 17. Add the instant clearjel to the sugar. Step 18. Add the water and whisk together. Step 19. Add coloring if it is being used. Step 20. Stir in the strawberries. Set aside.

          The last collage shows the cream and powdered sugar in a mixing bowl, it is whipped, spread on the cake and the cake is finished with the strawberries and  edged in whipped cream.

          Step 21. Add the powdered sugar to the cream in a mixing bowl. Step 22. Whip the cream until stiff. Step 23. Spread half the whipped cream over the cake layer. Step 24. Pile the strawberries about 1 ½" in from the edge. Fit a piping bag with a #5 open star and pipe a wreath around the edge of the cake to finish it.

          Recipe FAQS

          What is Clearjel made of?

          Instant ClearJel is made of a single ingredient: modified food starch. ClearJel is made from corn that has been ground and processed to sort out specific starches with certain sought-after gelling properties.

          Is Sure Jell the same as Clearjel?

          No. Sure jell is based on pectin which is a different type of thickener.

          What is Xanthan gum made of?

          Although it sounds like something made in a laboratory it's acutally made from fermented corn sugar that has been broken down by a plant bacteria called Xanthomonas campestri. What remains is dried and turned into a powder known as the food additive xanthan gum.

          How do you pronounce Xanthan?

          Zan-thun. As with other words starting with an X,they are pronounced as though the X is a Z.

          Expert Tips

          • I use the term "softened butter" where others use room temperature because everyones kitchen is not the same temperature. The ideal temp for creaming butter or mixing in is between 72°F and 74°F. This is where the butter and sugar can beat to their fluffiest.
          • As unusual as this seems, slightly underbaking this cake is preferable to overbaking.
          • Make sure to use instant clearjel as the regular will not work here.
          • It seems like a lot of liquid for one layer of cake but it will absorb it all as there is no flour in this cake.
          • Make sure to use the measurements for the clearjel thickener on the recipe card as they are different from the ingredients in the photo.
          This photo is of a slice of the Lemon Strawberry Cake on a white plate with a daisy in the background and the cake on a serving plate.

          Looking for More Luscious Desserts?

          • A slice of chocolate cake, peanut butter mousse glazed in chocolate on a marble plate
            Chocolate Peanut Butter Mousse Cake
          • A butter crust holds a raspberry jam filling topped with an almond filling of toasted almonds, sugar, butter, eggs, amaretto, almond and vanilla flavoring. It is finished with a dusting of powdered sugar
            Easy Almond Raspberry Tart
          • Rhubarb Cream Tart
            Rhubarb Cream Tart with Strawberry Sauce

          If you love this Lemon Strawberry Cake, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

          A slice of the gluten free Lemon Strawberry Cake sits on a white plate with daisies on the table.

          Lemon Strawberry Cake

          Helen S. Fletcher
          This amazing Lemon Strawberry Cake is naturally gluten free which makes it a treat for almost anyone and despite its sophisticated look it's really easy to pull off.
          5 from 1 vote
          Print Recipe Pin Recipe
          Prep Time 20 minutes mins
          Cook Time 40 minutes mins
          Finishing 45 minutes mins
          Total Time 1 hour hr 45 minutes mins
          Course Cake
          Cuisine American
          Servings 12
          Calories 599 kcal
          Prevent your screen from going dark

          Ingredients

          Lemon Cake

          • 2 large lemons, zested and juiced
          • 2 ½ cups almond flour (250 grams)*
          • ¾ cup yellow cornmeal (115 grams)
          • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
          • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder
          • 1 teaspoon xanthan gum
          • ¼ teaspoon salt
          • 14 tablespoons unsalted butter, softened (205 grams)
          • 3 large eggs

          Lemon Soaking Syrup

          • ⅓ cup fresh lemon juice from above
          • ¾ cup granulated sugar (150 grams)
          • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter

          Strawberry and Cream Topping

          • 1 quart strawberries
          • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
          • 4 teaspoons instant clearjel
          • Red food coloring, optional
          • ¼ cup cold water
          • 1 ½ cups heavy cream
          • ⅓ cup powdered sugar (45 grams)

          Instructions
           

          Lemon Cake

          • Preheat the oven to 350°F.  Line the bottom of a 9x2” round cake pan with parchment.  Spray the paper and sides of the pan with a non-stick baking release.  Set aside.
          • If not weighing the almond flour, stir and spoon it before lightly spooning it into the cup. I encourage you to weigh for the best results.
          • Zest the two lemons and squeeze the juice for the lemon soak.
          • Combine the almond flour, cornmeal, granulated sugar, baking powder, xanthun gum, salt and lemon zest in the bowl of a processor.  Process to combine the ingredients and grind the almond flour and cornmeal smaller.  
          • Add the softened butter and process until it comes together.
          • Add the eggs and process until the batter circles the steel blade and the batter is completely mixed..
          • Remove as much of the batter as possible with a hard plastic spatula. Replace the top on the processor and process briefly to sling the batter to the side of the bowl and off the blade. Remove the blade and add the batter to the pan. Smooth the top of the batter.
          • Place the pan on the center rack of the oven and bake for 35 to 40 minutes until a tester comes out cleanly. Slightly underbaked is preferable to overbaking.
          • Cool the baked cake in the pan for about 15 minutes. Turn the cake out onto a cooling rack leaving it upside down. Place a piece of waxed paper under the cooling rack.

          Lemon Soaking Syrup

          • While the cake cools in the pan, combine the lemon juice, sugar and butter in a small saucepan.  Bring to a boil and brush or spoon onto the cake, including the sides, using all of it.  Allow the sauce to soak in if it pools or puddles on top.
          • Cool the cake completely.

          Strawberries and Whipped Cream Topping

          • Wash the strawberries and dry them. Cut them into medium size pieces.  Set aside. 
          • Whisk the Instant Clearjel and sugar together in a large bowl.  Whisk in the water.  If using the food coloring, add it now. If the liquid seems overly stiff, add a bit of water to dilute it. Add the strawberries and stir to coat all of them.  Set aside.
          • Combine the whipped cream and powdered sugar in the bowl of a mixer.  Beat until stiff peaks just start to form.  
          • Top the cake with half of the whipped cream.  Place the strawberries about 1 to 1 ½ inch inside the top edge of the cake.  
          • Place the remainder of the cream in a piping bag fitted with a # 5 open star tip and pipe around the edges of the cake, enclosing the strawberry filling.
          • Refrigerate until serving. This may be made the day before. Remove from the fridge while having dinner or a bit before serving.

          Notes

          There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.
          As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
          _______________________________________________________
          The cake can be made ahead including being soaked and frozen to be finished later. Freeze the cake layer, wrap well in foil and freeze for several months.  Thaw to use.
          The cake, in its entirety can be made a day ahead.
          I use the term "softened butter" where others use room temperature because everyones kitchen is not the same temperature. The ideal temp for creaming butter or mixing in is between 72°F and 74°F. This is where the butter and sugar can beat to their fluffiest.
          As unusual as this seems, slightly underbaking this cake is preferable to overbaking.
          Make sure to use instant clearjel as the regular will not work here.
          It seems like a lot of liquid for one layer of cake but it will absorb it all as there is no flour in this cake.
          Make sure to use the measurements for the clearjel thickener on the recipe card as they are different from the ingredients in the photo. 

          Nutrition

          Serving: 12sevingsCalories: 599kcalCarbohydrates: 56gProtein: 9gFat: 40gSaturated Fat: 18gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 123mgSodium: 187mgPotassium: 205mgFiber: 5gSugar: 42gVitamin A: 1010IUVitamin C: 47mgCalcium: 124mgIron: 2mg
          Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!
          • « Previous Page
          • 1
          • 2
          • 3
          • 4
          • 5
          • …
          • 14
          • Next Page »

          Hi, I'm Helen! Being a self-taught baker and owning a bakery for over 25 years, I found many ways to make baking more successful and less intimidating. Even busy people can bake as in many cases, recipes can be done over days. The goal is to make your baking life easier, more enjoyable, with great outcomes on a consistent basis.

          More about me →

          Subscribe to receive our free ebook

          SUBSCRIBE

          Spring Baking

          • Slices of the Strawberry Cake sit on a marble plate with fresh strawberries.
            Strawberry Cake - A Little Slice of Heaven
          • Irish Apple Cake dusted with powdered sugar on a white and green tray
            Irish Apple Cake
          • Blueberry poke cake is a 9x13" cake that has holes poked in it and filled with a blueberry compote. It is finished with whipped cream and blueberry filling
            Blueberry Lemon Poke Cake
          • An Individual Italian Tiramisu sits on a cream colored plate and dark beige and silver trim with a cup of tea and a plater of tiramisu in the background,
            Individual Italian Tiramisu
          • A whole coffee cake muffin sits on a wite plate with a colored mug on the plate and more muffins in the background.
            Coffee Cake Muffins (Bakery-Style & Moist)
          • Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte on a golden plate.
            Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte

          Popular Recipes

          • This Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cake features a pineapple slice with a cherry in the middle on top of a yellow cake sitting on a blue and white plate.
            Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes
          • A plate of Cuccidati, fig and nut filled Italian Cookies sprinkled with multi-colored nonpariels.
            Cuccidati - Italy's Finest Cookie
          • This picture shows a slice of the coffee cake on a white, lace edged plate on a marble counter.
            Apricot Crumb Coffee Cake
          • Langue de Chat cookies in a bowl.
            Langue de Chat
          • Angel food Cake
            Perfectly Easy Angel Food Cake
          • Large nut pieces for Chopping Nuts
            Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way

          Available Now

          Available on Amazon, Barnes & Noble, Apple Books, as well as other sites and in book stores.
          AUTOGRAPHED COPIES ARE AVAILABLE
          Click here to purchase an autographed copy.

          Footer

          ↑ back to top

          About

          • About Helen
          • Privacy Policy

          Newsletter

          • Sign Up! for emails and updates

          Contact

          • Contact
          • Press
          • Facebook
          • Pinterest
          • Instagram
          • Threads
          • Bluesky

          COPYRIGHT © 2026 PASTRIES LIKE A PRO

          Rate This Recipe

          Your vote:




          A rating is required
          A name is required
          An email is required